Sri

SAI RAM
INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY
An Autonomous Institution
West Tambaram, Chennai - 44
www.sairamit.edu.in

Approved by AICTE, New Delhi NATIONAL ASSESSMENT AND

ACCREDITATION COUNCIL
ISO 9001 : 2015

Affiliated to Anna University

NATIONAL
INSTITUTIONAL
RANKING
FRAMEWORK
ACCREDITED

DEPARTMENT OF
ELECTRONICS AND
COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

AUTONOMOUS
REGULATIONS CURRICULUM AND
2020
SYLLABUS
Academic Year 2020-21 onwards I - VIII
SEMESTERS
 SRI SAIRAM INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY

VISION
To be iden fied as a “Centre of Excellence” with high standards of Knowledge
Dissemina on and Research opportuni es and to transform the students to
imbibe quali es of technical exper se of interna onal standards and high levels
of ethical values, who in turn shall contribute to the advancement of society and
human kind.

MISSION
We shall dedicate and commit ourselves to a ain and maintain excellence in
Technical Educa on through commitment and con nuous improvement of
infrastructure and equipment and provide an inspiring environment for Learning,
Research and Innova on for our students to transform them into complete
human beings with ethical and social values.

QUALITY POLICY

We at Sri Sai Ram Ins tute of Technology are commi ed to build a be er na on

through Quality Educa on with team spirit. Our students are enabled to excel in
all values of Life and become Good Ci zens. We con nually improve the System,
Infrastructure and Services to sa sfy the Students, Parents, Industry and Society.

DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGG.

VISION
To become a leading department of excellence in academic and research
imparting high quality technical education in Electronics and Communication
Engineering through international standards and making our students
technologically superior and ethically strong to serve the society and mankind.

MISSION
To create an inspiring environment that shall enhance the growth of innovative
research professional excellences who can contribute to the society and
mankind, ethical and societal values through life-long learning.
 Curriculum ECE
AUTONOMOUS CURRICULA AND SYLLABI
Regulations 2020
SEMESTER I
WEEK HOURS TOTAL
S. COURSE
COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO CODE L T P HOURS

THEORY
1 20BSMA101 Engineering Mathematics-I 3 1 0 4 4
2 20HSEN101 Technical English-I 3 0 0 3 3
3 20BSPH101 Engineering Physics 3 0 0 3 3
4 20BSCY101 Engineering Chemistry 3 0 0 3 3
5 20ESCS101 Problem Solving and Programming in C 3 0 0 3 3
6 20ESGE101 Engineering Graphics 1 2 0 3 3
PRACTICAL
7 20BSPL101 Physics and Chemistry Laboratory 0 0 3 3 1.5
8 20ESPL101 Programming in C Laboratory 0 0 3 3 1.5
VALUE ADDITIONS - I
9 20TPHS101 Skill Enhancement 0 0 2 2 1
10 20HSMG101 Personal Values 2 0 0 2 0
TOTAL 29 23

SEMESTER II
WEEK HOURS TOTAL
S. COURSE
COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO CODE L T P HOURS

THEORY

1 20BSMA201 Engineering Mathematics -II 3 1 0 4 4

2 20HSEN201 Technical English - II 3 0 0 3 3
3 20ESIT201 Python Programming with lab 3 0 2 5 4
4 20BSPH201 Physics of Electronic Devices 3 0 0 3 3
5 20ECPC201 Circuit Analysis 3 0 0 3 3
PRACTICAL
6 20ESGE201 Engineering Practices Laboratory 0 0 3 3 1.5
7 20ECPL201 Circuits and Devices Laboratory 0 0 3 3 1.5
8 20ECTE201 PCB Design 0 0 2 2 1
VALUE ADDITIONS - II
9 20TPHS201 Skill Enhancement 0 0 2 2 1
10 20HSMG201 Interpersonal Values 2 0 0 2 0
TOTAL 30 22
i
SEMESTER III
WEEK HOURS TOTAL
S. COURSE
COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO CODE L T P HOURS

THEORY

1 20ECPC301 Digital Electronics 3 0 0 3 3

2 20ECPC302 Electromagnetic Fields & Waveguides 3 1 0 4 4
3 20ECPC303 Signals and Systems 3 1 0 4 4
4 20ECPW301 R Programming with Laboratory 3 0 2 5 4
5 20BSMA301 Linear Algebra, Partial Differential
Equations and Transforms 3 1 0 4 4

PRACTICAL
6 20ECPL301 Digital Circuits Laboratory 0 0 3 3 1.5
7 20ECTE301 Live-in-Lab - I 0 0 2 2 1
VALUE ADDITIONS - III
8 20ECTP301 Skill Enhancement 0 0 2 2 1
9 20MGMC301 Constitution of India 2 0 0 2 0
TOTAL 28 22.5

SEMESTER IV
WEEK HOURS TOTAL
S. COURSE
COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO CODE L T P HOURS

THEORY

1 20ECPC401 Communication Theory 3 0 0 3 3

2 20ECPW401 Electronic Circuits with Laboratory 3 0 2 5 4
3 20ECPW402 Linear integrated Circuits with Laboratory 3 0 2 5 4
4 20ECPC402 Microcontrollers & Embedded Systems 3 0 0 3 3
5 20BSMA401 Probability theory and Stochastic
processes 3 1 0 4 4
6 20BSCY201 Environmental Science and Engineering 3 0 0 3 3
PRACTICAL

7 20ECPL401 Microcontrollers & Embedded Systems

Laboratory 0 0 3 3 1.5
VALUE ADDITIONS - IV
8 20ECTE401 Live-in-Lab -II 0 0 2 2 1
9 20ECTP401 Skill Enhancement 0 0 2 2 1

TOTAL 30 24.5

ii
 Curriculum ECE

SEMESTER V
WEEK HOURS TOTAL
S. COURSE
COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO CODE L T P HOURS

THEORY

1 20ECPC501 Digital Communication 3 0 0 3 3

2 20ECPW501 Discrete Time Signal Processing
with Laboratory 3 0 2 5 4
3 20ECPC502 VLSI Design 3 0 0 3 3
4 20ECELXXX Professional Elective-I 3 0 0 3 3
5 20XXOEXXX Open Elective-I 3 0 0 3 3
PRACTICAL
6 20ECPL501 Communication Systems Laboratory 0 0 3 3 1.5
7 20ECPL502 VLSI Laboratory 0 0 3 3 1.5
8 20ECTE501 Live-in-Lab III 0 0 4 4 2
VALUE ADDITIONS - V

9 20ECTP501 Skill Enhancement 0 0 2 2 1

TOTAL 29 22

SEMESTER VI
WEEK HOURS TOTAL
S. COURSE
COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO CODE L T P HOURS

THEORY

1 20ECPC601 Transmission Lines & Antennas 3 0 0 3 3

2 20ECPC602 Communication Networks 3 0 0 3 3
3 20ECPC603 Wireless Communication 3 0 0 3 3
4 20ECELXXX Professional Elective-II 3 0 0 3 3
5 20XXOEXXX Open Elective - II 3 0 0 3 3
PRACTICAL
6 20HSPL501 Communication and Soft Skills Laboratory 0 0 2 2 1
7 20ECPL601 Antennas Laboratory 0 0 3 3 1.5
8 20ECPL602 Networks Laboratory 0 0 3 3 1.5
9 20ECPJ601 Innovative Design Project 0 0 2 2 1

VALUE ADDITIONS - VI
10 20ECTP601 Skill Enhancement 0 0 2 2 1
TOTAL 27 21

iii
 Curriculum ECE

SEMESTER VII
WEEK HOURS TOTAL
S. COURSE
COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO CODE L T P HOURS

THEORY

1 20ECPC701 RF and Microwave Engineering 3 0 0 3 3

2 20ECPC702 Optical Communication 3 0 0 3 3
3 20CSPC601 Artificial Intelligence 3 0 0 3 3
4 20ECELXXX Professional Elective-III 3 0 0 3 3
5 20HSMG601 Principles of Engineering Management 3 0 0 3 3
PRACTICAL
6 20ECPL701 Advanced Communication Laboratory 0 0 3 3 1.5
7 20CSPL601 Artificial Intelligence Laboratory 0 0 3 3 1.5
8 20ECPJ701 Project Phase - I 0 0 4 4 2
VALUE ADDITIONS - VII

9 20ECTP701 Skill Enhancement 0 0 2 2 1

TOTAL 27 21

SEMESTER VIII
WEEK HOURS TOTAL
S. COURSE
COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDITS
NO CODE L T P HOURS

THEORY

1 20ECELXXX Professional Elective - IV 3 0 0 3 3

PRACTICAL
2 20ECPJ801 Project Phase - II 0 0 8 8 4
TOTAL 11 7

CREDIT DISTRIBUTION

Category BS ES HS EL PC+PL PW OE TE PJ TP IS MC TOTAL

Credit 29.5 13 10 12 57.5 16 6 5 7 7 3 Y 166

Percentage 17.8 7.8 6.0 7.2 34.6 9.6 3.6 3.0 4.2 4.2 1.8 -

*IS-Internship

iv
 Curriculum ECE

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - I
S. COURSE WEEK HOURS TOTAL
COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDIT STREAM
NO CODE L T P HOURS

1 20ECEL501 Advanced Communication Systems

and Techniques 3 0 0 3 3 Wireless

2 20ECEL502 Industrial IOT 3 0 0 3 3 Wireless

3 20ECEL503 FPGA & ASIC Design 3 0 0 3 3 VLSI

4 20ECEL504 Programmable Logic Controllers 3 0 0 3 3 VLSI

5 20ECEL505 Sensors and RFID 3 0 0 3 3 RF & Green

6 20ECEL506 Sustainable Energy and Energy RF & Green

Management 3 0 0 3 3
7 20ECEL507 Sensors and measurements 3 0 0 3 3 Signal
Processing
8. 20ECEL508 Control Systems Engineering 3 0 0 3 3 Signal
Processing
9. 20ECEL509 Soft Computing 3 0 0 3 3 Biomedical

10. 20ECEL510 Biosignal and Image Processing 3 0 0 3 3 Biomedical

11. 20MGEL501 Intellectual Property Rights 3 0 0 3 3 Management

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - II
S. COURSE WEEK HOURS TOTAL
COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDIT STREAM
NO CODE L T P HOURS

1 20ECEL601 Radio Access Networks 3 0 0 3 3 Wireless

2 20ECEL602 Wireless Sensor Networks 3 0 0 3 3 Wireless

3 20ECEL603 CMOS Analog IC Design 3 0 0 3 3 VLSI

4 20ECEL604 Software for Embedded Systems 3 0 0 3 3 VLSI

5 20ECEL605 Electromagnetic Interference and

Compatibility 3 0 0 3 3 RF & Green

6 20ECEL606 Green Radio Communication Networks 3 0 0 3 3 RF & Green

Signal
7 20ECEL607 Biomedical Instrumentation 3 0 0 3 3 Processing
8. 20ECEL608 Pattern Recognition 3 0 0 3 3 Signal
Processing
9. 20ECEL609 Machine Learning Techniques 3 0 0 3 3 Biomedical

10. 20ECEL610 Medical Electronics 3 0 0 3 3 Biomedical

11. 20MGEL601 Total Quality Management 3 0 0 3 3 Management

v
 Curriculum ECE

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - III

S. COURSE WEEK HOURS TOTAL
COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDIT STREAM
NO CODE L T P HOURS

1 20ECEL701 Cognitive Radio 3 0 0 3 3 Wireless

2 20ECEL702 Smart Antennas for Mobile

Communication and GPS 3 0 0 3 3 Wireless

3 20ECEL703 Mixed Signal IC Design 3 0 0 3 3 VLSI

4 20ECEL704 Embedded Processor for

Signal Processing 3 0 0 3 3 VLSI

5 20ECEL705 Antennas for Modern Communication 3 0 0 3 3 RF & Green

6 20ECEL706 Microwave and Millimeter Wave RF & Green

Circuits and Systems 3 0 0 3 3
Signal
7 20ECEL707 DSP Processor Architecture Processing
and Programming 3 0 0 3 3
Signal
8. 20ECEL708 Brain Computer interface and Processing
its applications 3 0 0 3 3
9. 20ECEL709 Digital Image Processing 3 0 0 3 3 Biomedical

10. 20ECEL710 Deep Learning Principles & Practices 3 0 0 3 3 Biomedical

11. 20MGEL701 Foundation Skills in Integrated Management

Product Development 3 0 0 3 3

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - IV
S. COURSE WEEK HOURS TOTAL
COURSE TITLE CONTACT CREDIT STREAM
NO CODE L T P HOURS

1 20ECEL801 5G and 6G Wireless

Communication Systems 3 0 0 3 3 Wireless

2 20ECEL802 Underwater Wireless Communication

Systems 3 0 0 3 3 Wireless

3 20ECEL803 Electronic Packaging and Testing 3 0 0 3 3 VLSI

4 20ECEL804 Embedded Product Development 3 0 0 3 3 VLSI

5 20ECEL805 RF System Design and MMIC 3 0 0 3 3 RF & Green

6 20ECEL806 Photonic Networks 3 0 0 3 3 RF & Green

Signal
7 20ECEL807 Telehealth Technology 3 0 0 3 3 Processing

8. 20ECEL808 Medical Informatics 3 0 0 3 3 Signal

Processing
9. 20ECEL809 Robotics and Automation 3 0 0 3 3 Biomedical

10. 20ECEL810 Medical Imaging Systems 3 0 0 3 3 Biomedical

11. 20MGEL801 Professional Ethics and Values 3 0 0 3 3 Management

vi
 Curriculum ECE
PROGRAM EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)

PEO1 Acquire strong foundation in Engineering, Science and Technology for a

successful career in Electronics and Communication Engineering.
PEO2 Apply their knowledge and skills acquired to solve the issues in real world
Electronics and Communication sectors and to develop feasible and viable
systems.
PEO3 Be receptive to new technologies and attain professional competence through
professional society activities.
PEO4 Participate in lifelong learning, higher education efforts to emerge as expert
researchers and technologists.
PEO5 Practice the profession with ethics, integrity, leadership and social
responsibilities.
PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES (PSOs)

PSO 1 Design, implement and test Electronics and Communication systems using
analytical knowledge and applying modern hardware and software tools
PSO2 Develop their skills to solve problems and assess social, environmental issues
with ethics and manage different projects in multidisciplinary areas.

COMPONENTS OF THE CURRICULUM (COC)

Curriculum Content Total number

Total Number
Course Component (% of total number of of contact
of credits
credits of the program) hours
Basic Sciences(BS) 17.7 31 29.5
Engineering Sciences(ES) 7.8 17 13
Humanities and Social Sciences (HS) 6.0 16 10
Professional Electives(EL) 9.0 15 15
Program Core+Program Lab (PC+PL) 41.0 84 68.5
Program theory with Lab (PW) 2.4 5 4
Open Electives (OE) 3.6 6 6
Talent Enhancement (TE) 2.4 8 4
Project (PJ) 4.2 14 7
Training & Placement (TP) 4.2 14 7
Internships/Seminars (IS) 1.8 - 3
Mandatory Courses (MC) NA 2 NA
Total number of Credits 212 167

vii
 Curriculum ECE

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES(POs)
PROGRAM OUTCOME REPRESENTS THE KNOWLEDGE, SKILLS
AND ATTITUDES THAT THE STUDENTS WOULD BE EXPECTED TO
HAVE AT THE END OF THE 4 YEAR ENGINEERING DEGREE PROGRAM

12 02
Life-long
learning
01 Problem
Analysis
Engineering
Recognize the need for, and Identify and analyze
have the preparation, ability to
knowledge complex engineering
engage in independent and Apply the basic principle problems reaching logical
life-long learning in the context and knowledge of conclusions using the basic
of technological change. mathematics, science and principles of mathematics,
engineering principles to science and engineering.
solve technical problems.

11 03
Project Development
management of solutions
Demonstrate knowledge and Design solutions for
apply the principles of well-defined technical
engineering & management problems and assist with
in their own / team projects in
ING DE
EER
the design of systems,
multidisciplinary environments. components or processes

IN G to meet specified needs.

ENG

RE

10 04
E

Communicate Investigate
effectively complex problems
Communicate effectively Perform investigations, use
amongst the engineering research based knowledge
community, being able to and conduct experiments,
comprehend & write effective analyze and interpret the
reports, make presentations & results to provide valid
give/receive clear instructions. conclusions.

09
Individual &
05
Modern
Teamwork tool usage
Function effectively as Create, select and apply the
an individual, and as a latest techniques, resources
member or leader in and modern engineering / IT

07
diverse teams, and in tools to develop appropriate

08 06
multi-disciplinary solutions with an understanding
professional settings. of the limitations.
Environment &
Apply ethical Sustainability The Engineer
principles Demonstrate professional and Society
Apply ethical principles skills, knowledge and Apply reasoning based on
and commit to professional contextual reasoning to contextual knowledge to
ethics and responsibilities assess / environmental / assess societal, legal and
based on the norms of societal issues for cultural issues with
professional engineering sustainable development. competency in professional
pratices. engineering practices.

viii
 Syllabus ECE

SEMESTER - I
20BSMA101 L T P C
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS-I
SDG NO. 4 & 9 3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
The intent of the course is
l To understand and gain the knowledge of matrix algebra.
l To introduce the concepts of limits, continuity, derivatives and maxima and
Minima
l To acquaint the concept of improper integrals and the properties of definite
integrals.
l To provide understanding of double integration, triple integration and their
application.
l To introduce the concept of sequence and series and impart the knowledge
of Fourier series.

UNIT I MATRICES 12
Symmetric, skew symmetric and orthogonal matrices; Eigenvalues and
Eigenvectors of a real matrix – Characteristic equation – Properties of
Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors – Cayley-Hamilton theorem (excluding proof) –
Diagonalization of a Quadratic form using orthogonal transformation - Nature
of Quadratic forms.

UNIT II DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS 12

Limits, continuity, Differentiation rules - Maxima and Minima of functions of
one variable, partial derivatives (first and second order – basic problems),
Taylor's series for functions of two variables, Jacobian, Maxima & Minima of
functions of several variables, saddle points; Method of Lagrange multipliers.

UNIT III INTEGRAL CALCULUS 12

Evaluation of definite integrals - Techniques of Integration-Substitution rule -
Integration by parts, Integration of rational functions by partial fraction,
Integration of irrational functions. Applications of definite integrals to
evaluate surface area of revolution and volume of revolution. Evaluation of
improper integrals.

UNIT IV MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 12

Double integrals – Change of order of integration – Double integrals in polar
coordinates – Area enclosed by plane curves – Triple integrals – Volume of
solids – Change of variables in double and triple integrals.
1
 Syllabus ECE
UNIT V SEQUENCES AND SERIES 12
Introduction to sequences and series – power series – Taylor's series – series
for exponential, trigonometric, logarithmic, hyperbolic functions – Fourier
series – Half range Sine and Cosine series – Parseval's theorem.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:
1. James Stewart, “Calculus: Early Transcendentals”, Cengage Learning, 7th
Edition, New Delhi, 2015.
2. B. V. Ramana, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New
Delhi, 11th Reprint, 2010.

REFERENCES:
1. G.B. Thomas and R.L. Finney, “Calculus and Analytic Geometry”, 9th Edition,
Pearson, Reprint, 2002.
2. Erwin Kreyszig, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, 9th Edition, John
Wiley & Sons, 2006.
3. T. Veerarajan, “Engineering Mathematics for first year”, Tata McGraw-Hill,
New Delhi, 2008.
4. N.P. Bali and Manish Goyal, “A text-book of Engineering Mathematics”,
Laxmi Publications, Reprint, 2008.
5. B. S. Grewal, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, New
Delhi, 40th Edition, 2014.

WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://math.mit.edu/~gs/linearalgebra/ila0601.pdf
2. http://ocw.mit.edu/ans7870/18/18.013a/textbook/HTML/chapter30/
3. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/mathematics/18-02sc-multivariable-
calculus-fall-2010/2.-partial-derivatives/
4. http://ocw.mit.edu/ans7870/18/18.013a/textbook/HTML/chapter31/

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://www.khanacademy.org/math/linear-algebra/alternate-
bases/eigen-everything/v/linear-algebra-introduction-to-eigenvalues-
and-eigenvectors
2. https://www.khanacademy.org/math/differential-calculus

2
 ECE
Syllabus
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1. Diagonalize the matrix using orthogonal transformation and apply Cayley
Hamilton Theorem to find the inverse and integral powers of a square
matrix. (K3)
2. Evaluate the limit, examine the continuity and use derivatives to find
extreme values of a function. (K3)
3. Evaluate definite and improper integrals using techniques of integration.
(K3)
4. Apply double and triple integrals to find the area of a region and the
volume of a surface. (K3)
5. Compute infinite series expansion of a function. (K3)

CO - PO MAPPING :
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 2 1 1 - - - - - - 1

CO2 3 3 2 1 1 - - - - - - 1

CO3 3 3 2 1 1 - - - - - - 1

CO4 3 3 2 1 1 - - - - - - 1

CO5 3 3 2 1 1 - - - - - - 1

SEMESTER - I
20HSEN101 L T P C
TECHNICAL ENGLISH - I
SDG NO. 4 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
● To develop the basic LSRW skills of the students
● To encourage the learners to adapt to listening techniques
● To help learners develop their communication skills and converse fluently
in real contexts
● To help learners develop general and technical vocabulary through reading
and writing tasks

3
 Syllabus ECE
● To improve the language proficiency for better understanding of core
subjects

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Listening – short texts – formal and informal conversations - Speaking –
basics in speaking – speaking on given topics & situations – recording
speeches and strategies to improve - Reading – critical reading – finding key
information in a given text – shifting facts from opinions - Writing – free
writing on any given topic – autobiographical writing - Language
Development – tenses – voices- word formation: prefixes and suffixes – parts
of speech – developing hints

UNIT II READING AND LANGUAGE DEVELOPMENT 9

Listening - long texts - TED talks - extensive speech on current affairs and
discussions -Speaking – describing a simple process – asking and answering
questions - Reading comprehension – skimming / scanning / predicting &
analytical reading – question & answers – objective and descriptive answers
–identifying synonyms and antonyms - process description - Writing
instructions – Language Development – writing definitions – compound
words.

UNIT III SPEAKING AND INTERPRETATION SKILLS 9

Listening - dialogues & conversations - Speaking – role plays – asking about
routine actions and expressing opinions - Reading longer texts & making a
critical analysis of the given text - Writing – types of paragraph and writing
essays – rearrangement of jumbled sentences - writing recommendations -
Language Development – use of sequence words - cause & effect expressions
- sentences expressing purpose - picture based and newspaper based
activities – single word substitutes

UNIT IV VOCABULARY BUILDING AND WRITING SKILLS 9

Listening - debates and discussions – practicing multiple tasks – self
introduction – Speaking about friends/places/hobbies - Reading -Making
inference from the reading passage – Predicting the content of the reading
passage - Writing – informal letters/e-mails - Language Development -
synonyms & antonyms - conditionals – if, unless, in case, when and others –
framing questions.

UNIT V LANGUAGE DEVELOPMENT AND TECHNICAL WRITING 9

Listening - popular speeches and presentations - Speaking - impromptu
speeches & debates - Reading - articles – magazines/newspapers Writing –
essay writing on technical topics - channel conversion – bar diagram/ graph –
4
 Syllabus ECE
picture interpretation - process description - Language Development –
modal verbs - fixed / semi-fixed expressions – collocations
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Board of Editors. Using English: A Coursebook for Undergraduate
Engineers and Technologists. Orient Blackswan Limited, Hyderabad:
2015.
2. Dhanavel, S.P. English and Communication Skills for Students of Science
and Engineering. Orient Blackswan, Chennai, 2011.

REFERENCES:
1. Anderson, Paul V. Technical Communication: A Reader – Centered
Approach. Cengage, New Delhi, 2008.
2. Smith-Worthington, Darlene & Sue Jefferson. Technical Writing for
Success. Cengage, Mason, USA, 2007.
3. Grussendorf, Marion, English for Presentations, Oxford University Press,
Oxford, 2007.
4. Chauhan, Gajendra Singh and et.al.Technical Communication (Latest
Revised Edition). Cengage Learning India Pvt. Limited, 2018.

WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc19_hs31/preview
2. http://engineeringvideolectures.com/course/696

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://www.pearson.com/english/catalogue/business-english/
technical-english.html
2. https://www.cambridgeenglish.org/learning-english/free-resources/

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1. Express and explain short texts on different topics with key information
applying suitable vocabulary (K2)
2 Interpret and dramatize fluently in informal and formal contexts(K2)
3 Choose and apply the right syntax in comprehending diversified general
and technical articles (K3)
4 Analyze and write technical concepts in simple and lucid style (K3)
5 Construct informal letters and e-mails thoughtfully (K2)
6 Demonstrate technical concepts and summaries in correct grammar and
vocabulary (K2)
5
 Syllabus ECE
CO - PO MAPPING :
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 - - - - - - 1 - 2 3 1 1

CO2 - - - - - - - 1 2 3 2 1

CO3 - - - - - - - - 1 3 3 2

CO4 - 2 - - - - - 1 2 3 1 1

CO5 - - - - - - - 2 - 3 2 1

CO6 - - - - - - 3 - - 3 2 1

SEMESTER - I
20BSPH101 L T P C
ENGINEERING PHYSICS
SDG NO. 4 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l To educate and enhance the fundamental knowledge in Physics and its
applications relevant to various streams of Engineering and Technology

UNIT I CRYSTAL PHYSICS 9

Single crystalline, Polycrystalline and Amorphous materials - single crystals:
unit cell, crystal systems, Bravais lattices, directions and planes in a crystal -
Miller indices - Interplanar distance - Powder diffraction method - Debye
Scherer formula - Calculation of number of atoms per unit cell - Atomic radius -
Coordination number - packing factor for SC, BCC, FCC and HCP structures -
Polymorphism and allotropy - Diamond and Graphite structure (qualitative) -
Growth of single crystals: Solution and Melt growth Techniques.

UNIT II PROPERTIES OF MATTER 9

Elasticity - Stress - strain diagram and its uses - Poisson's ratio - Relationship
between three moduli of elasticity (qualitative) - Factors affecting elastic
modulus and tensile strength - Twisting couple - shaft - Torsion pendulum:
theory and experiment - bending of beams - bending moment - cantilever:
theory and experiment - uniform and non-uniform bending: theory and
experiment - I-shaped girders - stress due to bending in beams.

UNIT III QUANTUM PHYSICS 9

Black body radiation - Planck's theory (derivation) - Compton effect: theory -
6
 Syllabus ECE
wave particle duality - electron diffraction - progressive waves - wave equation
- concept of wave function and its physical significance - Schrö dinger's wave
equation - Time independent and Time dependent equations - particle in a box
(one dimensional motion) - Tunneling (qualitative) - scanning tunneling
microscope.

UNIT IV LASERS AND FIBER OPTICS 9

Lasers: population of energy levels, Einstein's A and B coefficients derivation -
pumping methods - resonant cavity, optical amplification (qualitative) - three
level and four level laser - CO2 laser - Semiconductor lasers: Homojunction and
Heterojunction.
Fiber optics: Principle, Numerical aperture and Acceptance angle - Types of
optical fibers (material, refractive index, mode) - Losses associated with
optical fibers - Fiber Optical Communication system (Block diagram) - Fiber
optic sensors: pressure and displacement.

UNIT V THERMAL PHYSICS 9

Transfer of heat energy - thermal expansion of solids and liquids - bimetallic
strips - thermal conduction, convection and radiation - heat conduction in
solids (qualitative) - thermal conductivity - Forbe's and Lee's disc method:
theory and experiment - conduction through compound media (series and
parallel) - thermal insulation - applications: heat exchangers, refrigerators
and solar water heaters.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. D.K. Bhattachary & T.Poonam, “Engineering Physics”. Oxford University
Press, 2015.
2. R.K. Gaur& S.L. Gupta, “Engineering Physics”. Dhanpat Rai Publishers,
2012.
3. B.K. Pandey & S.Chaturvedi, “Engineering Physics”, Cengage Learning
India, 2017.
4. V. Rajendran, “Engineering Physics”, Mc Graw Hill Publications Ltd. New
Delhi, 2014.
5. M.N. Avadhanulu& P.G. Kshirshagar, “A textbook of Engineering Physics”,
S. Chand & Co Ltd. 2016.

REFERENCES:
1. D. Halliday, . Resnick & J. Walker, “Principles of Physics”, Wiley, 2015.
2. R.A. Serway, & J.W. Jewett, “Physics for Scientists and Engineers”, Cengage
Learning, 2010.
3. N.K. Verma,” Physics for Engineers”, PHI Learning Private Limited, 2014.
7
 Syllabus ECE
4. P.A. Tipler & G. Mosca “Physics for Scientists and Engineers”,
W.H.Freeman, 2020.
5. Brijlal and Subramanyam, “Properties of Matter”, S. Chand Publishing,
2018.
6. Shatendra Sharma & Jyotsna Sharma, “Engineering Physics”, Pearson,
2018.

OUTCOMES :
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1. To understand the crystal systems and elastic properties of Materials (K2)
2. To distinguish different crystal structures and heat conduction in
conductor and insulators (K4)
3. To explain powder diffractionmethod-deformation of materials in
response to action load,quantum mechanics to understand wave particle
dualism (K2)
4. To apply quantum theory to set up one dimensional Schrodinger's wave
equation and applications to a matter wave system and principle of laser
action (K3)
5. To analyze bending of beams,types of optical fiber and modes of heat
transfer (K4)
6. To discuss light propagation in optical fibers and transfer of heat energy in
different measures and its applications (K2)

CO - PO MAPPING :
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2 3 3 - - - - - - - 1

CO2 3 2 3 3 - - 2 - - - - 3

CO3 3 3 3 2 - - 3 - - - - 2

CO4 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - - 3

CO5 3 3 3 3 - - 3 - - - - 3

CO6 3 3 3 3 - - 3 - - - - 3

8
 Syllabus ECE
SEMESTER - I
20BSCY101 L T P C
ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY
SDG NO. 4,6&7 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l To make the students conversant with boiler feed water requirements,
related problems and water treatment techniques
l To illustrate the principles of electrochemical reactions, redox reactions in
corrosion of materials and methods for corrosion prevention and
protection of materials
l To categorize types of fuels, calorific value calculations, manufacture of
solid, liquid and gaseous fuels
l To demonstrate the principles and generation of energy in batteries,
nuclear reactors, solar cells, windmills and fuel cells
l To recognize the applications of polymers, composites and nano-materials
in various fields

UNIT I WATER TECHNOLOGY AND SURFACE CHEMISTRY 9

Water Technology : Introduction – Hard water and Soft water. Hardness of
water – types – expression of hardness (numerical problems). Boiler troubles
– scale and sludge, priming and foaming, caustic embrittlement and boiler
corrosion. Treatment of boiler feed water – Internal treatment (carbonate,
phosphate, calgon, colloidal and sodium aluminate conditioning). External
treatment – Ion exchange process, Zeolite process –Domestic water treatment
(break point chlorination) –Desalination of brackish water – Reverse Osmosis.
Surface Chemistry: Adsorption – types – adsorption of gases on solids –
adsorption of solutes from solution – applications of adsorption –role of
adsorbents in catalysis and pollution abatement.

UNIT II ELECTROCHEMISTRY AND CORROSION 9

Electrochemistry: Cells – types (electrochemical and electrolytic cell) Redox
reaction – single electrode potential (oxidation potential and reduction
potential) – measurement and applications –Nernst equation (derivation
and problems) – electrochemical series and its significance.
Corrosion: Causes, factors and types – chemical and electrochemical
corrosion (galvanic, differential aeration). Corrosion control – material
selection and design aspects, cathodic protection methods (sacrificial
anodic and impressed current cathodic method) and corrosion inhibitors.
Paints: Constituents and its functions. Electroplating of Copper and electroless
plating of Nickel.

9
 Syllabus ECE
UNIT III FUELS AND COMBUSTION 9
Fuels: Introduction – classification of fuels – Coal – analysis of coal (proximate
and ultimate). Carbonization – manufacture of metallurgical coke (Otto
Hoffmann method) – Petroleum – manufacture of synthetic petrol (Bergius
process). Knocking – octane number and cetane number – Gaseous fuels –
Compressed natural gas (CNG), Liquefied petroleum gases (LPG). Biofuels –
Gobar gas and Biodiesel.
Combustion of Fuels: Introduction – calorific value – higher and lower
calorific values- theoretical calculation of calorific value – flue gas analysis
(ORSAT Method).

UNIT IV ENERGY SOURCES AND STORAGE DEVICES 9

Energy sources: Nuclear fission – nuclear fusion – differences between
nuclear fission and fusion – nuclear chain reactions – nuclear energy – light
water nuclear power plant – breeder reactor – solar energy conversion – solar
cells – wind energy.
Storage devices: Batteries – types of batteries – primary battery (dry cell)
secondary battery (lead acid battery, lithium–ion–battery), fuel cells – H2 -O2
fuel cell and super capacitors.

UNIT V POLYMERS AND NANOMATERIALS 9

Polymers: Classification – types of polymerization – mechanism (Free radical
polymerization) –Engineering polymers: Nylon–6, Nylon–6,6, Teflon, Kevlar
and PEEK – preparation, properties and uses – Plastic and its types -
Conducting polymers – types and applications. Composites – definition, types,
polymer matrix composites – FRP.
Nanomaterials: Introduction – Nanoparticles, Nanoclusters, Nanorods,
Nanotubes (CNT: SWNT and MWNT) and Nanowires – Properties (surface to
volume ratio, melting point, optical and electrical), Synthesis (precipitation,
thermolysis, hydrothermal, electrodeposition, chemical vapour deposition,
laser ablation, sol-gel process) and Applications.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. S. S. Dara and S. S. Umare, “A Textbook of Engineering Chemistry”, S. Chand
& Company LTD, New Delhi, 2015.
2. P. C. Jain and Monika Jain, “Engineering Chemistry” DhanpatRai Publishing
Company (P) LTD, New Delhi, 2015.
3. S. Vairam, P. Kalyani and Suba Ramesh, “Engineering Chemistry”, Wiley
India PVT, LTD, New Delhi, 2013.
4. Ravikrishnan A, 'Engineering Chemistry', Sri Krishna Hitech Publishing
Company Pvt. Ltd, New Edition 2021.

10
 Syllabus ECE

REFERENCES:
1. Friedrich Emich, “Engineering Chemistry”, Scientific International PVT,
LTD, New Delhi, 2014.
2. Prasanta Rath, “Engineering Chemistry”, Cengage Learning India PVT,
LTD, Delhi, 2015.
3. Shikha Agarwal, “Engineering Chemistry-Fundamentals and
Applications”, Cambridge University Press, Delhi, 2015.

OUTCOMES
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1. Identify the origin of water resources and develop innovative methods to
produce soft water for industrial use and potable water at cheaper cost and
recognize the basic design of adsorption systems and its industrial
applications. (K2)
2. Recognize the basic concepts of electrochemistry and apply the principles
of electrochemistry to corrosion process and the applications of protective
coatings to overcome the corrosion. (K2)
3. Disseminating the importance of chemistry of fuels and combustion to
enhance the fuel efficiency. (K2)
4. Acquire the basics of non-conventional sources of energy and illustrate the
principles and the reaction mechanism of batteries and fuel cells. (K2)
5. Explain the synthesis and applications of polymers, composites and nano-
materials. (K2)

CO – PO MAPPING:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2 2 - - 1 2 - - - - 1

CO2 3 2 3 2 2 1 2 - - - - 3

CO3 3 2 3 2 - 1 2 - - - - 1

CO4 3 2 3 2 - 1 2 - - - 1 3

CO5 3 2 3 1 2 1 1 - - - 1 3

11
 Syllabus ECE

SEMESTER - I
20ESCS101 PROBLEM SOLVING AND L T P C
SDG NO. 4&9 PROGRAMMING IN C 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l To understand about the programming language
l To develop C Programs using basic Programming Constructs, Loops
Arrays and Strings
l To develop applications in C using Functions , Pointers and Structures
l To perform I/O operations and File Handling in C

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PROGRAMMING AND ALGORITHMS

FOR PROBLEM SOLVING 10
The Basic Model of Computation, Programming Paradigms- Program
Development Life Cycle - Algorithm –Pseudo Code – Flow Chart -
Programming Languages - Compilation - Linking and Loading - Testing and
Debugging - Documentation - Control Structures – Algorithmic Problem
Solving- Problems Based on Sequential, Decision Making - Branching and
Iteration.

UNIT II BASICS OF C PROGRAMMING 8

Structure of C program - C programming: Data Types – Storage Classes -
Constants – Enumeration Constants - Keywords – Operators: Precedence and
Associativity - Expressions – Input / Output Statements - Assignment
Statements – Decision making Statements - Switch Statement - Looping
Statements – Pre-Processor Directives - Compilation Process

UNIT III ARRAYS AND STRINGS 9

Introduction to Arrays: Declaration, Initialization – One Dimensional Array –
Example Program: Computing Mean, Median and Mode - Two Dimensional
Arrays – Example Program: Matrix Operations (Addition, Scaling,
Determinant and Transpose) - String Operations: Length, Compare,
Concatenate - Copy – Selection Sort - Linear and Binary Search.

UNIT IV FUNCTIONS AND POINTERS 9

Introduction to Functions: Function Prototype, Function Definition,
Function Call, Built-in Functions (String Functions, Math Functions) –
Recursion – Example Program: Computation of Sine Series - Scientific
Calculator using Built-in Functions - Binary Search using Recursive Functions
– Pointers – Pointer Operators – Pointer Arithmetic – Arrays and Pointers –
12
 ECE
Syllabus
Array of Pointers – Example Program: Sorting of Names – Parameter Passing:
Pass by Value - Pass by Reference – Example Program: Swapping of Two
Numbers using Pass by Reference.

UNIT V STRUCTURES and FILE PROCESSING 9

Structure - Nested Structures – Pointer and Structures – Array of Structures –
Example Program using Structures and Pointers – Self Referential Structures –
Dynamic Memory Allocation - Singly Linked List – Typedef.
Files – Types of File Processing: Sequential Access, Random Access –
Sequential Access File - Example Program: Finding Average of Numbers stored
in Sequential Access File - Random Access File - Example Program:
Transaction Processing Using Random Access Files – Command Line
Arguments.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Reema Thareja, “Programming in C”, Oxford University Press, Second
Edition, 2016.
2. Kernighan, B.W and Ritchie,D.M, “The C Programming language”, Second
Edition, Pearson Education, 2012.

REFERENCES:
1. Paul Deitel and Harvey Deitel, “C How to Program”, Seventh edition,
Pearson Publication.
2. Jeri R. Hanly & Elliot B. Koffman, “Problem Solving and Program Design in
C”, Pearson Education, 2013.
3. Pradip Dey, Manas Ghosh, “Fundamentals of Computing and Programming
in C”, First Edition, Oxford University Press, 2009.
4. Anita Goel and Ajay Mittal, “Computer Fundamentals and Programming in
C”, Dorling Kindersley (India) Pvt. Ltd., Pearson Education in South Asia,
2011.
5. Byron S. Gottfried, "Schaum's Outline of Theory and Problems of
Programming with C", McGraw-Hill Education, 1996.
6. Kanetkar Y, “Let us C”, BPB Publications, 2007.
7. Hanly J R & Koffman E.B, “Problem Solving and Programme design in C”,
Pearson Education, 2009.

WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://www.learn-c.org/
2. https://codeforwin.org/
3. https://www.cprogramming.com/
13
 Syllabus ECE
ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://www.linuxtopia.org/online_books/programming_books/
gnu_c_programming_tutorial
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105171
3. https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc19_cs42/preview

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1. Develop efficient algorithms for solving a problem. (K2)
2. Use the various constructs in C to develop simple applications. (K3)
3. Design and Implement applications using Array & Strings. (K3)
4. Develop applications using Functions and Pointers. (K6)
5. Design and Develop applications using Structures. (K3)
6. Design and Develop applications using Files. (K4)

CO- PO MAPPING :
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 - 2 2 - 3 2 3

CO2 3 3 3 3 2 - 1 1 2 2 3 3 2 3

CO3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 - 3 - 3 2

CO4 3 3 3 3 2 1 - 1 2 2 3 3 1 2

CO5 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 2 1

CO6 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 2

SEMESTER - I
20ESGE101 L T P C
SDG NO. 4,6,7, 9, ENGINEERING GRAPHICS
12,14 &15 1 2 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l To develop in students, graphic skills for communication of concepts, ideas
and design of engineering products
l To visualize the job in three dimensions
l To have a clear conception and appreciation of the shape, size, proportion
and design
l To expose the student community to existing national standards related to
technical drawings
14
 Syllabus ECE
CONCEPTS AND CONVENTIONS (Not for Examination) 3
Importance of graphics in engineering applications – Use of drafting
instruments – BIS conventions and specifications – Size, layout and folding of
drawing sheets – Lettering and dimensioning- Projection of Points

UNIT I PLANE CURVES AND FREEHAND SKETCHING 6+9

Basic Geometrical constructions, Curves used in engineering practices: Conics
– Construction of ellipse, parabola and hyperbola by eccentricity method –
Construction of cycloid on Horizontal Surfaces – construction of involutes of
circle for one complete revolution – Drawing of tangents and normal to the
above curves.
Visualization concepts and Free Hand sketching: Visualization principles
–Representation of Three Dimensional objects – Layout of views- Freehand
sketching of multiple views from pictorial views of objects.

UNIT II PROJECTION OF LINES AND PLANE SURFACE 6+9

Orthographic projection- principles-Principal planes- Projection of straight
lines (only First angle projections) inclined to both the principal planes -
Determination of true lengths and true inclinations by rotating line method-
Projection of planes (polygonal and circular surfaces) inclined to both the
principal planes by rotating object method.

UNIT III PROJECTION OF SOLIDS 6+9

Projection of simple solids like prisms, pyramids, cylinder and cone when the
axis is inclined to one of the principal planes by rotating object method.

UNIT IV PROJECTION OF SECTIONED SOLIDS AND

DEVELOPMENT OF SURFACES 6+9
Sectioning of prisms, pyramids, cylinder and cone in simple vertical position
when the cutting plane is inclined to one of the principal planes and
perpendicular to the other – obtaining true shape of section. Development of
lateral surfaces of simple and truncated solids in vertical position – Prisms,
pyramids cylinder and cone.

UNIT V ISOMETRIC AND PERSPECTIVE PROJECTIONS 6+9

Principles of isometric projection – isometric scale –Isometric projections of
simple solids and truncated solids - Prisms, pyramids, cylinder, cone-
Perspective projection of simple solids-Prisms, pyramids and cylinder by
visual ray method.
TOTAL: 78 PERIODS

15
 Syllabus ECE
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Venugopal K. and Prabhu Raja V., “Engineering Graphics”, New Age
International (P) Limited, 2008.
2. T. Jeyapoovan, “Engineering Graphics using AUTOCAD”, Vikas Publishing
House Pvt Ltd, 7th Edition.

REFERENCES:
1. Bhatt N.D. and Panchal V.M., “Engineering Drawing”, Charotar Publishing
House, 50th Edition, 2010.
2. Natrajan K.V., “A text book of Engineering Graphics”, Dhanalakshmi
Publishers, Chennai, 2009.
3. Basant Agarwal and Agarwal C.M., “Engineering Drawing”, Tata McGraw
Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2008.
4. Gopalakrishna K.R., “Engineering Drawing” (Vol. I&II combined), Subhas
Stores, Bangalore, 2007.
5. Luzzader, Warren.J. and Duff,John M., “Fundamentals of Engineering
Drawing with an introduction to Interactive Computer Graphics for
Design and Production, Eastern Economy Edition, Prentice Hall of India
Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2005.
6. N S Parthasarathy and Vela Murali, “Engineering Graphics”, Oxford
University, Press, New Delhi, 2015.
7. Shah M.B., and Rana B.C., “Engineering Drawing”, Pearson, 2nd Edition,
2009.

WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/103/112103019/

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/105/104/105104148/

PUBLICATION OF BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS:

1. IS10711 – 2001: Technical products Documentation – Size and lay out of
drawing sheets.
2. IS9609 (Parts 0 & 1) – 2001: Technical products Documentation –
Lettering.
3. IS10714 (Part 20) – 2001 & SP 46 – 2003: Lines for technical drawings.
4. IS11669 – 1986 & SP 46 – 2003: Dimensioning of Technical Drawings.
5. IS15021 (Parts 1 to 4) – 2001: Technical drawings – Projection Methods

16
 Syllabus ECE
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1. Relate thoughts and ideas graphically in a neat fashion and ability to
perform sketching of engineering curves used in engineering practices,
multiple views of objects. (K1)
2. Understand the concepts of orthographic projections for basic
geometrical constructions. (K2)
3. Acquire the knowledge of orthographic projection in three dimensional
object. (K2)
4. Develop knowledge about Sectioning and apply interior shapes of solids.
(K3)
5. Analyze the concepts of design in developing various 3 dimensional
projections. (K4)
6. Build a strong foundation to analyze the design in various dimensions.
(K4)

CO - PO , PSO MAPPING:
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 2 2 - - - - - 2 2 - 2 2 2

CO2 3 2 2 - - - - - 2 2 - 2 2 2

CO3 3 2 2 - - - - - 2 2 - 2 2 2

CO4 3 2 2 - - - - - 2 2 - 2 2 2

CO5 3 2 2 - - - - - 2 2 - 2 2 2

CO6 3 2 2 - - - - - 2 2 - 2 2 2

SEMESTER - I
20BSPL101 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY L T P C
SDG NO. 4 LABORATORY 0 0 3 1.5

PHYSICS LABORATORY
OBJECTIVES:
l To acquaint the students with practical knowledge of physics principles in
various fields such as optics, thermal physics and properties of matter for
developing basic experimental skills
l To make the student to acquire practical skills in the determination of
water quality parameters through volumetric and instrumental analysis
17
 Syllabus ECE
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS (Any 5 Experiments)
1. Determination of Young's modulus by non-uniform bending method.
2. Determination of rigidity modulus –Torsion pendulum.
3. Determination of velocity of sound and compressibility of liquid –
Ultrasonic Interferometer.
4. (a) Determination of wavelength and particle size using Laser.
(b) Determination of acceptance angle in an optical fiber.
5. Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor – Lee's Disc
method.
6. Determination of specific resistance of a given coil of wire – Carey
Foster's bridge.
7. Determination of wavelength of mercury spectrum – spectrometer
grating.
8. Determination of band gap of a semiconductor.
9. Determination of Hall coefficient by Hall Effect experiment.
10. Determination of solar cell characteristics.

LAB REQUIREMENTS FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS /

6 (max.) STUDENTS PER EXPERIMENT
1. Young's modulus by non-uniform bending method-
experimental set-up – 12 sets
2. Rigidity modulus - Torsion pendulum experimental
set-up – 12 sets
3. Ultrasonic Interferometer to determine velocity of sound
and compressibility of liquid – 6 sets
4. (a) Experimental set-up to find the wavelength of light,
and to find particle size using Laser – 6 sets
(b) Experimental set-up to find acceptance angle in an
optical fiber – 6 sets
5. Lee's disc method- experimental set up to find thermal
conductivity of a bad conductor – 6 sets
6. Experimental set-up to find specific resistance of a coil
of wire-Carey Foster's Bridge – 6 sets
7. Experimental set-up to find the wavelength of mercury
spectrum-spectrometer grating – 6 sets
8. Experimental set-up to find the band gap of a semiconductor – 12 sets
9. Experimental set-up to find the Hall coefficient by
Hall Effect Experiment – 6 sets
10. Experimental set-up to study characteristics of solar cells – 6 sets

18
 Syllabus ECE
TEXTBOOKS:
1. J.D. Wilson& C.A. Hernandez Hall “Physics Laboratory Experiments”
Houghton Mifflin Company, New York, 2010.
2. M.N. Srinivasan, S. Balasubramanian &R. Ranganathan, “Practical
Physics”, S. Chand & Sons educational publications, New Delhi, 2011.
3. R. Sasikumar, “Practical Physics”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2011.

CHEMISTRY LABORATORY
(Any five experiments to be conducted)

OBJECTIVES:
l To acquaint the students with practical knowledge of the basic concepts of
chemistry, the student faces during the course of their study in the industry
and engineering field
l To make the student to acquire practical skills in the determination of
water quality parameters through volumetric and instrumental analysis
l To understand and develop experimental skills for building technical
competence

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS (Any five experiments to be conducted)

1. Estimation of HCl using Na2CO3 as primary standard and Determination
of alkalinity in water samples.
2. Determination of total, temporary & permanent hardness of water by
EDTA method.
3. Determination of DO content of water sample by Winkler's method.
4. Determination of chloride content of water sample by argentometric
method.
5. Determination of strength of given hydrochloric acid using pH meter.
6. Conductometric titration of strong acid vs strong base.
7. Estimation of iron content of the given solution using potentiometer.
8. Estimation of iron content of the water sample using spectrophotometer
(1, 10- Phenanthroline / thiocyanate method).
9. Estimation of sodium and potassium present in water using flame
photometers.
10. Determination of molecular weights of polymers using Ostwald's
Viscometer.

19
 Syllabus ECE
LAB REQUIREMENTS FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS /
6 (MAX.) STUDENTS PER EXPERIMENT.
1. Estimation of HCl using Na2CO3 as primary standard and
Determination of alkalinity in water sample - 6 sets
2. Determination of total, temporary & permanent
hardness of water by EDTA method - 6 sets
3. Determination of DO content of water sample by
Winkler's method - 6sets
4. Determination of chloride content of water sample by
argentometric method – 6 sets
5. Determination of strength of given hydrochloric acid using
pH meter - 6 sets
6. Conductometric titration of strong acid vs strong base - 6 sets
7. Estimation of iron content of the given solution using
potentiometer - 6 sets
8. Estimation of iron content of the water sample using
spectrophotometer (1,10- Phenanthroline /
thiocyanate method) - 2 sets
9. Estimation of sodium and potassium present in water
using flame photometer - 2 sets
10. Determination of molecular weights of polymer using
Ostwald's Viscometer. - 6 sets
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Vogel's Textbook of Quantitative Chemical Analysis (8th edition, 2014).

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1. Apply the principles of thermal physics and properties of matter to
evaluate the properties of materials and to determine the physical
properties of liquid using ultrasonic interferometer. (K1)
2. Understand measurement technique and usage of new instruments in
optics for real time application in engineering. (K2)
3. Apply the knowledge of semiconductor materials to evaluate the band
gap and Hall coefficient of materials and to study the characteristics of
solar cell for engineering solutions. (K3)
4. Interpret quantitative chemical analysis to generate experimental skills
in building technical competence. (K3)
5. Analyze the quality of water for domestic and industrial purpose. (K3)

20
 Syllabus ECE
6. Standardize the solutions using volumetric titrations, conductivity, pH,
redox potential and optical density measurements. (K3)

CO- PO MAPPING :

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 3 2 1 3 3 2 2 1 1 3

CO2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 3

CO3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 2 3

CO4 3 2 3 3 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 2

CO5 3 2 3 3 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 2

CO6 3 2 3 3 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 2

SEMESTER - I
20ESPL101 L T P C
PROGRAMMING IN C LABORATORY
SDG NO. 4&9 0 0 3 1.5

OBJECTIVES:
l To develop programs in C using basic Programming Constructs
l To develop applications in C using Arrays and Strings
l To design and implement applications in C using Functions, Structures
l To develop applications in C using Files

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Write a program using I/O statements and expressions.
2. Write programs using decision-making constructs.
3. Write a program to find whether the given year is leap year or not? (Hint:
not every centurion year is a leap. For example 1700, 1800 and 1900 is
not a leap year)
4. Write a program to perform the Calculator operations, namely, addition,
subtraction, multiplication, division and square of a number.

21
 Syllabus ECE
5. Write a program to check whether a given number is Armstrong number
or not?
6. Write a program tocheck whether a given number is odd or even?
7. Write a program to find the factorial of a given number.
8. Write a program to find out the average of 4 integers.
9. Write a program to display array elements using two dimensional arrays.
10. Write a program to perform swapping using function.
11. Write a program to display all prime numbers between two intervals
using functions.
12. Write a program to reverse a sentence using recursion.
13. Write a program to get the largest element of an array using the function.
14. Write a program to concatenate two string.
15. Write a program to find the length of String.
16. Write a program to find the frequency of a character in a string.
17. Write a program to store Student Information in Structure and Display it.
18. The annual examination is conducted for 10 students for five subjects.
Write a program to read the data and determine the following:
(a) Total marks obtained by each student.
(b) The highest marks in each subject and the marks of the student who
secured it.
(c) The student who obtained the highest total marks.
19. Insert, update, delete and append telephone details of an individual or a
company into a telephone directory using random access file.
20. Count the number of account holders whose balance is less than the
minimum balance using sequential access file.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:

Standalone desktops with C compiler 30 Nos.
(or)
Server with C compiler supporting 30 terminals or more.

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1. Solve some simple problems leading to specific applications. (K3)
2. Demonstrate C programming development environment, compiling,
debugging, linking and executing a program. (K3)
3. Develop C programs for simple applications making use of basic
constructs, arrays and strings. (K4)

22
 Syllabus ECE
4. Develop C programs involving functions and recursion. (K4)
5. Develop C programs involving pointers, and structures. (K6)
6. Design applications using sequential and random access file. (K4)

CO- PO, PSO MAPPING:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 2 3

CO2 3 3 3 3 2 1 - 1 2 2 3 3 1 3

CO3 3 3 - 3 2 - 1 1 - 2 - 3 3 2

CO4 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 1 3

CO5 3 3 3 - 2 - 1 - 2 2 3 - 2 1

CO6 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 2 - 3 3 3 2

SEMESTER - I
20TPHS101 L T P C
SKILL ENHANCEMENT
SDG NO. 4&5 0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVES:
l To enrich social network ethics
l To develop and enhance browsing culture
l To understand the concepts of networking
l To promote self professionalism
l To acquire knowledge about various digital identification procedures

UNIT I SOCIAL NETWORK ETIQUETTES 6

Introduction to social network – Social Networking Etiquettes - Pros and Cons
- Usage of Facebook, Instagram, WhatsApp , Telegram, Youtube, Evolution of
Android and IOS, Introduction to Linkedin & Benefits. (Practicals – Official
Mail id- Linkedin Id Creation, Linkedin Profile Bulilding , Facebook Id and
Creation and Modifying the existing FB ID)

UNIT II BROWSING CULTURE 6

Introduction to browsing – Search Engines-Google - Bing -Yahoo!-AOL -MSN
–DuckDuckGo ,browsers, phishing – Cookies - URL – https:// extensions ,
browsing history, Incognito mode- VPN – Pros and Cons – Book mark.
23
 Syllabus ECE
UNIT III NETWORKING 6
Basics of networking - LAN, MAN, WAN, Introduction to network topologies,
Protocols , IP Commands (Command line prompt), Define online complier
and editor (Practicals – Find Your System IP,Ping Command, Firewall Fortinet,
Basic DOS Commands)

UNIT IV PROFESSIONALISM 6
Dress Code, Body Language, Appropriate Attire ,Communication Skills,
Interview preparation – Introducing yourself - How to greet Superiors,
Importance of Eye Contact During conversation.

UNIT V DIGITAL IDENTIFICATION 6

Introduction to NAD - Importance of Aadhar, PAN Card, Passport, Bank
Account, Bar Code, QR scan, Payment Gateway (Gpay, Phone Pe, UPI, BHIM,
Paytm), Mobile Banking (Practicals - NAD registration Step by Step, Linking
bank account with netbanking , Register for payment gateway).
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS

WEB REFERENCES :
Unit I: Social Network Etiquettes:
1. https://sproutsocial.com/glossary/social-media-etiquette/
2. https://www.shrm.org/resourcesandtools/tools-and-samples/hr-
qa/pages/socialnetworkingsitespolicy.aspx
3. https://www.frontiersin.org/articles/10.3389/fpsyg.2019.02711/full
4. https://medium.com/@sirajea/11-reasons-why-you-should-use-
telegram-instead-of-whatsapp-ab0f80fbfa79
5. https://buffer.com/library/how-to-use-instagram/
6. https://www.webwise.ie/parents/what-is-youtube/
7. https://www.androidauthority.com/history-android-os-name-789433/
8. https://www.mindtools.com/pages/article/linkedin.htm

Unit II: Browsing Culture:

1. https://sites.google.com/site/bethanycollegeofteacheredn/unit--ict-
connecting-with-world/national-policy-on-information-and-
communication-technology-ict/accessing-the-web-introduction-to-the-
browser-browsing-web
2. https://www.wordstream.com/articles/internet-search-engines-
history
3. https://www.malwarebytes.com/phishing/
4. https://www.adpushup.com/blog/types-of-cookies/
24
 Syllabus ECE
5. https://www.eff.org/https-everywhere
6. https://www.sciencedirect.com/topics/computer-science/browsing-
history\
7. https://www.vpnmentor.com/blog/pros-cons-vpn/
8. https://www.tech-wonders.com/2016/10/use-hush-private-
bookmarking-extension-chrome.html

Unit III:Networking
1. https://www.guru99.com/types-of-computer-network.html
2. https://www.studytonight.com/computer-networks/network-
topology-types
3. https://www.cloudflare.com/learning/network-layer/what-is-a-
protocol/
4. https://www.howtogeek.com/168896/10-useful-windows-commands-
you-should-know/
5. https://paiza.io/en

Unit IV : Professionalism
1. https://career.vt.edu/develop/professionalism.html
2. https://englishlabs.in/importance-dress-code/
3. https://www.proschoolonline.com/blog/importance-of-body-language-
in-day-to-day-life
4. https://www.thespruce.com/etiquette-of-proper-attire-1216800
5. https://shirleytaylor.com/why-are-communication-skills-important/
6. https://www.triad-eng.com/interview-tips-for-engineers/
7. https://www.indeed.co.in/career-advice/interviewing/interview-
question-tell-me-about-yourself
8. https://toggl.com/track/business-etiquette-rules/

Unit V: Digital Identification

1. https://nad.ndml.in/nad-presentation.html
2. https://www.turtlemint.com/aadhaar-card-benefits/
3. https://www.bankbazaar.com/pan-card/uses-of-pan-card.html
4. https://www.passportindex.org/passport.php
5. https://consumer.westchestergov.com/financial-education/money-
management/benefits-of-a-bank-account
6. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/QR_code

25
 Syllabus ECE
7. https://www.investopedia.com/terms/p/payment-gateway.asp
8. https://www.paisabazaar.com/banking/mobile-banking/

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1 . Learn and apply social network ethics. (K3)
2. Understand the browsing culture. (K2)
3. Analyze the networking concepts . (K4)
4. Develop self professionalism. (K3)
5. Gain hands-on experience in various digital identification procedures.
(K2)
6. Analyse and apply the different digital payment gateway methods. (K4)

CO- PO MAPPING :
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 - - - - 3 2 - 3 2 3 - 2

CO2 - - - - 3 2 - 3 2 3 - 2

CO3 - - - - 3 2 - - 1 3 - 2

CO4 - - - - 3 2 - 3 3 3 - 2

CO5 - - - - 3 2 - - 2 3 - 2

CO6 - - - - 3 2 - - 2 3 - 2

SEMESTER - I
20HSMG101 L T P C
PERSONAL VALUES
SDG NO. 4&5 2 0 0 0

OBJECTIVES:
l Values through Practical activities

UNIT I SELF CONCEPT 6

Understanding self Concept – Identify Yourself – Who am I – an individual,
engineer, citizen – Attitude – Measuring Behaviour – Change of Behaviour –
Personality – Characteristics in personal, professional life.

26
 Syllabus ECE
UNIT II INDIVIDUAL VALUES 6
Personal Values – Attributes –Courage – Creativity, Honesty, Perfection,
Simplicity, Responsibility – Measuring personal values

UNIT III MORAL VALUES 6

Moral – Understanding right and wrong – Positive thoughts – Respect to
others – Doing good to society.

UNIT IV PHYSICAL AND MENTAL WELL-BEING 6

Health – Physical fitness –Mental vigour – Diet management – Yoga –
Meditation – Peaceful life – Happiness in life

UNIT V DECISION MAKING 6

Goal Setting – Decision making skill – Overcome of Barriers – Success – Mental
strength and weakness
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
Note:
Each topic in all the above units will be supplemented by practice exercises
and classroom activities and projects.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Barun K. Mitra, “Personality Development and Soft Skills”, Oxford
University Press, 2016.
2. B.N.Ghosh, “Managing Soft Skills for Personality Development” McGraw
Hill India, 2012.

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1. Become an individual in knowing the self. (K4)
2. Acquire and express Personal Values, Spiritual values and fitness. (K4)
3. Practice simple physical exercise and breathing techniques. (K2)
4. Practice Yoga asana which will enhance the quality of life. (K1)
5. Practice Meditation and get benefitted. (K1)
6. Understanding moral values and need of physical fitness. (K2)

27
 Syllabus ECE
CO – PO MAPPING:
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

Co1 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 1 1 1

CO2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 1 1 1

CO3 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 1 1 1

CO4 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 1 1 1

CO5 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 1 1 1

CO6 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 1 1 1

28
 Syllabus ECE

SEMESTER - II
20BSMA201 L T P C
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS - II
SDG NO. 4 3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
l The objective of this course is to familiarize the prospective engineers with
techniques in Vector Calculus, Ordinary differential equations, Complex
variables and Laplace transforms. It aims to equip the students to deal with
advanced levels of Mathematics and applications that would be essential
for their disciplines.

UNIT I VECTOR CALCULUS 12

Gradient and Directional derivatives - Divergence and Curl- Vector identities -
Irrotational and Solenoidal vector fields - Line integral over a plane curve -
Surface integral - Volume integral – Gauss divergence, Green's and Stoke's
theorems - Verification and application in evaluating line, Surface and volume
integrals.

UNIT II ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12

Second and higher order linear differential equations with constant
coefficients - Method of variation of parameters - Homogeneous equation of
Euler's and Legendre's types - System of simultaneous linear differential
equations with constant coefficients.

UNIT III COMPLEX DIFFERENTIATION 12

Analytic functions- Necessary and sufficient conditions for analyticity in
cartesian and polar coordinates (without proof) - Properties - Harmonic
conjugate - construction of analytic functions- Conformal mapping - Mapping
by functions w = z+a,w=az, w=1/z, w=z2 - Bilinear transformation.

UNIT IV COMPLEX INTEGRATION 12

Contour integrals, Cauchy- Goursat theorem (without proof) - Cauchy Integral
formula (without proof) - Taylor's series - Zeroes of Analytic functions -
Singularities - Laurent's Series - Residues – Cauchy Residue theorem (without
proof) – Application of Residue theorem for evaluation of real integrals – use of
circular contour and semicircular contour(without poles on real axis).

UNIT V LAPLACE TRANSFORM 12

Existence conditions – Transforms of elementary functions – Transform of
Unit step function and Unit impulse function – Basic properties – Shifting
theorems – Transforms of derivatives and integrals – Initial and Final value
29
 Syllabus ECE
theorems – Convolution theorem – Transform of Periodic functions –
Application of solution of linear second order ordinary differential equations
with constant coefficients.

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Erwin Kreyszig, Advance Engineering Mathematics, 9th Edition, John
Wiley & Sons, 2006.
2. Ramana B.V., Higher Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Company, New Delhi, 2008.

REFERENCES:
1. Dass, H.K., and Er. Rajnish Verma, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”,
S.Chand Private Ltd., 2011.
2. Glyn James, “Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics”, 3rd Edition,
Pearson Education, 2010.
3. Peter V.O'Neil, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, 7th Edition, Cengage
learning, 2012.
4. E.A.Coddinton, “An Introduction to Ordinary Differential Equations”,
Prentice Hall India, 1995.
5. B.S. Grewal, “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, 40th
Edition, 2014.
6. N.P.Bali and Manish Goyal, “A text Book of Engineering Mathematics”,
Laxmi Publications, Reprint 2008.

WEB COURSES:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/122107036/
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/111105134/
3. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/mathematics/18-04-complex-variables-
with-applications-spring-2018/
4. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/mathematics/18-02-multivariable-
calculus-fall-2007/
5. https://ocw.mit.edu/resources/res-6-007-signals-and-systems-spring-
2011/lecture-notes/

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://ocw.mit.edu/resources/res-6-007-signals-and-systems-spring-
2011/video-lectures/lecture-1-introduction/
2. http://www.nptelvideos.com/course.php?id=90

30
 Syllabus ECE
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1. Compute the derivatives of scalar and vector point functions. Use vector
point function to establish a relation between line, surface and volume
integrals. (K3)
2. Solve ordinary differential equations of second and higher order with
constant coefficients, variable coefficients and simultaneous linear
differential equations. (K3)
3. Construct an analytic function and apply the properties of analytic
functions to check for harmonic and orthogonal functions and find the
images of circle and straight lines under the standard transformations.
(K3)
4. Use Cauchy's integral theorem, formula and Cauchy's Residue theorem to
evaluate complex and real integrals, find the Taylor's and Laurent's series
expansion. (K3)
5. Apply Laplace and inverse Laplace Transforms to solve the Linear ordinary
differential equations with constant coefficients. (K3)

CO - PO MAPPING:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 2 1 - - - - - - - 1

CO2 3 3 2 1 - - - - - - - 1

CO3 3 3 2 1 - - - - - - - 1

CO4 3 3 2 1 - - - - - - - 1

CO5 3 3 2 1 - - - - - - - 1

31
 Syllabus ECE

SEMESTER - II
20HSEN201 L T P C
TECHNICAL ENGLISH - II
SDG NO. 4 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l To strengthen the listening skills for comprehending and critically
analyzing passages
● To enhance students’ ability with multiple strategies and skills for making
technical presentations
● To participate in group discussions for developing group attitude
● To develop skills for preparing effective job application
● To write effective technical reports

UNIT I LANGUAGE DEVELOPMENT 9

Listening – Listening conversations involving two participants – multiple
participants – Speaking – conversation methods in real life occurrences using
expressions of different emotions and imperative usages – Reading passages
and short stories - Writing – preparation of checklist – extended definition –
Language Development – tenses - subject - verb agreement

UNIT II VOCABULARY BUILDING 9

Listening – listening formal and informal conversation and participative
exercises – Speaking - creating greetings/wishes/excuses and thanks –
Reading – articles/novels-Writing summary of articles and concise writing
identifying new words – homonyms, homophones, homographs – one-word
substitutions – easily confused words - creating SMS and using emoticons -
sharing information in social media. Language Development - reported
speeches – regular and irregular verbs - idioms & phrases

UNIT III WRITING TECHNICAL REPORTS 9

Listening – listening conversation – effective use of words and their sound
aspects, stress, intonation & pronunciation – Speaking - practicing telephonic
conversations – observing and responding. Reading – regular columns of
newspapers/magazines - Writing – reports – feasibility, accident, survey and
progress - preparation of agenda and minutes – Language Development -
using connectives – discourse markers

UNIT IV TECHNICAL WRITING 9

Listening – Model debates & documentaries - Speaking – expressing
agreement/disagreement, assertiveness in expressing opinions – Reading
32
 Syllabus ECE
biographies/autobiographies – Writing – note-making – formal letters –
inviting guests – acceptance/declining letters - Language Development –
degrees of comparison - numerical adjectives – embedded sentences

UNIT V GROUP DISCUSSION AND JOB APPLICATION 9

Listening – Listening - classroom lectures – recommending suggestions &
solutions – Speaking – participating in group discussion – learning GD
strategies – Reading – journal articles - Writing – Job application – cover letter
- ré sumé preparation – Language Development – purpose statement –
editing – verbal analogies.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS :
1. Board of editors. Fluency in English: A Course book for Engineering and
Technology. Orient Blackswan, Hyderabad 2016.
2. Ashraf Rizvi. M, Effective Technical Communication. 2nd ed. McGraw Hill,
New Delhi, 2018.

REFERENCES
1. Bailey, Stephen. Academic Writing: A Practical Guide for Students.
Routledge, New York,2011.
2. Raman, Meenakshi and Sharma, Sangeetha. Technical Communication
Principles and Practice. Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2014.
3. Muralikrishnan& Mishra Sunitha, Communication skills for Engineers
2nd ed. Pearson, Tamilnadu, India 2011. P. Kiranmai and Rajeevan,
Geetha. Basic Communication Skills, Foundation Books, New Delhi,
2013.
4. Suresh Kumar, E. Engineering English. Orient Blackswan, Hyderabad,
2015
5. Richards, Jack C. Interchange Students’ Book – 2. Cambridge University
Press, New Delhi, 2015.

WEB REFERENCES :
1. https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc20_hs21/preview
2. https://nptel.ac.in/content/storage2/nptel_data3/html/mhrd/ict/
text/109106122/lec1.pdf
3. https://freevideolectures.com/course/3250/introduction-to-film-
studies/10

ONLINE RESOURCES
1. https://www.ef.com/wwen/english-resources/

33
 Syllabus ECE
2. https://www.smilesforlearning.org/gclid=EAIaIQobChMI49DF9
bnd6AIVSY6PCh1d_gV9EAAYASAAEgIBPvD_BwE.

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1. Define technical terms with the correct use of grammar (K1)
2 Identify new words, phrases, idioms and summarize articles/ write ups
effectively (K2)
3 Pronounce words correctly, speak fluently and share opinions and
suggestions effectively in conversations, debates and discussions (K3)
4 Construct reports convincingly and write official letters emphatically
(K3)
5 Communicate confidently while speaking and writing by employing
language strategies (K2)
6 Adapt group behavior, execute their role as a contributing team member
and prepare winning job applications (K3)

CO - PO MAPPING:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 - - - - - - - - 2 3 1 2

CO2 - 2 - - - - - - 2 3 1 1

CO3 - - - 1 - - - 2 2 3 1 1

CO4 - - - - - 2 - 3 2 3 2 2

CO5 - - - - - - - - 2 3 2 2

CO6 - - - - - - - 2 2 3 1 2

SEMESTER - II
20ESIT201 PYTHON PROGRAMMING L T P C
SDG NO. 4 WITH LABORATORY 3 0 2 4

OBJECTIVES:
l To Develop Python Programs with Conditionals and Loops
l To Use Python Data Structures – Lists, Tuples, Dictionaries, Sets
l To Define Python Functions and Work with Modules and Packages
l To Work with Python Classes, Objects and Handling Exceptions
34
 Syllabus ECE
UNIT I BASICS OF PYTHON PROGRAMMING 9
Python Interpreter and Interactive Mode - Features – History of Python –
Literals – Variables and Identifiers – Data Types – Input Operation –
Comments – Reserved Words – Indentation – Operators and Expressions –
Operator Precedence– Operations on Strings – Other Data types – Type
Conversion - Illustrative Programs: Use of various Operators, Evaluation of
expressions, String Operations.

UNIT II DECISION CONTROL STATEMENTS 9

Conditionals: Boolean Values and Operators, Conditional (if) - Alternative (if-
else) - Chained Conditional (if-elif-else) - Iteration: state - while - for - break -
continue - pass - Illustrative Programs: Exchange the Values of Two Variables -
Circulate the values of N Variables - Distance Between Two Points - Square
Root - GCD - Exponentiation - Sum and Array of Numbers.

UNIT III STRING, LISTS, TUPLES, DICTIONARIES, SETS 9

Strings: String Slices - Immutability - String functions and methods - String
Module - Lists: List Operations - List Slices - List methods - List Loop -
Mutability - Aliasing - Cloning lists - List Parameters - Tuples: Tuple
Assignment - Tuple as return value - Dictionaries: Operations and Methods -
Advanced List Processing - List Comprehension - Sets: Creating Sets –
Operations and Methods – Set Comprehension - Illustrative programs: Linear
Search - Binary Search - Selection Sort - Insertion Sort - Merge Sort -
Histogram.

UNIT IV FUNCTIONS, MODULES AND PACKAGES 9

Functions - Function Definition and Use - Flow of Execution - Parameters and
Arguments - Fruitful Functions: Return values - Parameters - Local and Global
Scope - Function Composition - Recursion - Modules – from-import Statement
– Name of Module – Making your own modules - Packages - Standard Library
Modules – globals(), locals() and reload() - Illustrative programs: Fibonacci
Series using functions - Arithmetic Operations using Module - Area of different
shapes using Packages.

UNIT V CLASSES, OBJECTS AND EXCEPTION HANDLING 9

Classes and Objects – Defining Classes – Creating Objects – Data Abstraction
and Hiding through Classes - init() method – Class Variables and Object
Variables – Introduction to Errors and Exception Handling – Handling
Exceptions – Multiple Except Blocks – else Clause – Raising Exceptions – Built-
in and User-defined Exceptions – Finally Block.

35
 Syllabus ECE
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS 15
1. Write a Python program to perform
a. Linear Search
b. Binary Search
2. Write a Python program to perform Selection Sort.
3. Write a Python program to sort the given numbers using Insertion Sort.
4. Write a Python program to do sorting using Merge sort.
5. Write a Python program to find first n prime numbers.
6. Write a Python program to Multiply two matrices.
7. Write a Python program to create Student class and instantiate its Object.
8. Write a Python License verification process using Exception handling.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. ReemaThareja. “Python Programming Using Problem Solving Approach”,
Oxford University Press 2018.
2. Allen B. Downey, “Think Python: How to Think Like a Computer Scientist”,
2nd edition, Updated for Python 3, O'Reilly Publishers, 2016.

REFERENCES:
1. Guido van Rossum and Fred L. Drake Jr, “An Introduction to Python”
Revised and updated for Python 3.2, Network Theory Ltd., 2011.
2. John V Guttag, “Introduction to Computation and Programming Using
Python”, Revised and expanded Edition, MIT Press , 2013.
3. Robert Sedgewick, Kevin Wayne, Robert Dondero, “Introduction to
Programming in Python: An Inter-Disciplinary Approach”, Pearson India
Education Services Pvt. Ltd., 2016.
4. Timothy A. Budd, “Exploring Python”, Mc-Graw Hill Education (India)
Private Ltd., 2015.
5. Kenneth A. Lambert, “Fundamentals of Python: First Programs”,
CENGAGE Learning, 2012.
6. Charles Dierbach, “Introduction to Computer Science using Python: A
Computational Problem-Solving Focus”, Wiley India Edition, 2013.
7. Paul Gries, Jennifer Campbell and Jason Montojo, “Practical
Programming: An Introduction to Computer Science using Python 3”,
Second edition, Pragmatic Programmers, LLC, 2013.

WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://greenteapress.com/wp/think-python/
2. www.docs.python.org
3. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106/106/106106182/
36
 Syllabus ECE
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1. Describe the syntax, semantics and control flow statements of Python
programming. (K2)
2. Implement simple programs using control structures in Python. (K3)
3. Explain the methods to create and manipulate strings, lists, dictionaries,
tuples and sets. (K2)
4. Articulate the concepts of functions, modules and packages in Python.
(K2)
5. Implement simple programs using Python Data types and functions. (K3)
6. Apply the concepts of Exception handling, classes and objects. (K3)

CO - PO, MAPPING :
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 - 1 2 1 2 - - - 1 - 3 3

CO2 1 2 3 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 3

CO3 - 1 3 3 2 1 - - - - 1 3

CO4 1 2 3 3 2 - - - - - 1 3

CO5 2 3 3 3 3 1 1 2 2 1 2 3

CO6 2 3 3 3 3 1 1 2 2 1 2 3

SEMESTER - II
20BSPH201 L T P C
PHYSICS OF ELECTRONIC DEVICES
SDG NO. 4 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
l To acquaint the electrical properties of materials.
l To present the principles of semiconductor physics and its applications.
l To educate the properties of magnetic and dielectric materials and
their uses.
l To introduce the bipolar junction transistors.
l To explicit the field effect transistors, power and display devices.

UNIT I ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 9

Classical free electron theory - Expression for electrical conductivity - Thermal
conductivity expression - Wiedemann-Franz law - Success and failures -
37
 Syllabus ECE
electrons in metals - Particle in a three dimensional box - degenerate states -
Fermi- Dirac statistics - Density of energy states - Electron in periodic
potential- Energy bands in solids - Tight binding approximation - Electron
effective mass- concept of hole.

UNIT II SEMICONDUCTOR DIODES 9

Semiconductors - Intrinsic, Extrinsic semiconductor, Carrier concentration,
PN junction diode- Current equations, Energy Band diagram, Diffusion and
drift current densities, forward and reverse bias characteristics, Transition
and Diffusion Capacitances, Switching Characteristics, Breakdown in PN
Junction Diodes, Special purpose diodes - Schottky barrier diode, Zener diode,
Varactor diode ,Tunnel diode, LASER diode and LDR.

UNIT III MAGNETIC AND DIELECTRIC PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 9

Magnetism in materials - magnetic field and induction - magnetization -
magnetic permeability and susceptibility - types of magnetic materials -
microscopic classification of magnetic materials - Ferromagnetism: origin and
exchange interaction - saturation magnetization and Curie temperature -
Domain Theory - Hysteresis phenomenon - Ferrites. Dielectric materials:
Polarization processes - dielectric loss - internal field - Clausius-Mosotti
relation - dielectric breakdown.

UNIT IV BIPOLAR JUNCTION TRANSISTOR 9

NPN -PNP -Operations-Early effect-Current equations – Input and Output
characteristics of CE, CB, CC - Hybrid -π model - h-parameter model, Ebers
Moll Model- Gummel Poon- model, Multi Emitter Transistor.

UNIT V FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTORS, POWER AND DISPLAY DEVICES 9

JFETs – Drain and Transfer characteristics,-Current equations-Pinch off
voltage and its significance- MOSFET- Characteristics- Threshold voltage -
Channel length modulation, D- MOSFET, E-MOSFET- Characteristics –
Comparison of MOSFET with JFET. Power Devices-UJT, SCR, Diac, Triac,
Display Devices-LED, LCD, Photo transistor, Opto Coupler, Solar cell, CCD.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Donald A Neaman, “Semi-conductor Physics and Devices”, Fourth Edition,
TataMcGrawHill Inc.2012.
2. Salivahanan.S, Suresh Kumar. N, Vallavaraj.A, “Electronic Devices and
circuits”, Third Edition, Tata McGraw- Hill,2008.

38
 Syllabus ECE
REFERENCES:
1. Robert Boylestadand Louis Nashelsky, “Electron Devices and Circuit
Theory”, Pearson Prentice Hall, 10th edition, July2008.
2. R.S.Sedha, “A Text Book of Applied Electronics” S.Chand Publications,
2006.
3. Yang, “Fundamentals of Semiconductor Devices”, McGraw Hill
International Edition, 1978.

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1. To acquire knowledge on electron theory of solids and apply it to
determine the electrical properties of solids (K3)
2 To understand the origin of magnetism and to classify the magnetic
materials based on their electron spin(K2)
3 To explain different polarisation and breakdown mechanisms in
dielectric materials (K2).
4 "To understand the basic concepts of semiconducting material
fundamentals and apply it to understand the principles of working of
various diodes. (K3)
5 To characterize the various configurations and models of bipolar junction
transistor(K3)
6 To describe the behaviour of field effect transistors, power and display
devices for special applications (K2)

CO - PO, PSO MAPPING

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 - 2 - 1 - - - - - 1

CO2 3 3 1 2 3 1 1 - - - - 2

CO3 3 3 - 2 2 - 1 1 - - - 1

CO4 3 3 1 2 2 2 2 - - - - 3

CO5 3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - 2

CO6 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 - - - - 2

39
 Syllabus ECE
SEMESTER - II
20ECPC201 L T P C
CIRCUIT ANALYSIS
SDG NO. 4, 9 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l To introduce the basic concepts of DC and AC circuits behavior.
l To study the transient and steady state response of the circuits subjected to
step and sinusoidal excitations.
l To introduce different methods of circuit analysis using Network
theorems, duality and topology.

UNIT I BASIC CIRCUITS ANALYSIS AND NETWORK TOPOLOGY 9

Ohm's Law – Kirchhoff's laws – Mesh current and node voltage method of
analysis for D.C and A.C. circuits - Network terminology – Graph of a network -
Incidence and reduced incidence matrices – Trees –Cutsets - Fundamental cut
sets – Cutset matrix – Tiesets - Link currents and Tieset schedules -Twig
voltages and Cutset schedules, Duality and dual networks.

UNIT II NETWORK THEOREMS FOR DC AND AC CIRCUITS 9

Network theorems -Superposition theorem, Thevenin's theorem, Norton's
theorem, Reciprocity theorem, Millman's theorem, and Maximum power
transfer theorem, Application of Network theorems - Network reduction:
voltage and current division, source transformation – star delta conversion.

UNIT III RESONANCE AND COUPLED CIRCUITS 9

Resonance - Series resonance - Parallel resonance - Variation of impedance
with frequency -Variation in current through and voltage across L and C with
frequency – Bandwidth - Q factor -Selectivity. Self inductance - Mutual
inductance - Dot rule - Coefficient of coupling - Analysis of multi-winding
coupled circuits - Series, Parallel connection of coupled inductors - Single
tuned and double tuned coupled circuits.

UNIT IV TRANSIENT ANALYSIS 9

Natural response-Forced response - Transient response of RC, RL and RLC
circuits to excitation by Step Signal, Impulse Signal and exponential sources -
Complete response of RC, RL and RLC Circuits to sinusoidal excitation.

UNIT V TWO PORT NETWORKS 9

Two port networks, Z parameters, Y parameters, Transmission (ABCD)
parameters, Hybrid (H) Parameters, Interconnection of two port networks,
40
 Syllabus ECE
Symmetrical properties of T and π networks.
TOTAL PERIODS :45
TEXT BOOKS:
1. William H. Hayt, Jr. Jack E. Kemmerly and Steven M. Durbin, “Engineering
Circuit Analysis”, McGraw Hill Science Engineering, Eighth Edition,
Eleventh Reprint, 2016.
2. Joseph Edminister and Mahmood Nahvi, “Electric Circuits”, Schaum's
Outline Series, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, New Delhi, Fifth
Edition Reprint 2016.

REFERENCES:
1. Charles K. Alexander, Mathew N.O. Sadiku, “Fundamentals of Electric
Circuits”, 5th Edition, McGraw Hill, 9th Reprint, 2015.
2. A.Bruce Carlson, “Circuits: Engineering Concepts and Analysis of Linear
Electric Circuits”, Cengage Learning, India Edition, 2nd Indian Reprint,
2009.
3. Allan H.Robbins, Wilhelm C.Miller, “Circuit Analysis Theory and Practice”,
Cengage Learning, 5th Edition, 1st Indian Reprint, 2013.
4. David Irwin et al, “Engineering Circuit Analysis”, Wiley India, Tenth Edition,
2014.
5. Mahmood Nahvi, “Electric Circuits”, McGraw Hill, Fifth Edition, 2009.

WEB RESOURCES:
1. https://www.khanacademy.org/science/electrical-engineering/ee-
circuit-analysis-topic
2. http://homepages.wmich.edu/~miller/ECE2100.html
3. https://engineering.purdue.edu/~ee202https://engineering.
purdue.edu/~ee202

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc17_ee13/preview
2. https://www.coursera.org/learn/linear-circuits-dcanalysis
3. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc17_ee15/preview
4. https://swayam.gov.in/course/218-networks-and-systems

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1 Describe the basic circuit terminologies, Ohm’s law, Kirchoff’s laws,
network topology using graph theory, duality concepts, source
transformation, star delta conversions and simplification of complex
circuits. (K3)
41
 Syllabus ECE
2 Apply the Mesh current and nodal voltage method for analyzing DC and AC
circuits. (K3)
3 Apply the concepts of Superposition, Thevenin's, Norton's, Reciprocity,
Millman's and Maximum power transfer theorems to analyze DC and AC
electric circuits. (K3)
4 Characterize the frequency response of series & parallel resonance
circuits, single & double tuned circuits and apply the concept of
inductance, coupling to solve electric circuits. (K3)
5 Characterize the transient response analysis of RL, RC and RLC circuits for
standard test signals like step, impulse, exponential and sinusoidal
signals.(K2)
6 Implement two port Z,Y, ABCD and h parameter equivalent models for
electric circuits and compare the symmetrical properties of T and π
Networks. (K3)

CO - PO, PSO MAPPING :

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 3 2 3 - 2 - - - - - 2 3 2

CO2 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 2 3 2

CO3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - 2 3 2

CO4 3 3 2 3 - 2 - - - - - 2 3 2

CO5 3 3 2 3 - 2 - - - - - 2 3 2

CO6 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - 2 3 2

SEMESTER - II
20ESGE201 ENGINEERING PRACTICES L T P C
SDG NO. 4,9,12 LABORATORY 0 0 3 1.5
OBJECTIVES:
l To provide exposure to the students with hands on experience on various
basic engineering practices in Electrical and Electronics Engineering, Civil
and Mechanical Engineering

ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE

1. Residential house wiring using switches, fuse, indicator, lamp and energy
meter.
42
 ECE
Syllabus
2. Fluorescent lamp wiring.
3. Stair case wiring.
4. Measurement of electrical quantities – voltage, current, power & power
factor in RLC circuit.
5. Measurement of energy using single phase energy meter.
6. Measurement of resistance to earth of electrical equipment.

ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING PRACTICE

1. Study of Electronic components and equipments – Resistor, colour coding
measurement of AC signal parameter (peak-peak, rms period, frequency)
using CRO.
2. Study of logic gates AND, OR, EX-OR and NOT.
3. Generation of Clock Signal.
4. Soldering practice – Components, Devices and Circuits – Using general
purpose PCB.
5. Measurement of ripple factor of HWR and FWR.

CIVIL ENGINEERING PRACTICE

Buildings:
Study of plumbing and carpentry components of residential and industrial
buildings, safety aspects.

Plumbing Works:
1. Study of pipeline joints, its location and functions: valves, taps, couplings,
unions, reducers, elbows in household fittings.
2. Study of pipe connections requirements for pumps and turbines.
3. Preparation of plumbing line sketches for water supply and sewage works.
4. Hands-on-exercise: Basic pipe connections – Mixed pipe material
connection – Pipe connections with different joining components.
5. Demonstration of plumbing requirements of high-rise buildings.

Carpentry using Power Tools only:

1. Study of the joints in roofs, doors, windows and furniture.
2. Hands-on-exercise: Wood work, joints by sawing, planing and cutting.

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE

Welding:
1. Preparation of butt joints, lap joints and T- joints by Shielded metal arc
welding.
2. Gas welding practice.
43
 Syllabus ECE
Basic Machining:
1. Simple Turning and Taper turning.
2. Drilling Practice.

Sheet Metal Work:

1. Forming & Bending.
2. Model making – Trays and funnels.
3. Different type of joints.
Machine assembly practice:
1. Study of centrifugal pump.
2. Study of air conditioner.

Demonstration on:
1. Smithy operations, upsetting, swaging, setting down and bending.
Example – Exercise – Production of hexagonal headed bolt.
2. Foundry operations like mould preparation for gear and step cone pulley.
3. Fitting – Exercises – Preparation of square fitting and V – fitting models.
Total : 45 PERIODS
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS
1. Electrical
1 Assorted electrical components for house wiring 15 Sets
2 Electrical measuring instruments 10 Sets
3 Study purpose items:
Iron box, fan and regulator, emergency lamp 1 Each
4 Megger (250V/500V) 1 No
5 Power Tools:
Range Finder 2 Nos
Digital Live-wire detector 2 Nos

2. Electronics
1 Soldering guns 10 Nos
2 Assorted electronic components for making circuits 50 Nos
3 Small PCBs 10 Nos
4 Multimeters 10 Nos

3. Civil
1 Assorted components for plumbing consisting of metallic
pipes, plastic pipes, flexible pipes, couplings, unions, elbows,
plugs and other fittings. 15 Sets
44
 Syllabus ECE
2 Carpentry vice (fitted to work bench) 15 Nos
3 Standard woodworking tools 15 Sets
4 Models of industrial trusses, door joints, furniture joints 5 each
5 Power Tools:
Rotary Hammer 2 Nos
Demolition Hammer 2 Nos
Circular Saw 2 Nos
Planer 2 Nos
Hand Drilling Machine 2 Nos
Jigsaw 2 Nos

4. Mechanical
1 Arc welding transformer with cables and holders 5 Nos
2 Welding booth with exhaust facility 5 Nos
3 Welding accessories like welding shield, chipping hammer,
wire brush, etc 5 Sets
4 Oxygen and acetylene gas cylinders, blow pipe and other
welding outfit. 2 Nos
5 Centre lathe 2 Nos
6 Hearth furnace, anvil and smithy tools 2 Sets
7 Moulding table, foundry tools 2 Sets
8 Power Tool: Angle Grinder 2 Nos
9 Study-purpose items: centrifugal pump, air-conditioner 1 each

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students should be able to
1. Elaborate on the components, gates, soldering practices. Calculate
electrical parameters such as voltage, current, resistance and power.
(K1)
2. Design and implement Rectifier and Timer circuits (K2)
3. Measure the electrical energy by single phase and three phase energy
meters. (K2)
4. Prepare the carpentry and plumbing joints. (K2)
5. Perform different types of welding joints and sheet metal works (K2)
6. Perform different machining operations in lathe and drilling. (K2)

45
 Syllabus ECE
CO - PO MAPPING:
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2 1 1 2 1 - - 1 1 1 1

CO2 3 2 1 1 2 1 - - 1 1 1 1

CO3 2 2 1 1 1 1 - - 1 1 1 1

CO4 1 1 1 - - 2 - - 1 1 1 2

CO5 2 1 1 - - 1 1 1 1 1 1 2

CO6 2 1 1 - - 1 - 1 1 1 1 2

SEMESTER - II
20ECPL201 CIRCUITS AND DEVICES L T P C
SDG NO. 4 LABORATORY 0 0 3 1.5

OBJECTIVES:
l Analyse the characteristics of basic electronic devices
l Design RL and RC circuits
l Verify KVL & KCL, Thevinin, Norton and Super Position Theorems
l Verify Reciprocity and Maximum Power Transfer Theorem
l Analyse the characteristics of Wave shaping circuits and Rectifier

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS :
1. Characteristics of PN Junction Diode.
2. Zener diode Characteristics & Regulator using Zener diode .
3. Common Emitter input-output Characteristics.
4. Common Base input-output Characteristics.
5. FET Characteristics.
6. SCR Characteristics.
7. Clipper and Clamper & FWR.
8. Verifications of Thevinin & Norton theorem.
9. Verifications of KVL & KCL.
10. Verifications of Super Position Theorem.
11. Verifications of maximum power transfer & reciprocity theorem.
12. Determination of Resonance Frequency of Series & Parallel RLC Circuits.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

46
 Syllabus ECE

LAB REQUIREMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS /

2 STUDENTS PER EXPERIMENT:
S.No. EQUIPMENTS
1. BC 107, BC 148, 2N2646, BFW10 - 25 each
2. 1N4007, Zener diodes - 25 each
3. Resistors, Capacitors, Inductors - sufficient quantities
4. Bread Boards - 15 Nos
5. CRO (30MHz) - 10 Nos
6. Function Generators (3MHz) - 10 Nos

OUTCOMES :
On completion of this laboratory course, the student should be able to
1 Analyze the characteristics of PN junction diode and zener diode. ( K4)
2 Analyze the characteristics of BJT in CB & CE configurations. (K4)
3 Analyze the characteristics of FET and SCR. (K4)
4 Analyze the characteristics of Wave shaping circuits, Rectifiers and
regulators. (K4)
5 Apply KVL, KCL,Thevenin and Norton theorem for DC electric circuits.
(K3)
6 Apply Superposition, Maximum power transfer and reciprocity theorem
for DC electric circuits. (K3)

CO - PO, PSO MAPPING :

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 3 1 3 1 - - - - - 2 3 3 2

CO2 3 3 1 3 1 - - - - - 2 3 3 2

CO3 3 3 1 3 1 - - - - - 2 3 3 2

CO4 3 3 1 3 1 - - - - - 2 3 3 2

CO5 3 3 1 3 1 - - - - - 2 3 3 2

CO6 3 3 1 3 1 - - - - - 2 3 3 2

47
 Syllabus ECE

SEMESTER - II
20ECTE201 L T P C
PCB DESIGN
SDG NO. 9 0 0 2 1

OBJECTIVES:
l Analyze and interpret test results and measurements on electric circuits
l To predict the performance of electric circuits from device
characteristics
l Design an electronic printed circuit board for a specific application using
industry standard software

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS :
1. Introduction to PCB and OrCAD or its equivalent software.
2. Designing of schematic.
3. Designing of capture from OrCAD or its equivalent and getting positive
for PCB manufacturing.
4. Soldering shop: Fabrication of DC regulated power supply.
5. PCB Lab: (a) Artwork & printing of a simple PCB. (b) Etching & drilling
of PCB.
6. Wiring & fitting shop: Fitting of power supply along with a meter in
cabinet.
7. Testing of regulated power supply fabricated.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
LAB REQUIREMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS /
2 STUDENTS PER EXPERIMENT:
S.No. EQUIPMENTS
1. Copper cladded base board -15 Nos.
2. Hand Drilling machine -15 Nos.
3. Soldering guns -15 Nos.
4. Assorted electronic components for making circuits -50 Nos.
5. OrCAD software (15 users)
6. Copper solvent -as required
7. PCs - 15 Nos -15 Nos.

OUTCOMES:
On completion of this course, the student should be able to
1 Perform the chemical processes by using negative/positive masks(K3)
2. Design the PCB mask using ORCAD software(K6)

48
 Syllabus ECE
3. Perform the routing optimization processes by using ORCAD or its
equivalent software.(K3)
4. Apply the mechanical processes by using drilling and etching machines
on raw PCB(K3)
5. Perform the soldering process(K3)
6. Design and test the PCB for regulated power supply(K6)

CO - PO, PSO MAPPING:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 2 3 3 - 2 2 - 3 2 3 2 3 2

CO2 3 2 2 2 3 1 - - 3 2 3 2 3 2

CO3 3 2 2 2 3 1 - - 3 2 3 2 3 2

CO4 3 2 2 2 - 1 - - 3 2 3 2 3 2

CO5 3 2 2 2 - 1 - - 3 2 3 2 3 2

CO6 3 2 3 2 - 1 - - 3 2 3 2 3 2

SEMESTER - II
20TPHS201 L T P C
SKILL ENHANCEMENT
SDG NO. 4&5 0 0 2 1

OBJECTIVES:
l To understand the nuances in resume building
l To explore various virtual meeting tools
l To gain knowledge about online certification courses
l To develop knowledge in Google Suite products
l To enhance presentation skills

UNIT I RESUME BUILDING 6

Your Strength, Projects, Internship, Paper Presentation, uploading your
coding in github, Introduction to HackerRank, HackerEarth virtual online
assessment (Auto Proctored) (Practicals - Construct a resume, Register for a
online Mock Assessment / Contest)

UNIT II VIRTUAL MEETINGS 6

Basic Etiquette of virtual meeting – Introduction to Skype - Zoom - Webex -
Google Meet - Gotowebinar - Jio meet – Screen Share - Jamboard - Feedback
polling - Chatbox
49
 Syllabus ECE
(Practicals - Accept and Register for a mock class to attend - How to host a
meeting).

UNIT III ONLINE LEARNING 6

Online Certification - Coursera – Udemy – Edx – Cisco – Online Practice
Platforms - SkillRack – Myslate - FACEprep - BYTS - aptimithra - Contest
Registrations - TCS Campus Commune - HackwithInfy, InfyTQ - Virtusa
NurualHack - Mindtree Osmosis – Online assessment - AMCAT-PGPA.
(Practicals - Campus Commune Registration , Coursera registration - Mock
Registration (KAAR Technologies as sample).

UNIT IV GOOGLE SUITE 8

Define google suite - Benefits of google suite - Google Search - Sheet - Docs -
Forms - Calender - Drive - Slide - Translate - Duo - Earch - Maps - Hangouts-
Sites - Books - Blogger
(Practicals – Create google sheets and share - Create google Forms and share,
Create Google Slide and share , Google drive creation and share (Knowledge of
Rights), Create poll and share.

UNIT V PRESENTATION SKILLS 4

Email Writing – Group Discussion - Power Point Presentation
(Practicals- Create a self SWOT Analysis report. A PowerPoint Slide
Preparation)
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
WEB REFERENCES :
Unit I: Resume Building:
1. https://zety.com/blog/resume-tips
2. https://resumegenius.com/blog/resume-help/how-to-write-a-resume
3. https://www.hackerearth.com/recruit/
4. https://www.hackerrank.com/about-us

Unit – II:Virtual Meetings

1. https://www.claphamschool.org/our-community/blog/online-
learning-etiquette-guide-14-principles-to-guide-students
2. h t t p s : / / o n l i n e . h b s . e d u / b l o g / p o s t / v i r t u a l - i n t e r v i e w -
tips?c1=GAW_SE_NW&source=IN_GEN_DSA&cr2=search__-__nw__-
__in__-__dsa__-__general&kw=dsa__-__general& cr5=459341920955&cr7
=c&gclid=Cj0KCQjw8fr7BRDSARIsAK0Qqr4dRRbboL3kltrwDsr7hm8oI
HtN5dfjD3NIFZULuzNwEXxhjpNFQ2caApn5EALw_wcB

50
 Syllabus ECE
3. https://hygger.io/blog/top-10-best-group-meeting-apps-business/
4. https://www.zdnet.com/article/best-video-conferencing-software-and-
services-for-business/

Unit – III:Online Learning

1. https://www.coursera.org/browse
2. https://support.udemy.com/hc/en-us/articles/229603868-Certificate-
of-Completion
3. https://www.edx.org/course/how-to-learn-online
4. h t t p s : / / w w w. c i s c o . c o m / c / e n / u s / t ra i n i n g - eve n t s / t ra i n i n g -
certifications/certifications.html
5. https://campuscommune.tcs.com/en-in/intro
6. https://www.freshersnow.com/tcs-campus-commune-registration/
7. https://www.infosys.com/careers/hackwithinfy.html
8. https://www.mindtree.com/blog/osmosis-2013-my-experiences
9. https://www.myamcat.com/knowing-amcat
10. https://www.admitkard.com/blog/2020/02/06/amcat/

Unit IV: Google Suite

1. https://www.inmotionhosting.com/blog/what-is-g-suite-and-why-
should-i-consider-using-it/
2. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/G_Suite
3. https://blog.hubspot.com/marketing/google-suite
4. https://kinsta.com/blog/g-suite/

Unit V: Presentation Skills

1. https://www.mindtools.com/CommSkll/EmailCommunication.htm
2. https://www.grammarly.com/blog/email-writing-tips/
3. https://business.tutsplus.com/articles/how-to-write-a-formal-email--
cms-29793
4. https://www.softwaretestinghelp.com/how-to-crack-the-gd/
5. https://www.mbauniverse.com/group-discussion/tips
6. https://slidemodel.com/23-powerpoint-presentation-tips-creating-
engaging-interactive-presentations/
7. https://business.tutsplus.com/articles/37-effective-powerpoint-
presentation-tips--cms-25421
8 https://blog.prezi.com/9-tips-on-how-to-make-a-presentation-a-
success/
9. http://www.garrreynolds.com/preso-tips/design/
51
 ECE
Syllabus
OUTCOMES:
On completion of this course, the student should be able to
1. Construct a suitable resume and registration procedure for online mock
assessments. (K1)
2. Handle various virtual meeting tools. (K3)
3. Acquire exposure about online certification courses. (K4)
4. Get involved and work in a collaborative manner. (K2)
5. Gain knowledge in various presentation methodologies. (K1)
6. Apply knowledge to practice Google suite features and SWOT analysis. (K3)

CO – PO MAPPING
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 - - - - 3 2 - 3 2 3 - 2

CO2 - - - - 3 2 - 3 2 3 - 2

CO3 - - - - 3 2 - - 1 3 - 2

CO4 - - - - 3 2 - 3 3 3 - 2

CO5 - - - - 3 2 - - 2 3 - 2

CO6 - - - - 3 2 - - 2 3 - 2

SEMESTER - II
20HSMG201 L T P C
INTERPERSONAL VALUES
SDG NO. 4 & 5 2 0 0 0
OBJECTIVES:
l Values through Practical activities

UNIT I INTERPERSONAL VALUES 6

Interpersonal Relationships and Values – Importance and Barriers – Building
and maintain relationships – Mutual understanding – Respect to others.

UNIT II EFFECTIVE COMMUNICATION 6

Communication skills –Importance and Barriers - Impressive formation and
management – Public speaking

UNIT III GROUP DYNAMICS 6

Group formation –Teamwork – Identify others attitude and behaviour –
52
 Syllabus ECE
Formation of relationship – Personal and professional.

UNIT IV MUTUAL RELATIONSHIP 6

Building mutual understanding and cooperation – Enhancing decision making
skills – Problem solving skills – Comparative Appraisal – Interpersonal needs.

UNIT V POSITIVE ATTITUDE 6

Fostering trust and cooperation – Developing and maintain positive attitude –
Improving socialization – Development of security and comfort.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
Note: Each topic in all the above units will be supplemented by practice
exercises and classroom activities and projects.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Barun K. Mitra, “Personality Development and Soft Skills”, Oxford
University Press, 2016.
2. B.N.Ghosh, “Managing Soft Skills for Personality Development”, McGraw
Hill India, 2012.

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1. Develop a healthy relationship & harmony with others. (K1)
2. Practice respecting every human being. (K3)
3. Practice to eradicate negative temperaments. (K3)
4. Acquire Respect, Honesty, Empathy, Forgiveness and Equality. (K4)
5. Manage the cognitive abilities of an Individual. (K5)
6. Understanding the importance of public speaking and teamwork. (K2)

CO – PO MAPPING :
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 1 1 1

CO2 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 1 1 1

CO3 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 1 1 1

CO4 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 1 1 1

CO5 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 1 1 1

CO6 - - - - - 2 2 3 3 1 1 1

53
 Syllabus ECE
SEMESTER - III
20ECPC301 L T P C
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS
SDG NO. 4, 9 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l To introduce basic postulates of Boolean algebra and shows the
correlation between Boolean expressions.
l To introduce the methods for simplifying Boolean expressions.
l To outline the formal procedures for the analysis and design of
combinational circuits and sequential circuits.
l To introduce the concept of memories and programmable logic devices.
l To illustrate the concept of synchronous and asynchronous sequential
circuits.

UNIT I LOGIC SIMPLIFICATION 9

Review of number systems and number representation – Binary codes – Code
Conversion; Logic Simplification: Review of Boolean Algebra and De Morgan’s
Theorem – SOP and POS forms – Canonical forms – Karnaugh maps up to 5
variables- QuineMcClusky method - Implementation using logic gates.

UNIT II COMBINATIONAL LOGIC DESIGN 9

Design of Half and Full Adders, Half and Full Subtractors, Binary Parallel Adder
– Carry look ahead Adder, BCD Adder, Multiplexer, Demultiplexer, Magnitude
Comparator, Decoder, Encoder, Priority Encoder.

UNIT III SYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS 9

Flip- Flops: Bistable elements, Latches, Flip flops – SR, JK, T, D– operation and
excitation tables, Triggering of Flip Flop- Master/Slave Flip flop.
Registers and Counters: Shift registers -SISO, SIPO, PISO and PIPO, Universal
Shift Register; up/down Counters; Design of Synchronous counters, Modulus-
N Counter - Shift Register Counters -Ring Counters and Johnson Counter.
Clocked Sequential Circuit: Analysis of clocked sequential circuits – concept
of state – state diagram - state table, state reduction procedures by
partitioning and implication chart- Moore/Mealy models; Design of
synchronous sequential circuits- Serial Adder- Sequence detector.

UNIT IV ASYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS 9

Introduction to asynchronous sequential circuits - fundamental mode and
pulse mode circuits - State Diagram and Excitation Table - Ripple Counters-
cycles and races, state reduction, race free assignments –Pulse mode

54
 Syllabus ECE
sequential circuits- Design. Hazards, Essential Hazards, Design of Hazard free
circuits

UNIT V MEMORY DEVICES AND PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC DEVICES 9

Memory Devices: Basic memory structure – ROM - PROM – EPROM –
EEPROM –EAPROM, RAM – Static and dynamic RAM
PLDs: PLA, PAL, PROM, Field Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGA) -
Implementation of combinational logic circuits using PLA, PAL. – CPLD.
Digital integrated circuits: Logic levels, propagation delay, power
dissipation, fan-out and fan-in, noise margin, logic families and their
characteristics-RTL, TTL, ECL, CMOS
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. M. Morris Mano and Michael D. Ciletti, “Digital Design”, Fifth Edition,
Pearson, 2014.
2. S. Salivahanan, S. Arivazhagan, “Digital Circuits and Design”, Oxford Press
India, 2018 (Fifth Edition).
3. R P Jain, “Modern Digital Electronics”, McGraw Hill India, 2009
(Fourth Edition).

REFERENCES:
1. Charles H.Roth. “Fundamentals of Logic Design”, 6th Edition, Thomson
Learning, 2013.
2. Thomas L. Floyd, “Digital Fundamentals”, 10th Edition, Pearson Education
Inc, 2011.
3. S.Salivahanan and S.Arivazhagan, “Digital Electronics”, Ist Edition, Vikas
Publishing House pvt Ltd, 2012.
4. Anil K.Maini, “Digital Electronics”, Wiley, 2014.
5. A.Anand Kumar, “Fundamentals of Digital Circuits”, 4th Edition, PHI
Learning Private Limited, 2016.
6. Soumitra Kumar Mandal, “Digital Electronics”, McGraw Hill Education
Private Limited, 2016.
7. Donald P Leach, Albert Paul Malvino and GoutamSaha, “Digital Principles
and Applications” McGraw Hill, India – 2014 (8th Edition – SIE).
8. R P Jain, “Modern Digital Electronics”, McGraw Hill India, 2009- fourth
Edition

WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117106086/1
2. http://web.iitd.ac.in/~shouri/eel201/lectures.php
3. https://www.allaboutcircuits.com/textbook/digital/
4. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117103064/
55
 Syllabus ECE
ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://www.adelaide.edu.au/course-outlines/108280/1/sem-2/ -
University of Adelaide
2. http://jjackson.eng.ua.edu/courses/ece480/- The University of Alabama
3. http://www.ee.ic.ac.uk/pcheung/teaching/ee2_digital/index.html -
Imperial College London

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1 Apply the basic postulates of Boolean algebra, Karnaugh map method
(limited to 5 variables only) and tabulation method on minimization of
Boolean expressions and implement the expressions using logic gates and
recall number systems and their representation. (K3)
2. Explain the design procedure of standard combinational arithmetic
circuits, multiplexers, decoders and encoders and apply it to design
combinational circuits for the specifications provided. (K3)
3. Explain the Triggering of FF, structure, function of SR, JK, T, D and
Master/Slave FF, SISO, SIPO, PISO and PIPO, Universal Shift Register;
up/down Counters, Shift Register Counters -Ring Counters and Johnson
Counter. (K2)
4. Apply the design procedures to model synchronous and asynchronous
counters, serial adder and sequence detector, Moore model, Mealy model,
Fundamental and Pulse mode digital circuits and hazard free circuits for
the specifications provided. (K3)
5. Interpret the behavior of the synchronous Moore, Mealy models and
Asynchronous Fundamental and Pulse mode sequential circuits from the
analysis procedures. (K2)
6. Describe the function, characteristics and structure of different memory
systems, FPGA, PAL, PLA, CPLDs, digital integrated circuits with logic
families and apply the design procedure on combinational circuits design
using Programmable logic devices.(K3)

CO - PO, PSO MAPPING:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 2 2 1 2 - - - 1 - - - 2 3 2

CO2 3 3 3 3 - - - 1 2 2 - 2 3 2

CO3 2 2 3 3 - - - - 2 2 - 1 3 2

CO4 3 1 2 1 - - - 2 1 1 - 1 3 2

CO5 3 2 3 1 - - - 1 2 1 - 1 3 2

CO6 3 2 3 1 - - - 1 2 1 - 1 3 2
56
 Syllabus ECE

SEMESTER - III
20ECPC302 ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS L T P C
SDG NO. 3,4,7,15 AND WAVEGUIDES 3 1 0 4

OBJECTIVES:
l To gain conceptual and basic mathematical understanding of electric
and magnetic fields in free space and in materials
l To understand the coupling between electric and magnetic fields
through Faraday's law, displacement current and Maxwell's equations
l To understand wave propagation in lossless and in lossy media
l To be able to solve problems based on the above concepts
l To understand signal propagation at radio frequencies and analyse the
rectangular and circular waveguides

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Electromagnetic model, Units and constants, Review of vector algebra,
Rectangular, cylindrical and spherical coordinate systems, Line, surface and
volume integrals, Gradient of a scalar field, Divergence of a vector field,
Divergence theorem, Curl of a vector field, Stoke's theorem, Null identities,
Helmholtz's theorem.

UNIT II ELECTROSTATICS 9
Electric charge, Coulomb's law, Electric field due to Line, Surface, Volume
charge densities, Electric flux, Electric flux density, Gauss's law and
applications, Electric potential, Potential gradient-Conductors in static
electric field, Dielectrics in static electric field, Electric flux density and
dielectric constant, Boundary conditions, Capacitance, Parallel, cylindrical
and spherical capacitors, Electrostatic energy and energy density, Poisson's
and Laplace's equations, Uniqueness of electrostatic solutions, Current
density and Point form of Ohm's law, Electromotive force and Kirchhoff's
voltage law, Equation of continuity and Kirchhoff's current law .

UNIT III MAGNETOSTATICS 9

Lorentz force equation, Law of no magnetic monopoles, Ampere's law, Biot-
Savart law and applications, Magnetic field intensity, Magnetic flux density,
Gauss's law, Magnetic vector potential, Lorentz force equation, Boundary
conditions and idea of relative permeability, Magnetic circuits, Behaviour of
magnetic materials, Boundary conditions, Inductance and inductors,
Magnetic energy and Magnetic energy density, Magnetic forces and torques

57
 Syllabus ECE
Applications – CRT – magnetic deflection, Magnetic brake, Linear motor, Time
Varying Field: Induction, Faraday's law, Lenz's law.

UNIT IV TIME-VARYING FIELDS AND MAXWELL's EQUATIONS 9

Faraday's law, Lenz's law, Displacement current and Maxwell-Ampere law,
Maxwell's equations, Potential functions, Electromagnetic boundary
conditions, Wave equations and solutions, Plane waves in lossless media,
Plane waves in lossy media (low-loss dielectrics and good conductors), Group
velocity, Electromagnetic power flow and Poynting vector.

UNIT V WAVEGUIDES 9
Introduction to Rectangular and Circular Waveguides, Solutions of field
Equations in Rectangular Co-ordinates, TEmn & TMmn Modes in Rectangular
Waveguides, solutions of a field equations in cylindrical coordinates, TEmn &
TMmn Modes in Circular Waveguides, Impossibility of TEM waves in
Rectangular wave guides, Waveguide Parameters — Cut-off wavelength, Guide
wavelength, Free space Wavelength, Phase velocity, Group velocity, Dominant
and Degenerated Modes, Power Transmission and Power losses in
Rectangular and Circular Waveguides
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS
1. D.K. Cheng, “Field and Wave Electromagnetics”, 2nd Edition, Pearson
(India), 1989.
2. John. D. Ryder, “Network Lines and Fields”, 2nd Edition, PHI Learning,2005..

REFERENCES:
1. D.J. Griffiths, “Introduction to Electrodynamics”, 4th Edition, Pearson
(India), 2013.
2. M.N.O. Sadiku and S.V. Kulkarni, “Principles of Electromagnetics”, 6th
Edition, Oxford (Asian Edition), 2015.
3. E. C. Jordan and K.G. Balmain, “Electromagnetic Waves and Radiating
Systems”, Prentice Hall of India, 2006.

WEB RESOURCES :
1. https://ocw.mit.edu/resources/res-6-002-electromagnetic-field-
theory-a-problem-solving-approach-spring-2008/textbook-contents/

58
 Syllabus ECE

ONLINE RESOURCES :
1. https://freevideolectures.com/course/2340/electromagnetic-fields
2. https://ocw.mit.edu/resources/res-6-001-electromagnetic-fields-and-
energy-spring-2008/index.htm

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1. Apply fundamentals of Vector analysis in 3D coordinate systems. (K1)
2. Review the basic concepts and laws in Electromagnetics to Compute the
field quantities. (K2)
3. Examine the behavior of materials in Electric and Magnetic fields. (K3)
4. Derive Maxwell's equations and wave equations for static and time
varying fields. (K3)
5. Discuss propagation of Electromagnetic waves in lossy and lossless
mediums. (K3)
6. Analyze the characteristics of TE and TM waves in rectangular and
cylindrical waveguides. (K3)

CO - PO, PSO MAPPING:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 2 2 - - - - 1 1 - 1 1 1 1

CO2 3 2 2 - - - - 1 1 - 1 1 1 1

CO3 3 2 2 - - - - 1 1 - 1 1 1 1

CO4 3 2 2 - - - - 1 1 - 1 1 1 1

CO5 3 2 2 - - - - 1 1 - 1 1 1 1

CO6 3 2 2 - - - - 1 1 - 1 1 1 1

59
 Syllabus ECE
SEMESTER - III
20ECPC303 L T P C
SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS
SDG NO. 3,4,11 3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
l To understand the fundamentals and properties of signal & systems
l To know the methods of characterization of LTI systems in time
domain and frequency domain
l To analyze continuous time signals and system using Fourier and
Laplace transforms
l To analyze discrete time signals and system using Fourier and Z
transforms
l To analyze analog and discrete time systems, connected in series and
parallel

UNIT I CLASSIFICATION OF SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS 9

Standard signals- Step, Ramp, Pulse, Impulse, Real and complex exponentials
and Sinusoids_ Representation of Continuous and discrete time signals,
Classification of signals – Continuous time (CT) and Discrete Time (DT)
signals, Periodic & Aperiodic signals, Deterministic & Random signals, Energy
& Power signals - Classification of systems-CT systems and DT systems- –
Linear & Nonlinear, Time-variant & Time-invariant, Causal & Non-causal,
Stable & Unstable.

UNIT II ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS TIME SIGNALS 9

Fourier series representation of continuous time periodic signals - properties
of continuous time Fourier series, Fourier Transform of continuous time
aperiodic signals and periodic signals, properties of continuous time Fourier
transform - Laplace Transforms and properties.

UNIT III LINEAR TIME INVARIANT CONTINUOUS TIME SYSTEMS 9

Impulse response - convolution integrals- Properties of continuous time LTI
system - Differential Equation- Causal continuous time LTI system described
by differential equations -Fourier and Laplace transforms in Analysis of CT
systems - Systems connected in series / parallel.

UNIT IV ANALYSIS OF DISCRETE TIME SIGNALS 9

Baseband signal Sampling – properties of discrete time LTI system, Causal
discrete time LTI system described by difference equations. Fourier series

60
 Syllabus ECE
representation of discrete time periodic signals, properties of discrete time
Fourier series, Fourier Transform of discrete time signals (DTFT) – Properties
of DTFT - Z Transform & Properties.

UNIT V LINEAR TIME INVARIANT-DISCRETE TIME SYSTEMS 9

Impulse response – Difference equations-Convolution sum-Discrete Fourier
Transform and Z Transform Analysis of Recursive & Non-Recursive systems-
DT systems connected in series and parallel.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Allan V.Oppenheim, S.Wilsky and S.H.Nawab, “Signals and Systems”,
Pearson, 2015.

REFERENCES:
1. B. P. Lathi, “Principles of Linear Systems and Signals”, Second Edition,
Oxford, 2009.
2. R.E.Zeimer, W.H.Tranter and R.D.Fannin, “Signals & Systems - Continuous
and Discrete”, Pearson, 2007.
3. John Alan Stuller, “An Introduction to Signals and Systems”, Thomson,
2007.

WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://www.tutorialspoint.com/signals_and_systems/index.htm

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://ocw.mit.edu/resources/res-6-007-signals-and-systems-spring-
2011/lecture-notes/
2. https://ocw.mit.edu/resources/res-6-007-signals-and-systems-spring-
2011/assignments/

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1. Predict the different types of signals and systems to represent in time
domain. (K3)
2. Interpret the Continuous time signals in frequency domain using Fourier
series and its properties. (K2)
3. Examine the Continuous time signals using Fourier Transform and Laplace
Transform to analyze their properties. (K3)
4. Determine the response of the Continuous LTI system in the time domain
and frequency domain and realize their interconnections. (K3)
61
 Syllabus ECE
5. Interpret the Continuous time signals in terms of discrete time signals and
examine the Discrete time signals using Fourier and Z transform to analyze
their properties. (K2)
6. Determine the response of the Discrete LTI system in the time domain and
frequency domain and realize their interconnections. (K3)

CO - PO, PSO MAPPING :

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 3 1 - - - - - - - - 2 2 -

CO2 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - - 2 1

CO3 3 3 2 3 - - - - - - - 1 2 1

CO4 3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - 1 2 1

CO5 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 2 1

CO6 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 2 1

SEMESTER - III
20ECPW301 R PROGRAMMING L T P C
SDG NO. 4 & 9 WITH LABORATORY 3 0 2 4

OBJECTIVES:
l To Understand the environment of R programming
l To obtain knowledge in the various structural aspects of R
l To utilize the libraries in the R programming for various mathematical
functions
l To use the libraries for real time analysis of data and its plotting
prospects
l To study the basics of machine learning and its implementation using
R

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction, How to run R, R Sessions, and Functions, Basic Math, Variables,
Data Types, Vectors, Conclusion, Advanced Data Structures, Data Frames,
Lists, Matrices, Arrays, Classes.

62
 Syllabus ECE
UNIT II BASIC OF R PROGRAMMING 9
R Programming Structures, Control Statements, Loops, Looping Over
Nonvector Sets, If-Else, Arithmetic and Boolean Operators and values, Default
Values for Argument, Return Values, Deciding Whether to explicitly call
return- Returning Complex Objects, Functions are Objective, No Pointers in R,
Recursion, A Quicksort Implementation-Extended Extended Example: A
Binary SearchTree.

UNIT III MATHEMATICAL RELATIONS IN R 9

Doing Math and Simulation in R, Math Function, Extended Example
Calculating Probability - Cumulative Sums and Products - Minima and Maxima
- Calculus, Functions For Statistical Distribution, Sorting, Linear Algebra
operation on Vectors and Matrices, Extended Example: Vector cross Product -
Extended Example: Finding Stationary Distribution of Markov Chains, Set
Operation, Input /output, Accessing the Keyboard and Monitor, Reading and
writer Files.

UNIT IV VISUALISATION USING AND BASICS OF MACHINE LEARNING

9
Graphics, Creating Graphs, The Workhorse of R Base Graphics, the plot ( )
Function – Customizing Graphs, Saving Graphs to Files. Machine learning -
Introduction- Classifications - Supervised learning-unsupervised learning -
reinforcement learning - Algorithms - Case studies.

UNIT V STATISTICAL MODELS AND ITS IMPLEMENTATION 9

Probability Distributions, Normal Distribution - Binomial Distribution -
Poisson Distributions Other Distribution, Basic Statistics, Correlation and
Covariance, T-Tests, ANOVA. Linear Models, Simple Linear Regression,
Multiple Regression Generalized Linear Models, Logistic Regression, Poisson
Regression - other Generalized Linear Models - Survival Analysis, Nonlinear
Models, Splines - Decision- Random Forests.

R PROGRAMMING LAB-LIST OF EXPERIMENTS: 15

1. Datatypes
2. Functions
3. Creating and manipulating a vector
4. Creating and manipulating matrix
5. Creating and operations on Factors
6. Data Frames-Lists-Operators-PLOT Function in R to customize graphs.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

63
 Syllabus ECE
TEXT BOOKS:
1. The Art of R Programming, Norman Matloff, CengageLearning.
2. Siegel, S. (1956), Nonparametric Statistics for the Behavioral Sciences,
McGraw-Hill International, Auckland.

REFERENCES:
1. Lander, “R for Everyone”, Pearson
2. Venables, W. N., and Ripley, B. D. (2000), “S Programming”, Springer-
Verlag, NewYork.
3. Weisberg, S. (1985), “Applied Linear Regression”, 2nd ed., John Wiley &
Sons, NewYork.
4. Zar, J. H. (1999), “Biostatistical Analysis”, Prentice Hall, Englewood
Cliffs,NJ

WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://www.cs.upc.edu/~robert/teaching/estadistica/rprogramming.
pdf.
2. https://link.springer.com/content/pdf/10.1007%2F978-0-387-79054-
1.pdf3.https://link.springer.com/content/pdf/10.1007%2F978-0-387-
93837-0.pdf

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://www.statmethods.net/r-tutorial/index.html
2. https://www.javatpoint.com/r-tutorial

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1 Explain data structures and mathematical operations in R (K2)
2 Describe the programming concepts of control and loop statements,
function call and recursion in R (K2)
3 Implement in R studio mathematical relations with extended examples
(K3)
4 Interpret the Statistical models and distributions using different plots (K2)
5 Describe the operation of I/O accessing and graphics in R (K2)
6 Demonstrate R codes for Machine Learning Algorithms for various
applications (K3)

64
 Syllabus ECE
CO - PO - PSO MAPPING :
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 2 2 - - - - 1 1 - 1 1 1 1

CO2 3 2 2 - - - - 1 1 - 1 1 1 1

CO3 3 2 2 - - - - 1 1 - 1 1 1 1

CO4 3 2 2 - - - - 1 1 - 1 1 1 1

CO5 3 2 2 - - - - 1 1 - 1 1 1 1

CO6 3 2 2 - - - - 1 1 - 1 1 1 1

SEMESTER - III
20BSMA301 LINEAR ALGEBRA, PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL L T P C
SDG NO. 4 EQUATIONS AND TRANSFORMS 3 1 0 4
OBJECTIVES:
l The aim of this course is to impart knowledge in the concepts of linear
algebra as a prerequisite for the recent thrust areas of technological
advancement
l To know the importance of partial differential equations in modeling
various engineering problems
l To introduce the techniques of Fourier transform and Z- Transforms to
analyze continuous and discrete signals

UNIT I VECTOR SPACES 15

Vector spaces – Subspaces – Linear combinations– Linear independence and
linear dependence – Bases and dimensions.

UNIT II LINEAR TRANSFORMATION AND INNER PRODUCT SPACES 15

Linear transformation - Null and range spaces - Dimension theorem
(Statement only) - Matrix of a linear transformation - Inner product - Norm -
Gram Schmidt orthogonalization process.

UNIT III PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12

Formation of partial differential equations – Singular integrals - Solutions of
standard types of first order partial differential equations - Lagrange's linear
equation - Linear partial differential equations of second and higher order
with constant coefficients of both homogeneous and non-homogeneous types.

65
 Syllabus ECE
UNIT IV FOURIER TRANSFORMS 9
Statement of Fourier integral theorem – Fourier transform pair – Fourier sine
and cosine transforms – Properties – Transforms of simple functions –
Convolution theorem – Parseval's identity.

UNIT V Z - TRANSFORMS AND DIFFERENCE EQUATIONS 9

Z-transforms - Elementary properties – Inverse Z-transform (using partial
fractions and residues) – Initial and final value theorems - Convolution
theorem - Formation of difference equations – Solution of difference
equations using Z - transform.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Friedberg A.H., Insel A.J. and Spence L., “Linear Algebra”, Prentice Hall of
India, New Delhi, 2004. Unit I (Sec. 1.2, 1.3, 1.4 (linear combinations only),
1.5 & 1.6), Unit II (Sec. 2.1, 2.2, 6.1 & 6.2) (In Units I & II to include theorem
statements only).
2. Veerarajan T., "Transforms and Partial Differential Equations", Tata
McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., 3rd Edition, New Delhi. Unit III (Sec. 1.2,
1.5, 1.7, 1.11, 1.13, 1.14), Unit IV (Sec. 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.6), Unit V(Sec. 5.1, 5.2,
5.3, 5.4, 5.5).

REFERENCES:
1. Strang G., “Linear Algebra and its applications”, Thomson (Brooks/Cole),
New Delhi, 2005.
2. Lay D. C., “Linear Algebra and its Applications”, 5th Edition, Pearson
Education, 2015.
3. Kumaresan S., “Linear Algebra – A Geometric Approach”, Prentice – Hall of
India, New Delhi, Reprint, 2010.
4. James G., “Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics”, Pearson
Education, 2007.
5. O'Neil, P.V., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Cengage Learning,
2011.

WEB RESOURCES
1. https://ocw.mit.edu/resources/res-6-007-signals-and-systems-spring-
2011/lecture-notes/
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/111/106/111106135/
3. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/111/103/111103021/

66
 Syllabus ECE
ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://www.khanacademy.org/math/linear-algebra
2. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/mathematics/18-06-linear-algebra-
spring-2010/video-lectures/
3. https://freevideolectures.com/course/3244/advanced-engineering-
mathematics

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students should be able to
1. Identify a vector space, subspace and construct the basis and dimension of
a vector space. (K3)
2. Compute the rank and nullity of a linear transformation and construct an
orthonormal basis using the Gram Schmidt orthogonalization process.
(K3)
3. Solve first order linear partial differential equations and higher order
homogeneous and non - homogeneous partial differential equations. (K3)
4. Find Fourier transforms and Fourier sine and cosine transforms of simple
functions. (K3)
5. Solve difference equations using Z-transforms. (K3)

CO - PO MAPPING:
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 2 1 1 - - - - - - 1

CO2 3 3 2 1 1 - - - - - - 1

CO3 3 3 2 1 1 - - - - - - 1

CO4 3 3 2 1 1 - - - - - - 1

CO5 3 3 2 1 1 - - - - - - 1

SEMESTER - III
20ECPL301 L T P C
DIGITAL CIRCUITS LABORATORY
SDG NO. 3,4,9 0 0 3 1.5

OBJECTIVES:
Ÿ Get practical experience in design, realisation and verification of
Demorgan's Theorem
Ÿ Design Full/Parallel Adders and Subtractors
67
 Syllabus ECE
Ÿ Design and learn Multiplexer using logic gates, Demultiplexer and
Decoder
Ÿ Verify the function of Flip-Flops
Ÿ Design Shift registers and Counters using Flip flops

LIST OF ANALOG EXPERIMENTS:

1. To realize Basic gates (AND, OR, NOT) From Universal Gates (NAND &
NOR).
2. To verify
(a) Demorgan's Theorem for 2 variables
(b) The sum-of product and product-of-sum expressions using universal
gates
3. To design and implement 4-bit Parallel Adder/ subtractor using IC 7483
4. To realize (a) 4:1 Multiplexer using gates
(b) 3-variable function using IC 74151(8:1 MUX)
5. To realize (a) 1:8 Demultiplexer and
(b) 3:8 Decoder using IC74138
6. To design 4 bit comparator circuit using logic gates
7. To realize the following flip-flops using NAND Gates:
(a) Clocked SR Flip-Flop
(b) JK Flip-Flop
8. To realize the following shift registers using Ic7474:
(a) SISO (b) SIPO
(c) PISO (d) PIPO
9. To realize the Ring Counter and Johnson Counter using Ic7476
10. To realize the Mod-N Counter using Ic7490
11. To design 4 bit synchronous Counter using JK Flip flops - Ic7476
12. To design 4 bit Ripple counter using JK Flip flops - Ic7476
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

LAB REQUIREMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS /

2 STUDENTS PER EXPERIMENT:
S.No. EQUIPMENTS
1. IC7404, IC7408, IC 7432, IC7486, IC 7400 & IC 7402
2. IC 7483- 4 bit Parallel Adder/ Subtractor
3. IC 7476- JK Flip flops
4. IC 7474- D Flip flops
5. Digital Trainer Kit- 15 Nos

68
 Syllabus ECE
VIRTUAL LAB:
1. http://vlabs.iitkgp.ernet.in/dec/
2. http://cse15-iiith.vlabs.ac.in/Introduction.html

OUTCOMES:
On completion of this laboratory course, the student should be able to
1. Justify NAND and NOR as Universal gates and verify SOP and POS
expressions using them.(K4)
2. Verify De Morgan's Theorem for 2 variables using logic gates.(K3)
3. Design, Build and test combinational circuits such asadders, subtractors,
comparators, multiplexers demultiplexers.and decoders (K4)
4. Construct flips-flops using NAND gates and verify their functionality. (K4)
5. Realize synchronous and asynchronous counters and its applications
using flip-flop IC’s (K4)
6. Construct the types of shift registers using flip-flop IC’s and verify their
functionality. (K4)

CO - PO, PSO MAPPING:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 3 2 3 - - - 1 2 - - - 3 3

CO2 3 3 2 3 - - - 1 2 - - - 3 3

CO3 3 3 2 2 - - - 1 2 - - - 3 3

CO4 3 3 2 3 - - - 1 2 - - - 3 3

CO5 3 3 2 3 - - - 1 2 - - - 3 3

CO6 3 3 2 3 - - - 1 2 - - - 3 3

SEMESTER - III
20ECTE301 L T P C
LIVE-IN-LAB - I
SDG NO. 4,11,15 0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVES:
l To provide opportunities for the students, expose to Industrial
environment and real time work
l To enable hands-on experience in the electronics hardware/Software
domain
l To enable development of skill set for designing and realizing prototype
electronic systems/simulation model
69
 Syllabus ECE
COURSE METHODOLOGY
l This initiative is designed to inculcate ethical principles of research and to
get involve in life-long learning process for the students.
l The project work must involve engineering design with realistic
constraints. It must also include appropriate elements of the following:
Engineering standards, design analysis, modeling, simulation,
experimentation, prototyping, fabrication, correlation of data, and
software development.
l Project can be individual work or a group project, with maximum of 3
students. In case of group project, the individual project report of each
student should specify the individual's contribution to the group project.
l On completion of the project, the student shall submit a detailed project
report. The project should be reviewed and the report shall be evaluated
and the students shall appear for a viva-voce oral examination on the
project approved by the Coordinator and the project guide.

EVALUATION
l First evaluation (Immediately after first internal examination ) : 20
marks
l Second evaluation (Immediately after second internal examination):
30marks
l Final evaluation Last week of the semester) : 50marks

Note: All the three evaluations are mandatory for course completion and for
awarding the final grade

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students should be able to
1 Perform literature survey to identify the gap and an application oriented
research problem in the specific domain (K2)
2 Design and validate the proposed system using simulation (K3)
3 Implement the proposed system (K3)
4 Examine the obtained results and prepare a technical report (K4)
5 Publish the work in journals and apply for the patents.(K3)
6 Prepare for industrial environment and real time work (K3)

70
 Syllabus ECE
CO- PO & PSO MAPPING:
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 3 3 3

CO2 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3

CO3 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 3 2 3 3 3 2

CO4 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 3 2 3 3 3 2

CO5 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 3 2 3 3 3 2

CO6 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3

SEMESTER - III
20ECTP301 L T P C
SKILL ENHANCEMENT
SDG NO. 4 0 0 2 1

APTITUDE & COGNITIVE SKILLS – PHASE 1

OBJECTIVE:
l To educate and enrich the students on quantitative ability, reasoning
ability, and verbal ability.
l Improve their quantitative ability.
l Improve the ability of arithmetic reasoning
l Enhance their verbal ability through vocabulary building and grammar
l Equip with creative thinking and problem solving skills

UNIT I QUANTITATIVE ABILITY – I 10

Problems on Trains - Time and Distance - Height and Distance - Time and
Work

UNIT II QUANTITATIVE ABILITY – II 10

Problems on Ages - Alligation or Mixture - Chain Rule - Simple Interest - Simple
Equation - Theory Of Equation.

UNIT III REASONING ABILITY – I 8

Analytical Reasoning - Pipes and Cistern - Logical Problems - Logical Games -
Logical Deduction - Data Suf iciency - Arithmetic Reasoning

71
 Syllabus ECE
UNIT IV VERBAL ABILITY – I 10
Idioms & Phrases - Synonyms - Antonyms - Classi ication

UNIT V CREATIVITY ABILITY – I 7

Venn Diagrams -Cube and Cuboids - Dice - Cubes and Dice - Figure Matrix.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Quantitative Aptitude for Competitive Exams by R. S. Agarwal
2. Quantum CAT by Sarvesh Verma
3. A Modern Approach to Logical Reasoning by R. S. Agarwal
4. Verbal Ability and Reading Comprehension by Arun sharma

PROBLEM SOLVING USING C PROGRAMMING AND EMBEDDED C

PROGRAMMING – PHASE 2

COURSE OBJECTIVE:
l To provide exposure to problem-solving through programming.
l To train the student to the basic concepts of the C-programming language.
l To provide exposure to problem-solving through programming.
l To train the student to the basic concepts of the C-programming and
MATLAB programming language.
l To give the student hands-on experience with the concepts

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PRINCIPLES OF PROGRAMMING 6

Introduction to Programming - Programing Domain : Arti icial Intelligence-
Systems Programming - Assembly Level Languages - Problem solving using
Algorithms and Flowcharts.

UNIT II INTRODUCTION TO C PROGRAMMING 6

Features of C and its Basic Structure - Simple C programs - Constants - Integer
Constants - Real Constants - Character Constants - String Constants Floating-
point Numbers - The type cast Operator - Interactive Programming.
Operators Expressions and Control statement - The goto statement - The if
statement - The if-else statement - Nesting of if statements - The conditional
expression - The break statement and continue statement.

UNIT III ARRAYS, STRINGS AND POINTERS 6

Arrays - Multidimensional Arrays - Strings, Basics of Pointers - Pointer
Arithmetic - Similarities between Pointers and One-dimensional Arrays
Structures - Unions And Functions - Basics of Structures - Arrays of Structures -
72
 Syllabus ECE
Pointers to Structures - Function Basics - Function Prototypes and Passing
Parameters - Structures and Functions Recursion.

UNIT IV BASICS OF EMBEDDED C 6

Introduction to Embedded C Programming Language - Difference between C
and Embedded C- Variables -Control Structure in Embedded C - Functions and
constants in Embedded C - Data Types - Arithmetic operations - program
structure - Operators - Bit masking - Bit Extracting- Bit monitoring.

UNIT V MICROCONTROLLER PROGRAMMING 6

Introduction of Microprocessor- Microcontroller - 8051 Architecture -
Programming 8051 microcontroller -Port Register- Basic Embedded C
Program - Keil IDE Software Installation - Proteus Simulation software
Installation -Steps to burn/embed a program in the microcontroller 8051
microcontroller programming using embedded C.
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Balagurusamy, “Programming in ANSI C”, Tata McGraw-Hill Education,
2008.
2. Stephen G. Kochan, “Programming in C” (3rd Edition), Sams, 2004 .
3. Stephen G. Kochan, “Programming in C”, III Edition, Pearson Education.
4. Pond, “Embedded C”, 1e Pearson Edition.
5. MAZIDI “The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems: Using
Assembly and C” Pearson.
6. Ashok K.Pathak, “Advanced Test in C and Embedded System Programming”
BPB publication.
7. AVR Microcontroller and Embedded Systems: Using Assembly and C,
1e,azidi/ Naimi / Naimi.
8. Muhammed Ali Mazidi The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems,
Pearson.

ONLINE RESOURCES
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108/102/108102045/
2. https://www.coursera.org/courses?query=embedded%20systems

WEB RESOURCES
1. https://www.tutorialspoint.com/embedded_systems/index.htm

73
 Syllabus ECE
COURSE OUTCOMES :
Upon completion of this course, the students should be able to:
1. Analyze their quantitative ability. (K4)
2. Understand the ability of arithmetic reasoning along with creative
thinking and problem solving skills. (K2)
3. Create their verbal ability through vocabulary building and grammar. (K6)
4. Evaluate the situations to analyse the computational methods in order to
identify and abstract the programming task involved. (K5)
5. Analyse tasks in which the numerical techniques are applicable in order to
apply them to write, edit, compile, debug, correct, recompile and run
programs. (K4)
6. Understanding a step by step process to burn/embed a program in the
controller. (K2)

CO- PO & PSO MAPPING:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 - - - - 3 2 - 3 2 3 - 2 - -

CO2 - - - - 3 2 - 3 2 3 - 2 - -

CO3 - - - - 3 2 - - 1 3 - 2 - -

CO4 - - - - 3 2 - 3 3 3 - 2 2 2

CO5 - - - - 3 2 - - 2 3 - 2 2 2

CO6 - - - - 3 2 - - 2 3 - 2 2 2

SEMESTER - III
20MGMC301 L T P C
CONSTITUTION OF INDIA
SDG NO. 4 2 0 0 0

OBJECTIVES:
At the end of the course, the student is expected to
l To know about Indian constitution
l To know about central government functionalities in India
l To know about state government functionalities in India
l To know about Constitution function
l To Know about Constitutional remedies

74
 Syllabus ECE
UNIT I INTRODUCTION 6
Historical Background – Constituent Assembly of India – Philosophical
foundations of the Indian Constitution – Preamble – Fundamental Rights –
Directive Principles of State Policy – Fundamental Duties

UNIT II STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION OF CENTRAL GOVERNMENT 6

Union Government – Structures of the Union Government and Functions –
President – Vice President – Prime Minister – Cabinet – Parliament – Supreme
Court of India.

UNIT III STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION OF STATE GOVERNMENT 6

State Government – Structure and Functions – Governor – Chief Minister –
Cabinet – State Legislature – Judicial System in States – High Courts and other
Subordinate Courts.

UNIT IV CONSTITUTION FUNCTIONS 6

Indian Federal System – Centre – State Relations – President's Rule –
Constitutional Amendments – Constitutional Functionaries.

UNIT V CONSTITUTIONAL REMEDIES 6

Enforcement of fundamental rights - Power of parliament to modify the rights
the conferred by this part in their application to forces.
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Durga Das Basu, “Introduction to the Constitution of India “, Prentice Hall of
India, New Delhi.
2. R.C. Agarwal, (1997) “Indian Political System”, S. Chand and Company, New
Delhi.
3. M.V. Pyle (2019) , “An Introduction to The Constitution of India, 5/e”, Vikas
Publishing, New Delhi.
4 P.M. Bakshi, (2018) , “Constitution of India”, Universal Law Publishing,
New Delhi.

REFERENCES:
1. Sharma, Brij Kishore, “Introduction to the Constitution of India”, Prentice
Hall of India, New Delhi.
2. U.R.Gahai, “Indian Political System”, New Academic Publishing House,
Jalandhar.

75
 Syllabus ECE
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1. Explain the Constitution and Fundamental rights of citizens (K2)
2. Discuss the structure, hierarchy and functions of Central Government
(K2)
3. Explain the functions of Supreme Court and Judiciary Systems in the state
(K2)
4. Discuss the structure, hierarchy and functions of State Government (K2)
5. Recall the Centre-State relationship, constitutional amendments and
functionaries (K1)
6. Discuss the remedies and rights available to India Citizens (K2)

CO – PO MAPPING:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 - - - - - 1 1 - - - - -

CO2 - - - - - 1 1 - - - - -

CO3 - - - - - 1 1 - - - - -

CO4 - - - - - 1 1 - - - - -

CO5 - - - - - 2 1 3 - - - -

CO6 - - - - - 2 1 2 3 - - -

76
 Syllabus ECE

SEMESTER - IV
20ECPC401 L T P C
COMMUNICATION THEORY
SDG NO. 4 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l To introduce the concepts of various amplitude modulations and their
spectral characteristics
l To study the concepts of various angle modulation and their spectral
characteristics
l To understand the properties of random process
l To know the effect of noise on communication systems
l To study the fundamentals of sampling, quantization and pulse modulation
techniques

UNIT I AMPLITUDE MODULATION 9

Elements of Communication systems – Communication Channels – Need for
Modulation - Amplitude Modulation- DSBSC, DSBFC, SSB, ISB, VSB -
Modulation index, Spectra, Power relations and Bandwidth of AM – AM
Generation – Square law and Switching modulator, DSBSC Generation –
Balanced and Ring Modulator, SSB Generation – Filter, Phase Shift and Third
Methods, VSB Generation – Filter Method, Hilbert Transform, Pre-envelope &
complex envelope – comparison of different AM techniques, AM
Demodulators: Envelope Detector, Coherent Detection of DSB – SC, SSB – SC –
Costas Receiver – Frequency Translation - Superheterodyne Receiver.

UNIT II ANGLE MODULATION 9

Phase and frequency modulation, Narrow Band and Wide band FM –
Modulation index, Spectra, Power relations and Transmission Bandwidth of
FM – PM to FM Conversion – and FM to PM Conversion – FM Generation: Direct
and Indirect methods, FM Demodulation – FM to AM conversion, FM
Discriminator – Balanced Slope Detector, Foster Seeley Discriminator, Ratio
Detector, PLL Demodulator, Quadrature FM Demodulator – FM Receivers.

UNIT III RANDOM PROCESS 9

Random variables, Random Process, Stationary Processes, Mean, Correlation
& Covariance functions, Power Spectral Density, Ergodic Processes, Gaussian
Process, Transmission of a Random Process Through a LTI filter.

77
 Syllabus ECE
UNIT IV NOISE CHARACTERIZATION 9
Noise sources – Noise figure, noise temperature and noise bandwidth – Noise
in cascaded systems. Representation of Narrow band noise –In-phase and
quadrature components, Envelope and Phase Components – Noise
performance analysis in AM & FM systems – Threshold effect, Pre-emphasis
and deemphasis for FM.

UNIT V SAMPLING & QUANTIZATION 9

Low pass sampling – Aliasing- Signal Reconstruction-Quantization - Uniform
& non-uniform quantization - quantization noise - Logarithmic Companding
–PAM, PPM, PWM, PCM – TDM, FDM.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:
1. J.G.Proakis, M.Salehi, “Fundamentals of Communication Systems”, Pearson
Education, 2014.
2. Simon Haykin, “Communication Systems”, Fourth Edition, Wiley, 2014

REFERENCES:
1. B.P.Lathi, “Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems”, Third
Edition, Oxford University Press, 2007.
2. D.Roody, J.Coolen, “Electronic Communications”, Fourth Edition, PHI,
2006.
3. A.Papoulis, “Probability, Random variables and Stochastic Processes”,
McGraw Hill, Third Edition, 1991.
4. B.Sklar, “Digital Communications Fundamentals and Applications”, Second
Edition, Pearson Education, 2007.
5. H P Hsu, “Schaum Outline Series – Analog and Digital Communications”,
TMH, 2006.
6. Couch.L., "Modern Communication Systems", Pearson, 2001.

WEB REFERENCES :
1. https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc20_ee16/preview
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117102059/

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://freevideolectures.com/course/2590/introduction-to-
communication-theory

78
 ECE Syllabus
OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to
1 Discuss the elements of the communication system, various amplitude
modulation schemes and its generation methods. (K2)
2 Characterize frequency, phase modulation schemes and explain its
generation methods. (K2)
3 Explain AM and FM demodulators and distinguish various analog
modulation techniques.(K2)
4 Describe the various types of noise in communication systems and
illustrate the properties of random processes to generate a mathematical
model.(K2)
5 Explain the representation of narrowband noise, AM and FM receivers
and its noise performance. (K2)
6 Elucidate the fundamentals of sampling, Quantization and various Pulse
modulation techniques. (K2)

CO - PO, PSO MAPPING

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 3 1 - 1 - - 3 - - - - - 1

CO2 3 3 3 - 3 - - 3 - - - - - 1

CO3 3 3 3 - 3 - - 3 - - 1 1 - 1

CO4 3 - 1 - 1 - - 1 - - - - - 1

CO5 3 3 3 - 1 - - 3 - - 1 1 - 1

CO6 3 3 3 - 3 - - 3 - - 3 3 - 1

SEMESTER - IV
20ECPW401 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS L T P C
SDG NO. 4 WITH LABORATORY 3 0 2 4
OBJECTIVES:
l To understand the methods of biasing BJT and FET
l To design and analyze single stage and multistage amplifier circuits
l To impart knowledge about feedback amplifiers and oscillators
l To inculcate knowledge about tuned amplifier
l Explore the characteristics of Power amplifier

79
 Syllabus ECE
UNIT I BIASING 9
Need for biasing - DC load line analysis of biasing circuits - Operating point-
Design of biasing circuits: Fixed bias configuration, Emitter bias configuration,
Voltage divider bias configuration- Bias stabilization - Stability factors.

UNIT II SINGLE AND MULTI STAGE AMPLIFIERS 9

AC load line - BJT small signal model- Analysis of CE, CB, CC amplifier-Gain and
frequency response-FET small signal model-Analysis of CS and Source
follower-Gain and frequency response-High frequency analysis-Need of
multistage amplifier-Cascade, Cascode and Differential amplifier.

UNIT III FEEDBACK AMPLIFIERS AND OSCILLATORS 9

Basic principles and types of feedback-Gain of an amplifier employing
feedback-Effect of feedback (negative) on gain, stability, distortion and
bandwidth of an amplifier. Voltage series, voltage shunt, Current series and
current shunt Feedback configurations. Use of positive feedback-Barkhausen
criterion for oscillations-Different oscillator circuits-tuned collector-Hartley,
Colpitts, Phase shift, Wien Bridge and Crystal oscillator.

UNIT IV TUNED AMPLIFIERS AND MULTIVIBRATORS 9

Small signal tuned amplifiers – Analysis of capacitor coupled single tuned
amplifier – double tuned amplifier - effect of cascading single tuned and
double tuned amplifiers on bandwidth – Stagger tuned amplifiers - Stability of
tuned amplifiers – Neutralization - Hazeltine neutralization method.
Analysis and Design of Bistable, Monostable, Astable, Multivibrators and
Schmitt Trigger using Transistors.

UNIT V LARGE SIGNAL AMPLIFIERS 9

Difference between voltage and Power amplifier- Importance of impedance
matching in amplifiers- Class A, Class B, Class AB and Class C amplifiers-Single
ended power amplifiers-Push pull amplifier and Complementary symmetry
push-pull amplifier.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS : 15
1. Frequency Response of CE, CB, CC and CS amplifiers.
2. Cascode and Cascade amplifiers.
3. Analysis of frequency response FET, MOSFET with fixed bias, self-bias and
voltage divider bias using simulation software using spice.
4. Analysis of Cascode and Cascade amplifiers using Spice.

80
 ECE
Syllabus
5. Analysis of Frequency Response of BJT and FET using Spice.
6. Series and Shunt feedback amplifiers-Frequency response, Input and
output impedance.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS
1. Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky ,"Electron Devices and Circuits:
Theory and Practice", Prentice Hall of India, 10thEdition, 2009.
2. David A. Bell, "Electronic Devices and Circuits", Prentice Hall of India, 5th
Edition, 2008.
3. Adel S.Sedra and Kenneth Smith ,”Microelectronic Circuits”, Oxford
University Press, Sixth edition,2009.

REFERENCES:
1. Millman and Halkias.C, "Integrated Electronics", Tata McGraw Hill, 2nd
Edition, 2010.
2. Millman. J and Taub H, "Pulse Digital and Switching Waveforms'', Tata
McGraw Hill, 3rdEdition, 2011.
3. S.Salivahanan, N.Suresh Kumar, A.Vallavaraj, Electronic Devices and
Circuits, Tata McGraw Hill ltd., 2nd Edition, 2009.
4. Thomas.L.Floyd, "Electronic Devices: Conventional Current version",
Pearson, 9th Edition, 2015.
5. B. Visvesvara Rao, K.Raja Rajeswari, P.Chalam Raju Pantulu and
K.Bhaskara Rama, "Electronic Circuit Analysis", Pearson,1st Edition, 2012.

WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108107142/
2. https://www.digimat.in/nptel/courses/video/108102095/L41.html
3. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108102095/

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://www.coursera.org/learn/transistor-field-effect-transistor-
bipolar-junction-transistor
2. https://www.tutorialspoint.com/amplifiers/tuned_amplifiers.htm
3. https://www.udemy.com/course/introduction-to-semiconductor-
diodes-and-transistors/
4. https://www.electronics-tutorials.ws/amplifier/amp_1.html

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1. Explain the biasing characteristics, different biasing techniques of BJT and
FET. (K2)

81
 ECE
Syllabus
2 Apply the small signal model to construct a multi stage amplifier using BJT
and FET and demonstrate the Output response. (K3)
3 Design and analyze feedback amplifiers and Oscillators. (K2)
4 Illustrate the performance of tuned amplifiers and examine the output
response. (K2)
5 Illustrate the principle of different Multivibrators and sketch the output
characteristics. (K2)
6 Classify the different power amplifiers and explain the techniques to
enhance the efficiency. (K2)

CO - PO, PSO MAPPING:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 1 - - - - - - - - - - 1 -

CO2 3 2 - 2 - - - - - - - - 2 1

CO3 3 2 - 2 - - - - - - - - 2 1

CO4 3 - - 2 2 - - - - - - - 2 1

CO5 3 2 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 2 1

CO6 3 2 2 2 2 - - - - - - 1 2 1

SEMESTER - IV
20ECPW402 LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS L T P C
SDG NO. 4 WITH LABORATORY 3 0 2 4

OBJECTIVES:
l To learn the basic building blocks and characteristics of Operational
Amplifiers
l To learn and design applications using Operational Amplifiers
l To introduce the theory and applications of analog multipliers, PLL and
Timer ICs
l To learn the theory of ADC and DAC
l To Design waveform generators using operational amplifiers, voltage
regulators and filters

82
 Syllabus ECE
UNIT I BASICS OF OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS 9
Basic information about op-amps – Ideal Operational Amplifier - General
operational amplifier stages -and internal circuit diagrams of IC 741, DC and
AC performance characteristics, slew rate, Open and closed loop
configurations. Operational Amplifiers – LF155 and TL082.

UNIT II APPLICATIONS OF OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS 9

Sign Changer, Scale Changer, Phase Shift Circuits, Voltage Follower, V-to-I and
I-to-V converters, adder, subtractor, Instrumentation amplifier, Integrator,
Differentiator, Logarithmic amplifier, Antilogarithmic amplifier, Comparators,
Schmitt trigger, Precision rectifier, peak detector, clipper and clamper.

UNIT III ANALOG MULTIPLIER, PLL AND TIMER ICS 9

Analog multiplier ICs and their applications, Operation of the basic PLL, Closed
loop analysis, Voltage controlled oscillator, Monolithic PLL IC 565, application
of PLL for AM detection, FM detection, FSK modulation and demodulation and
Frequency synthesizing and clock synchronisation. Timer IC 555 and
Multivibrators using 555 IC.

UNIT IV ANALOG TO DIGITAL AND DIGITAL TO ANALOG CONVERTERS 9

Analog and Digital Data Conversions, D/A converter – specifications -
weighted resistor type, R-2R Ladder type, Voltage Mode and Current-Mode R -
2R Ladder types - switches for D/A converters, high speed sample-and-hold
circuits, A/D Converters – specifications - Flash type - Successive
Approximation type - Single Slope type – Dual Slope type - A/D Converter
using Voltage-to-Time Conversion.

UNIT V FILTERS WAVEFORM GENERATORS AND

VOLTAGE REGULATORS 9
Sine-wave generators, Multivibrators, Triangular wave generator and Saw-
tooth wave generator, ICL8038 function generator, IC Voltage regulators:
Three terminal fixed and adjustable voltage regulators - IC 723 general
purpose regulator - Monolithic switching regulator, Low Drop – Out(LDO)
Regulators - Low-pass, high-pass and band-pass Butterworth filters, Switched
capacitor filter IC MF10.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS 15
Design and test the following circuits
1. Instrumentation amplifier and Schmitt Trigger using op-amp.
2. Active low-pass, High-pass and band-pass filters.
3. Phase shift and Wien bridge oscillators using Op-amp.

83
 Syllabus ECE
4. Astable and Monostable multivibrators using NE555 Timer.
5. DC power supply using LM317 and Lm723.
6. Simulate using PSPICE Full wave precision rectifier using Op-amp, Astable
and Monostable using 741 Timer and A/D converter.
7. Design and simulate using PSPICE Voltage Controlled Oscillator, Analog
Multiplier, and PLL as frequency multiplier.

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. D.RoyChoudhry, Shail Jain, “Linear Integrated Circuits”, New Age
International Pvt. Ltd., 2018, Fifth Edition. (Unit I – V).
2. Sergio Franco, “Design with Operational Amplifiers and Analog
Integrated Circuits”, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2016 (Unit I –V).

REFERENCES:
1. Ramakant A.Gayakwad, “OPAMP and Linear ICs”, 4thEdition, Prentice
Hall / Pearson Education, 2015.
2. S.Salivahanan, V.S.KanchanaBhaskaran, “”Linear Integrated Circuits”,
TMH, 2nd Edition, 4th Reprint, 2016.
3. Robert F.Coughlin, Frederick F.Driscoll, “Operational Amplifiers and
Linear Integrated Circuits”, 6th Edition, PHI, 2001.
4. B.S.Sonde, “System Design using Integrated Circuits”, 2ndEdition, New
Age Pub, 2001.
5. Gray and Meyer, “Analysis and Design of Analog Integrated Circuits”,
Wiley International, 5th Edition, 2009.
6. William D.Stanley, “Operational Amplifiers with Linear Integrated
Circuits”, Pearson Education,4th Edition, 2001.

WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc20_ee13/preview
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108108111/
3. http://web.iitd.ac.in/~shouri/eel782/lectures.php

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://freevideolectures.com/course/2915/linear-integrated-
circuits
2. https://e-box.co.in/linear-integrated-circuits.shtml

84
 ECE Syllabus
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1. Explain the configurations and performance characteristics of IC741, IC
LF155 and TL082. (K2)
2. Describe the linear and nonlinear applications using Op-Amps. (K2)
3. Explain the operation and applications of Analog multiplier IC AD633JN,
IC 565 PLL and 555 Timer ICs. (K2)
4. Describe the direct and indirect types of D/A and A/D data convertors
using operational amplifiers. (K2)
5. Design Butterworth filters, Sine, Square, Triangular and sawtooth
waveform generators and IC723 voltage regulators and explain the
principle of operation of ICL803, IC MF10. (K3)
6. Design and demonstrate the performance of linear and non-linear
applications of operational amplifiers using IC 741, IC555 and simulate
the same in PSPICE.(K3)

CO - PO, PSO MAPPING

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 1 2 2 - 2 - - - - 2 2 3 2

CO2 3 1 3 2 - 2 - - - - 2 2 3 2

CO3 3 1 3 2 - 2 - - - - 2 2 3 2

CO4 3 1 3 2 - 2 - - - - 2 2 3 2

CO5 3 1 3 2 3 2 - - 2 3 2 2 3 2

CO6 3 1 3 2 3 2 - - 2 3 2 2 3 2

SEMESTER - IV
20ECPC402 MICROCONTROLLERS AND L T P C
SDG NO. 4, 11 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l To understand the Architecture of 8086 microprocessor.
l To learn the design aspects of I/O and Memory Interfacing circuits.
l To interface microprocessors with supporting chips.
l To study the Architecture of 8051microcontroller and ARM processor.
l To design a microcontroller based system.
85
 Syllabus ECE
UNIT I MICROPROCESSOR 9
Introduction to 8086 – Microprocessor architecture – Addressing modes -
Instruction set and assembler directives – Assembly language programming –
Modular Programming - Linking and Relocation - Stacks - Procedures – Macros
– Interrupts and interrupt service routines – Byte and String Manipulation.

UNIT II MICROCONTROLLER 9
Architecture of 8051 – Special Function Registers(SFRs) - I/O Pins Ports and
Circuits - Instruction set - Addressing modes - Assembly language
programming.

UNIT III I/O INTERFACING 9

Memory Interfacing and I/O interfacing - Parallel communication interface –
Serial communication interface – D/A and A/D Interface - Timer – Keyboard
/display controller – Interrupt controller – DMA controller – Programming
and applications Case studies: Traffic Light control, LED display , LCD display,
Keyboard display interface and Alarm Controller.

UNIT IV INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN

AND REAL TIME SYSTEMS 9
Embedded system design process –Design example: Model train controller-
Design methodologies- Design flows - Requirement Analysis – Specifications-
System analysis and architecture design – Structure of a Real Time System –-
Estimating program run times – Task assignment and scheduling.

UNIT V ARM PROCESSOR AND PERIPHERALS 9

ARM Architecture Versions – ARM Architecture – Instruction Set – Stacks and
Subroutines – Features of the LPC 214X Family – Peripherals – The Timer Unit
– Pulse Width Modulation Unit – UART – Block Diagram of ARM9 and ARM
Cortex M3MCU.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Yu-Cheng Liu, Glenn A.Gibson, “Microcomputer Systems: The 8086 /
8088 Family - Architecture, Programming and Design”, 2nd Edition,
Prentice Hall of India, 2007. (UNIT I & III).
2. Mohamed Ali Mazidi, Janice GillispieMazidi, RolinMcKinlay, “The 8051
Microcontroller and Embedded Systems: Using Assembly and C”, 2nd
Edition, Pearson education, 2011. (UNIT II).
3. Marilyn Wolf, “Computers as Components - Principles of Embedded
Computing System Design”, 3rd Edition, Morgan Kaufmann Publisher (An
imprint from Elsevier), 2012. (UNIT IV, V).

86
 ECE
Syllabus
4. Jane W.S.Liu, “Real Time Systems”, Pearson Education, Third Indian
Reprint, 2003.(UNIT IV).

REFERENCES:
1. DoughlasV.Hall, “Microprocessors and Interfacing, Programming
andHardware”,TMH, 2012.
2. A.K.Ray,K.M.Bhurchandi, "Advanced Microprocessors and Peripherals",
3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2012.
3. Lyla B.Das, “Embedded Systems: An Integrated Approach”, Pearson
Education, 2013.
4. C.M.Krishna, Kang G.Shin, “Real-Time Systems”, International Editions,
McGraw Hill, 2017.

WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc20_ee42/preview
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105102/

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://freevideolectures.com/course/3018/microprocessors-and-
microcontrollers
2. http://www.satishkashyap.com/2012/02/video-lectures-on-
microprocessors-and.html

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1. Explain the architecture of 8086,instruction set, concepts of modular
programming,interrupt service routine and write basic Assembly
Language Programs in 8086. (K2)
2. Explain the internal organization of 8051,Port structures instruction set
and write Assembly Language Programs in 8051.(K2)
3. Describe the architecture of peripheral ICs(8255, 8253, 8251, 8259,
8257, 8279 ,8080, DAC and ADC0080). (K2)
4. Apply the interfacing concepts to develop programs for interfacing LED
LCD, ADC/DAC, keyboard,traffic light controller and alarm controller with
8086 and 8051. (K3)
5. Describe the design process and scheduling concepts of real time
embedded systems.(K2)
6. Illustrate the features, peripheral units and instruction set of ARM9,
LPC214X, ARM Cortex M3MCU processors.(K2)

87
 Syllabus ECE
CO - PO, PSO MAPPING :
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 1 3 2 1 3 3 2 - - - 2 2 3

CO2 3 1 3 1 2 3 2 1 - - - 2 2 3

CO3 2 1 3 2 1 2 3 2 - - - 2 2 2

CO4 2 1 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 - - 2 2 3

CO5 3 1 3 1 2 3 3 2 - - - 3 2 3

CO6 3 1 2 2 1 3 3 2 - - - 2 2 2

SEMESTER - IV
20BSMA401 PROBABILITY THEORY AND L T P C
SDG NO. 4 STOCHASTIC PROCESSES 3 1 0 4

OBJECTIVES:
l To provide the mathematical background of random variables, standard
distributions and random processes for application to signal processing
and Communication theory

UNIT I RANDOM VARIABLES AND STANDARD DISTRIBUTIONS 12

Discrete and continuous random variables – Moments – Moment generating
functions – Binomial, Poisson, Geometric, Uniform, Exponential and Normal
Distributions - Functions of Random variables.

UNIT II TWO - DIMENSIONAL RANDOM VARIABLES 12

Joint distributions – Marginal and conditional distributions – Covariance –
Correlation and Linear regression – Transformation of random variables –
Central limit theorem (for independent and identically distributed random
variables).

UNIT III INTRODUCTION TO STOCHASTIC PROCESS 12

Classification – Auto correlation functions – Cross correlation functions -
Stationary process –Ergodic process-Power Spectral Density.

UNIT IV MODELS OF RANDOM PROCESSES 12

The Bernoulli process - The Gaussian process - Poisson process - Markov
process - Markov chain.
88
 Syllabus ECE
UNIT V LINEAR SYSTEMS WITH RANDOM INPUTS 12
Linear time invariant system – System transfer function – Linear systems with
random inputs – Auto correlation and Cross correlation functions of input and
output.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

TEXTBOOKS:
1. Ibe O.C., “Fundamentals of Applied Probability and Random Processes",
Elsevier, 1st Indian Reprint, 2007. Unit-I Chapter-2, Chapter-3 (Sections
3.1-3.5), Chapter-4 (Sections 4.1-4.8,4.10 & 4.11), Chapter 6 (Section 6.2)
Unit-II Chapter 5 (Sections 5.1-5.7), Chapter 6 (6.8 & 6.10) Unit-III
Chapter-8 (8.1-8.6), Chapter -10 (10.5, 10.5.4) Unit-IV Chapter 10 (Section
10.2,10.4, 10.5.5, 10.5.6, 10.6, 10.7) Unit-V Chapter 9 (Sections 9.1-9.3)

REFERENCES:
1. Peebles P.Z., "Probability, Random Variables and Random Signal
Principles", Tata Mc Graw Hill, 4th Edition, New Delhi, 2002.
2. VeerarajanT.,"Probability and Statistics, Random Processes and Queueing
theory", TataMc-Graw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
3. Athanasios Papoulis and S. Unnikrishna Pillai, “Probability, Random
Variables and Stochastic Processes”PHI, 4th Edition, 2002.
3. Davenport, Probability and Random Processes for Scientist and
Engineers, McGraw-Hill.
4. H. Stark &J.W. Woods: Probability, Random Processes and Estimations
Theory for Engineers, (2/e), Prentice Hall.
5. E.Wong: Introduction to Random Processes, Springer Verlag.
6. W.A.Gardner: Introduction to Random Processes, (2/e), McGraw Hill

WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc19_ma30/preview
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/111102111/
3. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/111/104/111104032/
4. http://www.ifp.illinois.edu/~hajek/Papers/probabilityJan13.pdf
5. https://www.ee.iitb.ac.in/~bsraj/courses/ee325/

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://freevideolectures.com/course/2324/probability-and-random-
processes.
2. http://www.nptelvideos.com/course.php?id=572.

89
 Syllabus ECE

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1. Apply the concepts of probability in one-dimensional discrete, continuous
functions of random variables and standard distributions and also
calculate the statistical constants. (K3)
2. Compute probabilities and statistical parameters of two-dimensional
random variables, use transformation of random variables to find
probability density functions and compute probabilities using Central
Limit theorem. (K3)
3. Calculate the autocorrelation, cross correlation and power spectral
densities with classification of random processes including ergodic
process. (K3)
4. Apply the properties of Markov, Poisson, Gaussian and Bernoulli processes
in real-time scenario based problems. (K3)
5. Determine the spectral properties of output when the input function is
given to a linear system. (K3)

CO - PO MAPPING:
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - - 1

CO2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - - 1

CO3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - - 1

CO4 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - - 1

CO5 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - - 1

SEMESTER - IV
20BSCY201 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE L T P C
SDG NO. 4,17 AND ENGINEERING 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l To study the nature and facts about environment
l To find and implement scientific, technological, economic and political
solutions to environmental problems

90
 Syllabus ECE
l To study the interrelationship between living organism and
environment
l To provide the importance of environment by assessing its impact on the
human world; envision the surrounding environment, its functions and
its value
l To study the integrated themes and biodiversity, natural resources,
pollution control and waste management.

UNIT I ENVIRONMENT, ECOSYSTEMS AND BIODIVERSITY 9

Definition, scope and importance of environment – need for public awareness
– Ecosystem: concept of an ecosystem – structure and functions of an
ecosystem – Biotic and abiotic components – Biogeochemical cycle (C, N & P) –
energy flow in the ecosystem – food chains, food webs and ecological pyramids
– ecological succession - keystone species. Introduction to biodiversity
definition: genetic, species and ecosystem diversity – values of biodiversity –
IUCN Red list species classification - endemic, endangered, rare, vulnerable,
extinct and exotic species – Biodiversity at global, national and local levels –
India as a mega-diversity nation – hot-spots of biodiversity – threats to
biodiversity – man-wildlife conflicts. Conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and
ex-situ conservation of biodiversity. Field study of Terrestrial (Forest,
Grassland, Desert) and Aquatic ecosystem (Pond, Lake, River, Estuary and
Marine)

UNIT II ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION 9

Definition – causes, effects and control measures of: Air pollution, Water
pollution, Soil pollution Marine pollution, Noise pollution, Thermal pollution
and Nuclear pollution – solid waste management: causes, effects and control
measures of municipal solid wastes (MSW) – role of an individual in
prevention of pollution – Case studies related to environmental pollution.
Disaster management: floods, earthquake, cyclone and landslides – nuclear
holocaust – Case studies.

UNIT III NATURAL RESOURCES 9

Forest resources: Use and over – exploitation, deforestation – Land resources:
land degradation, man induced landslides, soil erosion and desertification –
Water resources: Use and over- utilization of surface and groundwater – dams-
benefits and problems, conflicts over water – Mineral resources:
Environmental effects of extracting and using mineral resources – Food
resources: World food problems, changes caused by agriculture and
overgrazing, effects of modern agriculture – fertilizer – pesticide problems,
water logging and salinity. Energy resources: Renewable energy (Solar energy,
Wind energy, Tidal energy, Geothermal energy, OTE, Biomass energy) and non
renewable energy (Coal, Petroleum, Nuclear energy) sources. – role of an
91
 Syllabus ECE
individual in conservation of natural resources. Case studies – timber
extraction, mining, dams and their effects on forests and tribal people.

UNIT IV SOCIAL ISSUES AND THE ENVIRONMENT 10

Atmospheric Chemistry - Composition and structure of atmosphere. Climate
change - greenhouse effect- role of greenhouse gases on global warming.
Chemical and photochemical reactions in the atmosphere - Formation of
smog, PAN, acid rain (causes, effect and control measures). Oxygen and ozone
chemistry - Ozone layer depletion (causes, effect and control measures).
environmental ethics: Issues and possible solutions – Green chemistry - 12
principles of green chemistry.
Urbanisation - Urban problems related to energy - Water conservation: rain
water harvesting, watershed management – resettlement and rehabilitation
of people; its problems and concerns - case studies. Environment Legislations
and Laws : Environment (protection) act – 1986. Air (Prevention and Control
of Pollution) act – Water (Prevention and control of Pollution) act – Wildlife
protection act – Forest conservation act. Biomedical Waste(Management and
Handling rules):1998 and amendments- scheme of labelling of
environmentally friendly products (Ecomark) - Issues involved in
enforcement of environmental legislation - central and state pollution control
boards, role of non-governmental organization – Public awareness -
Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA).

UNIT V HUMAN POPULATION AND THE ENVIRONMENT 8

Population growth, variation among nations – population explosion – family
welfare programme – women and child welfare environment and human
health – HIV / AIDS – Role of Information Technology in environment and
Human health – Case studies – human rights – value education – Sustainable
Development – Need for sustainable development – concept – 17 SDG goals – 8
Millennium Development Goals(MDG).
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Benny Joseph, 'Environmental Science and Engineering', Tata McGraw-
Hill, New Delhi, 2006.
2. Gilbert M.Masters, 'Introduction to Environmental Engineering and
Science', 2nd edition, Pearson Education, 2004.
3. Ravikrishnan A, 'Environmental Science and Engineering', Sri Krishna
Hitech Publishing Company Pvt. Ltd, Revised Edition 2020.

REFERENCES :
1. Dharmendra S. Sengar, “Environmental law”, Prentice hall of India Pvt Ltd,
New Delhi, 2007.
92
 ECE
Syllabus
2. Erach Bharucha, “Textbook of Environmental Studies”, Universities
Press(I) Pvt Ltd., Hydrabad, 2015.
3. G. Tyler Miller and Scott E. Spoolman, “Environmental Science”, Cengage
Learning India Pvt. Ltd., Delhi, 2014.
4. Rajagopalan. R, “Environmental Studies-From Crisis to Cure”, Oxford
University Press, 2005.

OUTCOMES:
Upon successful completion of this course, student should be able to
1. Explain the different components of environment, structure and function
of an ecosystem, importance of biodiversity and its conservation. (K1)
2. Aware about problems of environmental pollution, its impact on human
and ecosystem, control measures and basic concepts in Disaster
Management. (K2)
3. Disseminate the need for the natural resources and its application to meet
the modern requirements and the necessity of its conservation. (K2)
4. Illustrate the various aspects of atmospheric chemistry with a focus on
climate change and recognize the principles of green chemistry. Describe
suitable scientific, technological solutions and Protection Acts to eradicate
social and environmental issues. (K2)
5. Recognize the need for population control measures and the
environmental based value education concepts to achieve the Sustainable
Development Goals. (K2)

CO - PO MAPPING :

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 1 1 - - - 1 2 - 1 1 - 2

CO2 2 2 2 - 2 2 3 1 2 2 - 2

CO3 1 1 1 1 - 1 1 - 1 2 - 1

CO4 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 - 1 1 1 1

CO5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

93
 Syllabus ECE
SEMESTER - IV
20ECPL401 MICROCONTROLLERS AND L T P C
SDG NO. 4, 11 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS LABORATORY 0 0 3 1.5

OBJECTIVES:
l To Introduce ALP concepts, features and Coding methods
l Write ALP for arithmetic and logical operations in 8086 and 8051
l Interface different I/Os with Microprocessors
l Be familiar with MASM
l Write programs for ARM

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
8086 Programs using kits and MASM
1. Basic arithmetic and Logical operations.
2. Move a data block without overlap.
3. Code conversion, decimal arithmetic and Matrix operations.
4. Floating point operations, string manipulations, sorting and searching.

8051 Experiments using kits and MASM

1. Basic arithmetic and Logical operations.
2. Square and Cube program, Find 2's complement of a number.
3. Unpacked BCD to ASCII.

Peripherals and Interfacing Experiments

1. Traffic light controller.
2. Stepper motor control.
3. Digital clock.

ARM programs
1. Interfacing ADC and DAC.
2. Interfacing LED and PWM.
3. Interfacing LCD.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES
At the end of the course, the student should be able to
1. Write ALP for fixed and Floating Point and Arithmetic operations.(K3)
2. Execute Programs in 8051 (K5)

94
 Syllabus ECE
3. Interface various peripherals in 8086/8051.(K3)
4. Execute Programs in ARM.(K5)
5. Interface memory, A/D and D/A convertors with ARM system(K3)
6. Formulate a mini project.(K6)

CO - PO, PSO MAPPING:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 1 2 3 2 2 - - - 2 2 1 2 2

CO2 3 1 2 3 1 2 - - - 2 2 3 2 2

CO3 3 2 2 2 1 2 - - - 2 2 2 3 2

CO4 3 2 2 3 3 2 - - - 2 2 1 3 2

CO5 2 2 2 2 5 2 - - - 3 1 2 3 3

CO6 2 2 2 3 1 2 - - - 2 3 2 3 3

SEMESTER - IV
20ECTE401 L T P C
LIVE-IN-LAB - II
SDG NO. 4,11,15 0 0 2 1
OBJECTIVES:
l To provide opportunities for the students, expose to Industrial
environment and real time work
l To enable hands-on experience in the electronics hardware/Software
domain
l To enable development of skill set for designing and realizing prototype
electronic systems/simulation model

COURSE METHODOLOGY
l This initiative is designed to inculcate ethical principles of research and to
get involve in life-long learning process for the students.
l The project work must involve engineering design with realistic
constraints. It must also include appropriate elements of the following:
Engineering standards, design analysis, modeling, simulation,
experimentation, prototyping, fabrication, correlation of data, and
software development.
l Project can be individual work or a group project, with maximum of 3
students. In case of group project, the individual project report of each
student should specify the individual's contribution to the group project.
95
 ECESyllabus
l On completion of the project, the student shall submit a detailed project
report. The project should be reviewed and the report shall be evaluated
and the students shall appear for a viva-voce oral examination on the
project approved by the Coordinator and the project guide.

EVALUATION
l First evaluation (Immediately after first internal examination ) : 20 marks
l Second evaluation (Immediately after second internal examination):
30marks
l Final evaluation Last week of the semester) : 50marks

Note: All the three evaluations are mandatory for course completion and for
awarding the final grade.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to
1 Perform literature survey to identify the gap and an application oriented
research problem in the specific domain (K2)
2 Design and validate the proposed system using simulation (K3)
3 Implement the proposed system (K3)
4 Examine the obtained results and prepare a technical report (K4)
5 Publish the work in journals and apply for the patents.(K3)
6 Prepare for industrial environment and real time work (K3)

CO- PO & PSO MAPPING:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 3 3 3

CO2 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3

CO3 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 3 2 3 3 3 2

CO4 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 3 2 3 3 3 2

CO5 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 3 2 3 3 3 2

CO6 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3

96
 Syllabus ECE
SEMESTER - IV
20ECTP401 L T P C
SKILL ENHANCEMENT
SDG NO. 4 0 0 2 1

PROBLEM SOLVING SKILLS – PHASE 1

COURSE OBJECTIVE:
l Improve their quantitative ability.
l Improve their reasoning ability.
l Enhance their verbal ability through vocabulary building and grammar
l Equip with creative thinking and problem solving skills

UNIT I QUANTITATIVE ABILITY – III 6

Compound Interest - Pro it and Loss - Partnership - Percentage - Set Theory

UNIT II QUANTITATIVE ABILITY – IV 6

True Discount - Ratio and Proportion - Simpli ication - Problems on H.C.F and
L.C.M

UNIT III REASONING ABILITY – II 6

Course of Action - Cause and Effect - Statement and Conclusion - Statement
and Argument - Data Suf iciency (DS) - Statement and Assumption - Making
Assumptions.

UNIT IV VERBAL ABILITY – II 6

Change of Voice - Change of Speech - Letter and Symbol Series - Essential Part -
Verbal Reasoning - Analyzing Arguments.

UNIT V CREATIVITY ABILITY – II 6

Seating Arrangement - Direction Sense Test - Character Puzzles - Missing
Letters Puzzles - Mirror &Water Images.
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1) R. S. Agarwal, “Quantitative Aptitude for Competitive Exams”
2) Sarvesh Verma, “Quantum CAT”
3) R. S. Agarwal, “A Modern Approach to Logical Reasoning”
4) Arun sharma, “Verbal Ability and Reading Comprehension”

97
 Syllabus ECE
ADVANCED C PROGRAMMING AND MATLAB AND SIMULINK
PROGRAMMING - PHASE 2

COURSE OBJECTIVE:
l To improve C programming skills with understanding of code organization
and functional hierarchical decomposition with using complex data types.
l To understand procedural programming methods using MATLAB &
SIMULINK.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO RECURSION AND GROWTH FUNCTIONS 6

Introduction to Recursion - Recurrence Relation - Deriving time complexity
and space complexity using recurrence relation Polynomial Equations -
Compare growth functions - Nth Fibonacci Number - Exponent Function -
Taylor Series - Tower of Hanoi.

UNIT II STORAGE CLASSES, THE PREPROCESSOR AND

DYNAMIC MEMORY ALLOCATION 6
Storage Classes and Visibility - Automatic or local variables - Global variables -
Macro De inition and Substitution - Conditional Compilation - Dynamic
Memory Allocation - Allocating Memory with malloc and callo Allocating
Memory with calloc - Freeing Memory - The Concept of linked list - Inserting a
node by using Recursive Programs - Deleting the Speci ied Node in a Singly
Linked List.

UNIT III FILE MANAGEMENT AND BIT MANIPULATION 6

De ining and Opening a ile - Closing Files - Input/output Operations on Files -
Prede ined Streams - Error Handling during I/O Operations - Random Access
to Files - Command Line Arguments - The hexadecimal number system - C
bitwise operators - How to generate all the possible subsets of a set - Tricks
with Bits - Applications of bit operations.

UNIT IV BASICS OF PROGRAMMING IN MATLAB 6

Variables - array - matrices - programming structure- Script iles- Functions -
Debugging programs - Loops, branches and control low - Relational and
logical operations - 2D and 3D graphics - Multiple plots, Plot properties-
Numerical analysis: Non-linear equations and optimization - Differential
equations.

98
 Syllabus ECE
UNIT V SIMULINK AND MATLAB OPTIMIZATION TOOLBOX 6
Introduction SIMULINK models - blocks - Systems and sub-systems -
Simulating Dynamic System - Solving a model - Solvers - MATLAB SIMULINK
for signal processing - Solving linear and quadratic optimization problems.
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. R. G. Dromey, "How to Solve It By Computer", Pearson, 1982
2. A.R. Bradley, "Programming for Engineers", Springer, 2011
3. Kernighan and Ritchie, "The C Programming Language", (2nd ed.) Prentice
Hall, 1988
4. Amos Gilat, “Matlab, An Introduction With Applications”, Wiley
Publication, 4th edition
5. Brian R. Hunt, Jonathan Rosenberg, and Ronald L Lipsman, “A Guide to
MATLAB”, Cambridge University press.

REFERENCES
1. Agam Kumar Tyagi, “Matlab and Simulink for Engineering” Oxford Higher
Education
2. Rudra Pratap “Getting Started with MATLAB”Oxford Higher Education
3. Stephen J Chapman, “MATLAB Programming for Engineers”, 6E, CENGAGE

ONLINE RESOURCES
1. https://matlabacademy.mathworks.com/
2. https://www.tutorialspoint.com/matlab/index.htm
3. https://medium.com/quick-code/top-tutorials-to-learn-matlab-for-
beginners-d19549ecb7b7
4. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/103/106/103106118/

WEB RESOURCES
1. https://www.mathworks.com/academia/books.html
2. https://in.mathworks.com/support/learn-with-matlab-tutorials.html

COURSE OUTCOMES :
Upon completion of this course, the students should be able to:
1. Analyze their quantitative ability. (K4)
2. Understand the ability of arithmetic reasoning along with creative
thinking and problem solving skills. (K2)
3. Create their verbal ability through vocabulary building and grammar. (K6)

99
 Syllabus ECE
4. Evaluate code organization and functional hierarchical decomposition
with complex data types. (K5)
5. Understand to improve C programming skills to apply advance structured
and procedural programming. (K2)
6. Apply the Matlab Simulink and optimization toolbox for signal processing
applications. (K3)

CO- PO & PSO MAPPING:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 - - - - 3 2 - 3 2 3 - 2 - -

CO2 - - - - 3 2 - 3 2 3 - 2 - -

CO3 - - - - 3 2 - - 1 3 - 2 - -

CO4 - - - - 3 2 - 3 3 3 - 2 2 2

CO5 - - - - 3 2 - - 2 3 - 2 2 2

CO6 - - - - 3 2 - - 2 3 - 2 2 2

100
 Syllabus ECE

SEMESTER - V
20ECPC501 L T P C
DIGITAL COMMUNICATION
SDG NO. 4,8,9 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l To know the principles of sampling and quantization
l To study the various waveform coding schemes
l To learn the various baseband transmission schemes
l To understand the various band pass signaling schemes
l To know the fundamentals of channel coding

UNIT I INFORMATION THEORY 9

Discrete Memoryless source, Information, Entropy, Mutual Information -
Discrete Memoryless channels – Binary Symmetric Channel, Channel Capacity
- Hartley - Shannon law - Source coding theorem - Shannon - Fano & Huffman
codes.

UNIT II WAVEFORM CODING & REPRESENTATION 9

Prediction filtering and DPCM - Delta Modulation - ADPCM & ADM principles-
Linear Predictive Coding - Properties of Line codes - Power Spectral Density of
Unipolar / Polar RZ & NRZ – Bipolar NRZ – Manchester.

UNIT III BASEBAND TRANSMISSION & RECEPTION 9

ISI – Nyquist criterion for distortion less transmission – Pulse shaping –
Correlative coding - Eye pattern – Receiving Filters - Matched Filter,
Correlation receiver, Adaptive Equalization.

UNIT IV DIGITAL MODULATION SCHEME 9

Geometric Representation of signals - Generation, detection, PSD & BER of
Coherent BPSK, BFSK & QPSK - QAM - Carrier Synchronization - Structure of
Non-coherent Receivers - Principle of DPSK.

UNIT V ERROR CONTROL CODING 9

Channel coding theorem - Linear Block codes - Hamming codes - Cyclic codes -
Convolutional codes - Viterbi Decoder.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

101
 Syllabus ECE
TEXT BOOKS:
1. S.Haykin, “Digital Communications”, John Wiley, 2005. (Unit I –V).
2. J.G Proakis, “Digital Communication”, 4th Edition,Tata McGraw Hill
Company, 2001.

REFERENCES:
1. B. Sklar, “Digital Communication Fundamentals and Applications”,
Second Edition, Pearson Education, 2009.
2. B.P.Lathi, “Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems”, Third
Edition, Oxford University Press. 2007.
3. H P Hsu, “Schaum Outline Series ― Analog and Digital Communications”,
TMH, 2006.

WEB REFERENCES::
1. https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc20_ee17/preview
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117/105/117105077/
3. http://www.ee.iitm.ac.in/~andrew/videolectures/EE419/index.html

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://freevideolectures.com/course/4763/nptel-digital-
communication/37
2. https://freevideolectures.com/course/2311/digital-communication/3
3. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117/101/117101051/
4. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3ekWsXeZ8TM&list=PLgwJf8NK-
2e5PngHbdEadEun5XPvnn00N&index=115

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1. Explain the basic concepts of Information theory (K2)
2. Apply the source coding techniques such as Shannon Fano and Huffman
coding.(K3)
3. Illustrate and compare the Encoding schemes such as DPCM, DM, ADPCM,
ADM & LPC and different waveform coding schemes.(K3)
4. Explain the base band transmission and Reception techniques. (K2)
5. Explain the performance of digital modulation schemes such as BPSK,
BFSK, QPSK, DPSK & QAM. (K2)
6. Apply the channel coding theorem, error control coding and decoding
schemes like block codes, hamming codes, cyclic codes, convolutional
codes and viterbi decoder (K3)

102
 Syllabus ECE
CO - PO, PSO MAPPING:
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 2 - - - - - - - - - - 2 -

CO2 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - - 2 1

CO3 3 3 2 1 - - - - - - - 1 2 1

CO4 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - 1 2 1

CO5 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 2 1

CO6 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - 1 2 1

SEMESTER - V
20ECPW501 DISCRETE TIME SIGNAL PROCESSING L T P C
SDG NO. 4, 9 WITH LABORATORY 3 0 2 4

OBJECTIVES:
l To learn discrete Fourier transform, fast Fourier transform, properties of
DFT and its application to linear filtering
l To understand the characteristics of digital filters, design digital IIR filters
and apply these filters to filter undesirable signals in various frequency
bands
l To understand the characteristics of digital linear phase FIR filters, design
digital FIR filters and apply these filters to filter undesirable signals in
various frequency bands
l To understand the effects of finite precision representations on digital
filters and obtain knowledge and ability to use the digital Signal Processors
to build DSP systems for real time problems
l Perform basic operations on signal processing and design filters using
MATLAB, and to study the architecture of DSP Processor and Implement
certain DSP algorithms on Digital Signal Processors

UNIT I DISCRETE FOURIER TRANSFORM 9

Summary of analysis & synthesis equations for FT & DTFT, frequency domain
sampling, Discrete Fourier transform (DFT) - deriving DFT from DTFT,
properties of DFT - periodicity, symmetry, circular convolution. Linear
filtering using DFT. Filtering long data sequences - overlap save and overlap
add method. Fast computation of DFT - Radix-2 Decimation-in-time (DIT) Fast

103
 Syllabus ECE

Fourier transform (FFT), Decimation-in-frequency (DIF), Fast Fourier

transform (FFT). Linear filtering using FFT.

UNIT II INFINITE IMPULSE RESPONSE FILTERS 9

Characteristics of practical frequency selective filters, characteristics of
commonly used analog filters - Butterworth filters, Chebyshev filters. Design
of IIR filters from analog filters (LPF, HPF, BPF, BRF) - Approximation of
derivatives, Impulse invariance method, Bilinear transformation. Frequency
transformation in the analog domain. Structure of IIR filter - direct form I,
direct form II, cascade, parallel realizations.

UNIT III FINITE IMPULSE RESPONSE FILTERS 9

Design of FIR filters - symmetric and Anti-symmetric FIR filters - design of
linear phase FIR filters using Fourier series method - FIR filter design using
windows (Rectangular, Hamming and Hanning window), Frequency sampling
method. FIR filter structures - linear phase structure, direct form realizations.

UNIT IV FINITE WORD LENGTH EFFECTS 9

Fixed point and floating point number representation - ADC - quantization -
truncation and rounding - quantization noise - input / output quantization -
coefficient quantization error - product quantization error - overflow error -
limit cycle oscillations due to product quantization and summation - scaling to
prevent overflow.

UNIT V INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSORS 9

DSP functionalities - circular buffering – DSP architecture – Fixed and Floating
point architecture principles – Programming – Application examples.

LAB COMPONENT – LIST OF EXPERIMENTS 15

MATLAB / EQUIVALENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
1. Generation of elementary Discrete-Time sequences, Linear and Circular
convolutions, Auto correlation and Cross Correlation.
2. Frequency Analysis using DFT and FFT.
3. Design of FIR filters (LPF/HPF/BPF/BSF) and demonstrates the filtering
operation.
4. Design of Butterworth and Chebyshev IIR filters (LPF/HPF/BPF/BSF) and
demonstrate the filtering operations.

104
 Syllabus ECE
DSP PROCESSOR BASED IMPLEMENTATION
1. Study of the architecture of Digital Signal Processor and Perform MAC
operation using various addressing modes.
2. Generation of signals – Square, Triangular, Sawtooth.
3. Convolution.
TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. John G Proakis and Manolakis, “Digital Signal Processing Principles,
Algorithms and Applications”, Pearson, Fifth Edition, 2021.
2. A.V.Oppenheim, R.W. Schafer and J.R. Buck, “Discrete Time Signal
Processing”, Eighth Indian Reprint, Pearson, 2004.

REFERENCES:
1. Emmanuel C. Ifeachor & Barrie. W. Jervis, “Digital Signal Processing”,
Second Edition, Pearson Education / Prentice Hall, 2002.
2. Sanjit K. Mitra, “Digital Signal Processing – A Computer Based Approach”,
Tata McGraw Hill, 2007.
3. Andreas Antoniou, “Digital Signal Processing”, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2006.
4. K. P. Soman and K. I. Ramachandran, "Insight into Wavelets - From Theory
to Practice", Prentice Hall of India, Third Edition, 2010.
5. B. Venkataramani, M. Bhaskar, “Digital Signal Processors: Architecture,
Programming and Application”, Tata McGraw Hill Education, 2002.

WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://www.tutorialspoint.com/digital_signal_processing/index.htm
2. https://www.analog.com/en/design-center/landing-pages/001/
beginners-guide-to-dsp. html
3. https://101science.com/dsp.htm

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc20_ee31https://nptel.ac.in/courses/
117105134/
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117105134/
3. https://www.edx.org/course/discrete-time-signal-processing-4

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
● Examine the signals in the frequency domain using DFT, DIT, DIF - FFT
algorithms and compute the response of the system using linear filtering.
(K3)
105
 Syllabus ECE
● Apply Butterworth and Chebyshev methods to design analog IIR filters.
(K3)
● Use approximation of derivatives, impulse invariance mapping, and
bilinear transformation methods to design a digital IIR filter. (K3)
● Use the Fourier series method, windowing technique, and frequency
sampling methods to design a digital FIR filter. (K3)
● Summarize the effect of finite word length in digital filters to compute the
quantization noise. (K2)
● Illustrate the architecture of Digital signal processors and program the DSP
processors for signal processing applications. (K3)

CO - PO, PSO MAPPING :

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 2 1 1 3 - - - 1 - - 2 3 -

CO2 3 3 2 2 2 - - - 1 - - 3 3 2

CO3 3 1 2 1 2 - - - 1 - - 3 3 1

CO4 3 2 2 3 2 2 - - 1 - - 3 3 2

CO5 3 3 2 2 2 2 - - - - - 3 3 2

CO6 3 3 2 2 2 2 - - - - 3 2 3 2

SEMESTER - V
20ECPC502 L T P C
VLSI DESIGN
SDG NO. 4, 9 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l To study the fundamentals of CMOS circuits and its characteristics
l To design and realize of combinational digital circuits
l To design and realize of sequential digital circuits
l To study the fundamentals of HDL
l Architectural choices and performance trade-offs involved in designing
and realizing the circuits in CMOS technology are discussed

106
 Syllabus ECE
UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MOS TRANSISTOR 9
MOS Transistor, CMOS logic, Inverter, Pass Transistor, Transmission gate,
Layout Design Rules, Gate Layouts, Stick Diagrams, Long-Channel I-V Charters
tics, C-V Characteristics, Non ideal I-V Effects, DC Transfer characteristics, RC
Delay Model, Elmore Delay, Linear Delay Model, Logical effort, Parasitic Delay,
Delay in Logic Gate, Scaling.

UNIT II COMBINATIONAL MOS LOGIC CIRCUITS 9

Circuit Families: Static CMOS, Ratioed Circuits, Cascode Voltage Switch Logic,
Dynamic Circuits, Pass Transistor Logic, Transmission Gates, Domino, Dual
Rail Domino, CPL, DCVSPG, DPL, Circuit Pitfalls. Power: Dynamic Power, Static
Power, Low Power Architecture.

UNIT III SEQUENTIAL CIRCUIT DESIGN 9

Static latches and Registers Dynamic latches and Registers, Pulse Registers,
Sense Amplifier Based Register, Pipelining, Schmitt Trigger, Monostable
Sequential Circuits, Astable Sequential Circuits. Timing Issues: Timing
Classification of Digital System, Synchronous Design.

UNIT IV INTRODUCTION TO HDL 9

Introduction to HDLs, Basic Concepts of Verilog, Data Types, System Tasks and
Compiler Directives, Gate Level Modeling: Gate Types and Gate Delays.
Dataflow Modeling: Continuous assignment and delays. Design of Stimulus
Block.

UNIT V DESIGN OF ARITHMETIC BUILDING BLOCKS

AND SUBSYSTEM 9
Arithmetic Building Blocks: Data Paths, Adders, Multipliers, Shifters, ALUs,
power and speed tradeoffs, Case Study: Design as a tradeoff. Designing
Memory and Array structures: Memory Architectures and Building Blocks,
Memory Core, Memory Peripheral Circuitry.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Neil H.E. Weste, David Money Harris, “CMOS VLSI Design: A Circuits and
Systems Perspective”, Fourth Edition, Pearson, 2017 (UNIT I,II).
2. Jan M. Rabaey, Anantha Chandrakasan, Borivoje. Nikolic, “Digital
Integrated Circuits: A Design Perspective”, Second Edition, Pearson, 2016
(UNIT III,V).
3. Samir Palnitkar, “Verilog HDL: A guide to Digital design and synthesis”,
Second Edition, Pearson Education, 2008 (UNIT IV).

107
 Syllabus ECE
REFERENCES:
1. Sung-Mo kang, Yusuf leblebici, Chulwoo Kim, “CMOS Digital Integrated
Circuits: Analysis & Design”, Fourth Edition, McGraw Hill Education, 2013.
2. Wayne Wolf, “Modern VLSI Design: System On Chip”, Pearson Education,
2007.
3. R.Jacob Baker, Harry W.LI., David E.Boyee, “CMOS Circuit Design, Layout
and Simulation”, Prentice Hall of India, 2005.

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://freevideolectures.com/course/3507/digital-vlsi-system-design
2. https://www.tutorialspoint.com/vlsi_design/vlsi_design_useful_
resources.html

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1. Illustrate the Fundamentals of CMOS Circuits, delay models and its
Characteristics. (K2)
2. Construct MOS logic circuit families for implementing Combinational
and Sequential Circuits.(K3)
3. Examine the Power and Timing Issues of Combinational and Sequential
CMOS Circuits. (K2).
4. Develop the hardware description language code for different
applications. (K3)
5. Apply the Architectural Choices for data path circuits and determine the
performance Trade-off involved and realizing the circuits in CMOS
Technology. (K3).
6. Describe the Various Memory Architectures, Memory Core and
Peripheral Circuits for VLSI Application. (K2)

CO - PO, PSO MAPPING:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 2 2 2 1 1 - - - - 1 1 3 2

CO2 3 2 2 2 1 1 - - - - 1 1 3 2

CO3 3 2 2 2 1 1 - - - - 1 1 3 2

CO4 3 2 2 2 1 1 - - - - 1 1 3 2

CO5 3 2 2 2 1 1 - - - - 1 1 3 2

CO6 3 2 2 2 1 1 - - - - 1 1 3 2

108
 Syllabus ECE

SEMESTER - V
20ECPL501 COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS L T P C
SDG NO. 4, 9 LABORATORY 0 0 3 1.5

OBJECTIVES:
l To visualize the effects of sampling and TDM
l To Implement AM & FM modulation and demodulation
l To implement PCM &DM
l To simulate Digital Modulation schemes
l To simulate Error control coding schemes

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1. Signal Sampling and reconstruction.
2. Time Division Multiplexing.
3. AM Modulator and Demodulator.
4. FM Modulator and Demodulator.
5. Pulse Code Modulation and Demodulation.
6. Delta Modulation and Demodulation.
7. Line coding schemes.
8. Simulation of ASK, FSK, and BPSK generation schemes.
9. Simulation of DPSK, QPSK and QAM generation schemes.
10. Simulation of signal constellations of BPSK, QPSK and QAM.
11. Simulation of ASK, FSK and BPSK detection schemes.
12. Simulation of Linear Block and Cyclic error control coding schemes.
13. Simulation of Convolutional coding scheme.
14. Communication link simulation.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
LAB REQUIREMENTS FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS /
3 STUDENTS PER EXPERIMENT:
1. Kits for Signal Sampling, TDM, AM, FM, PCM, DM and Line Coding
Schemes.
2. CROs / DSOs – 15 Nos.
3. Function Generators – 15 Nos.
4. MATLAB or equivalent software package for simulation experiments
5. PCs - 15 Nos.

109
 ECE Syllabus
OUTCOMES:
On completion of this laboratory course, the student should be able to
1. Perform signal sampling and multiplexing schemes for baseband signals
and reconstruct the signals. (K3)
2. Construct and test Analog modulation and demodulation circuits. (K5)
3. Generate various line coding schemes using PCM and DM techniques. (K3)
4. Simulate digital modulation and demodulation schemes such as ASK,
BFSK, BPSK, QPSK, QAM and DPSK and their constellations. (K3)
5. Implement various channel coding schemes and demonstrate the
improvement of noise performance. (K3)
6. Simulate and evaluate the various functional modulus of communication
systems. (K4)

CO - PO, PSO MAPPING:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 2 2 1 - - - - 1 - - - - -

CO2 3 2 2 1 - - - - 1 - - - - 2

CO3 3 3 2 1 1 - - - 1 - - 1 2 2

CO4 3 3 3 2 2 - - - 1 - - 1 2 2

CO5 3 3 3 2 2 - - - 1 - - 2 2 2

CO6 3 3 3 2 2 - - - 1 - - 2 2 2

SEMESTER - V
20ECPL502 L T P C
VLSI LABORATORY
SDG NO. 4, 9 0 0 3 1.5

OBJECTIVES:
l To learn Hardware Descriptive Language(Verilog/VHDL)
l To learn the fundamental principles of VLSI circuit design in digital and
analog domain
l To familiarize fusing of logical modules on FPGAs
l To provide hands on design experience with professional design (EDA)
platforms

110
 Syllabus ECE
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
Part I: Digital System Design using HDL & FPGA 9
1. Design an Adder (Min 8 Bit) using HDL. Simulate it using Xilinx/Altera
Software and implement by Xilinx/Altera FPGA.
2. Design a Multiplier (4 Bit Min) using HDL. Simulate it using Xilinx/Altera
Software and implement by Xilinx/Altera FPGA.
3. Design an ALU using HDL. Simulate it using Xilinx/Altera Software and
implement by Xilinx/Altera FPGA.
4. Design a Universal Shift Register using HDL. Simulate it using Xilinx/Altera
Software and implement by Xilinx/Altera FPGA.
5. Design Finite State Machine (Moore/Mealy) using HDL. Simulate it using
Xilinx/Altera Software and implement by Xilinx/Altera FPGA.
6. Design Memories using HDL. Simulate it using Xilinx/Altera Software and
implement by Xilinx/Altera FPGA.

Part-II: Digital Circuit Design

7. Design and simulate a CMOS inverter using digital flow.
8. Design and simulate a CMOS Basic Gates & Flip-Flops.
9. Design and simulate a 4-bit synchronous counter using a Flip-Flops.

Part-III Analog Circuit Design

10. Design and Simulate a CMOS Inverting Amplifier.
11. Design and Simulate basic Common Source, Common Gate and Common
Drain Amplifiers.
12. Design and simulate simple 5 transistor differential amplifier. Analyze
Gain, Bandwidth and CMRR by performing Schematic Simulations
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
LAB REQUIREMENTS :
Xilinx ISE/Altera Quartus/ equivalent EDA Tools 10 User License
Xilinx/Altera/equivalent FPGA Boards 10 nos
Cadence/Synopsis/ Mentor Graphics/Tanner/
equivalent EDA Tools 10 User License
Personal Computer 30 nos

OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to
1. Illustrate the syntax of HDL code and design digital integrated circuits by
writing codes in HDL.(K3)
2. Build and verify analog circuits using the EDA tools. (K3)

111
 Syllabus ECE
3. Implement the knowledge of Xilinx software to develop and import the
logic modules into FPGA boards. (K3)
4. Analyze and synthesize the digital ICs and based on the synthesis done,
determine the critical paths and power consumption in digital circuits.
(K4)
5. Create the place and route design of digital ICs. (K3)
6. Design, simulate and evaluate the layouts of analog IC blocks using EDA
tools. (K3)

CO - PO - PSO MAPPING:
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 2 2 3 3 1 - - - - 1 2 3 2

CO2 2 2 2 2 3 1 - - - - 1 2 3 2

CO3 1 1 3 1 3 1 - - - - 2 2 3 2

CO4 2 2 1 2 3 2 - - - - 1 2 3 2

CO5 2 2 2 2 3 1 - - - - 2 2 3 2

CO6 2 2 2 1 3 1 - - - - 1 2 3 2

SEMESTER - V
20ECTE501 L T P C
LIVE-IN-LAB - III
SDG NO. 4,11,15 0 0 3 1
OBJECTIVES:
l To provide opportunities for the students, expose to Industrial
environment and real time work
l To enable hands-on experience in the electronics hardware/Software
domain
l To enable development of skill set for designing and realizing prototype
electronic systems/simulation model

COURSE METHODOLOGY:
l This initiative is designed to inculcate ethical principles of research and
to get involve in life-long learning process for the students.
l The project work must involve engineering design with realistic
constraints. It must also include appropriate elements of the following:
Engineering standards, design analysis, modeling, simulation,
experimentation, prototyping, fabrication, correlation of data, and
software development.
112
 Syllabus ECE
l Project can be individual work or a group project, with maximum of 3
students. In case of group project, the individual project report of each
student should specify the individual's contribution to the group project.
l On completion of the project, the student shall submit a detailed project
report. The project should be reviewed and the report shall be evaluated
and the students shall appear for a viva-voce oral examination on the
project approved by the Coordinator and the project guide.

EVALUATION
l First evaluation (Immediately after first internal examination ) : 20
marks
l Second evaluation (Immediately after second internal examination):
30marks
l Final evaluation Last week of the semester) : 50marks
Note: All the three evaluations are mandatory for course completion and
for awarding the final grade.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to
1 Perform literature survey to identify the gap and an application oriented
research problem in the specific domain (K2)
2 Design and validate the proposed system using simulation (K3)
3 Implement the proposed system (K3)
4 Examine the obtained results and prepare a technical report (K4)
5 Publish the work in journals and apply for the patents.(K3)
6 Prepare for industrial environment and real time work (K3)

CO - PO, PSO MAPPING :

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 3 3 3

CO2 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3

CO3 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 3 2 3 3 3 2

CO4 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 3 2 3 3 3 2

CO5 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 3 2 3 3 3 2

CO6 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3

113
 SEMESTER - V
20ECTP501 L T P C
SKILL ENHANCEMENT
SDG NO. 4,11,15 0 0 3 1

APTITUDE & COGNITIVE SKILLS – PHASE 1

OBJECTIVES:
l Enhance their quantitative ability.
· l Enhance their reasoning ability
· l Enhance their verbal ability.
· l Equip with creative thinking and problem solving skills

UNIT I QUANTITATIVE ABILITY – V 6 Hours

Square Root And Cube Root, Logarithm, Volume and Surface Area,
Permutation and Combination

UNIT II QUANTITATIVE ABILITY – VI 6 Hours

Probability, Averages, Area, Odd Man Out, Crypt Arithmetic, Flowcharts

UNIT III REASONING ABILITY – III 6 Hours

Data Interpretation Table Charts, Data Interpretation Bar Charts, Blood
Relationship, Puzzles

UNIT IV VERBAL ABILITY – III 6 HOURS

Spellings, Selecting Words, Spotting Errors, Ordering of Words, Logical
Sequence of Words

UNIT V CREATIVITY ABILITY – III 6 Hours

Logical Puzzles, Playing Cards Puzzles, Clock Puzzles, Number Puzzles,
Sudoku
TOTAL : 30 PERIODS

REFERENCES
l Quantitative Aptitude for Competitive Exams by R. S. Agarwal
l Quantum CAT by Sarvesh Verma
l A Modern Approach to Logical Reasoning by R. S. Agarwal
l Verbal Ability and Reading Comprehension by Arun Sharma

114
 PYTHON PROGRAMMING AND CCNA - PHASE 2

OBJECTIVES
To enable students to,
l The course is designed to provide Strong knowledge of Python. Python
programming is intended for software engineers, system analysts,
program managers and user support personnel who wish to learn the
Python programming language.
l To understand the fundamentals of CISCO packet Tracer and implement
the routing methods for various network topologies.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION, DATA TYPES AND STRINGS, LIST

& TUPLES 10
DataTypes - Integer , Float , Boolean , String , List , Tuple , Dictionary and Sets.
String - Concatenation and Replication, isalnum functions, Slicing Operation
sorted() , reversed() , min() , max() , index() and count() function, packing and
unpacking of data in a tuple

UNIT II DICTIONARY AND SETS and HANDLING 10

Dictionary - del Keyword,. Sets - Frozen sets, Internal working of sets, add() ,
union() , intersection() and difference() method, symmetric_difference,
clear() method, Operators in sets, Higher Order Functions - map , filter , reduce
and lambda function, Random Library

UNIT III EXCEPTIONAL HANDLING, REGULAR

EXPRESSIONS AND OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING 10
Exception Handling - All Error Categories, try , except , finally blocks, Raising
an exception, Regular Expression, Object Oriented Programming - Types of
Inheritence, Data encapsulation and Abstraction, Polymorphism, Method
OverRiding, Operator overloading, operator overRiding,

UNIT IV CCNA TOPOLOGY AND CONFIGURATION 8

Introduction to Cisco Packet Tracer- Configure the basic switch and router
settings- Forming a simple network - Implementing various network
topology - Securing switch ports - Configure EtherChannel - Configuration of
IPv4 - Configuration of IPv6

UNIT V ROUTING AND NETWORKING 7

Subnetting a network - Implementing static routing - Implementing
dynamic routing - Implementing VLAN - Configuring DHCP
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
115
REFERENCES:
1. Python-(Mark Lutz)
2. Python Training guide (BPB Publications)
3. Thomas H. Cormen, Charles E. Leiserson, Ronald L. Rivest, and Clifford
Stein, “Introduction to Algorithms”, Third Edition, MIT Press.
4. Thomas H. Cormen, “Algorithms Unlocked”, MIT Press.
5. Behrouz A Forouzan, “Data Communications and Networking”, fourth
edition, Mc Graw Hill.

ONLINE RESOURCES
1. https://www.tutorialandexample.com/ccna-tutorial
2 https://www.computernetworkingnotes.com/ccna-study-guide/types-
of-static-routes-explained.html
3. https://www.ibm.com/cloud/learn/networking-a-complete-guide
4. https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/117/105/117105148/

OUTCOMES
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1. Define the syntax and semantics of python programming language and
Understand control flow statements, strings and functions. [K1]
2. Determine the methods to create and manipulate python programs by
utilizing the data structures like lists, dictionaries, tuples and sets. [K3]
3. Annotate the concepts of functions, modules and packages in python. [K2]
4. Understand the concepts of files, exception handling and also apply the
object oriented programming concept by creating classes and objects. [K3]
5. Understand the fundamentals of networking and cisco packet tracer. [K2]
6. Implement the routing methods for various network topology.[K3]

CO - PO - PSO MAPPING
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 - - - - 3 2 - 3 2 3 - 2 - -

CO2 - - - - 3 2 - 3 2 3 - 2 - -

CO3 - - - - 3 2 - - 1 3 - 2 - -

CO4 - - - - 3 2 - 3 3 3 - 2 2 2

CO5 1 2 2 - 3 1 - 1 2 3 - 2 2 2

CO6 1 2 2 2 3 2 - 1 2 3 - 2 2 2

116
 Syllabus ECE
SEMESTER - VI
20ECPC601 L T P C
TRANSMISSION LINES AND ANTENNAS
SDG NO. 1,4,9,11 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l To introduce the various types of transmission lines and its
characteristics
l To impart technical knowledge in impedance matching using smith
chart
l Determine the radiation fields of different wired antennas, array antennas
and analyze its fundamental parameters
l Analyze the fields of different travelling wave antennas and compute the
radiation fields of the Huygens source, aperture, slot and complementary
dipole antennas
l To create awareness about the different types of propagation of radio
waves at different frequencies

UNIT I TRANSMISSION LINES 9

Transmission line equations from source and load end. The finite and infinite
lines. Velocity of propagation, input impedance. Open and short circuited lines,
telephone cables, distortion less transmission, loading of cables, Campbell's
formula. Properties of Transmission lines at UHF, Reflection co-efficient,
Standing waves and SWR, Distribution of voltages and currents on loss less
line. Characteristics of half wave, Quarter-wave and one eighth wave lines.
Construction and applications of Smith chart. Transmission line matching.
Single and double stub matching using Smith Chart.

UNIT II FUNDAMENTALS OF RADIATION 9

Concept of radiation - Types of antennas - Current distribution - Fundamental
parameters: Radiation Pattern-Radiation Power Density - Radiation Intensity
- Beamwidth - Gain - Directivity-Bandwidth Polarization - Antenna efficiency -
Effective aperture -Friis transmission equation - Field regions separation -
Monopole antenna - Half wave dipole: Field components - Total radiated
power - Radiation resistance - Folded dipole

UNIT III ANTENNA ARRAYS 9

Need for antenna arrays - Design of two element array - Multiplication of
pattern - N-element linear array : Uniform amplitude and spacing - Design of
broadside & end fire arrays : Non-uniform amplitude and equal spacing -

117
 Syllabus ECE
Design of binomial array - Phased array design - Yagi Uda antenna - Concept of
smart antenna.

UNIT IV APERTURE AND SLOT ANTENNAS 9

Radiation from rectangular apertures, Uniform and Tapered aperture, Horn
antenna, Reflector antenna, Aperture blockage, Feeding structures, Slot
antennas, Microstrip antennas – Radiation mechanism – Application
,Numerical tool for antenna analysis.

UNIT V SPECIAL ANTENNAS AND WAVE PROPAGATION 9

Loop Antennas, Principle of frequency independent antennas –Spiral antenna,
Helical antenna, Log periodic. Modern antennas- Reconfigurable antenna,
Active antenna, Dielectric antennas, Electronic band gap structure.
and applications,
Wave Propagation : Modes of propagation - Structure of atmosphere -
Ground wave propagation - Sky wave propagation - Virtual height - Maximum
usable frequency - Skip distance - Space wave propagation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. C.A.Balanis, "Antenna Theory: Analysis and Design", John Wiley & Sons
Inc., Fourth Edition, 2015.
2. John D.Kraus, Ronald J.Marhefka, Ahmad S Khan, "Antennas and Wave
Propagation" Tata McGraw Hill, Fifth Edition 2017.

REFERENCES:
1. Warren L. Stutzman, Gary A. Thiele, "Antenna theory and design", John
Wiley and Sons Ltd., Third Edition, 2013.
2. Edward C.Jordan, Keith G.Balmain, “Electromagnetic Waves and
Radiating Systems”, Pearson, Second Edition, 2015.
3. R.E.Collin, “Antennas and Radio Wave Propagation”, McGraw Hill 1985.
4. A.R.Harish, M.Sachidananda, "Antennas and Wave Propagation", Oxford
University Press, First Edition 2007.
5. S.Drabowitch, A.Papiernik, J. Encinas, H,Griffiths, G.Smith, "Modern
Antennas", Springer Science, 2013.
6. Handbooks/ Manuals of Simulation software packages like HFSS, CST and
ADS.

WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://www.itu.int/dms_pub/itu-r/opb/hdb/R-HDB-59-2014-PDF-
E.pdf

118
 Syllabus ECE
ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108101092/

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student will be able to
1. Explain the characteristics of transmission lines and its losses (K1)
2. Interpret the standing wave ratio, impedance and impedance matching
using circuit concept and smith chart. (K2)
3. Applying basic principles, analyze and measure the performance
characteristics of antennas (K2)
4. Derive and Determine Array factor, Beam width & null angles of N-element
linear arrays with uniform and non uniform amplitude and spacing. - (K2)
5. Analyze the radiation from wire, aperture and slots. (K2)
6. Explain the different modes of propagation of EM waves. (K1)

CO - PO, PSO MAPPING:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 1 2 2 - 2 - - - - 2 2 3 2

CO2 3 1 3 2 - 2 - - - - 2 2 3 2

CO3 3 1 3 2 - 2 - - - - 2 2 3 2

CO4 3 1 3 2 3 2 - - - - 2 2 3 2

CO5 3 1 3 2 3 1 1 - 1 - 2 2 3 2

CO6 3 1 1 1 2 1 - - - - 1 1 2 1

SEMESTER - VI
20ECPC602 L T P C
COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
SDG NO. 4,9 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l Understand the division of network functionalities into layers
l Be familiar with the components required to build different types of
networks
l Be exposed to the required functionality at each layer
l Learn the flow control and congestion control algorithms
119
 Syllabus ECE
UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS & LINK LAYER 9
Overview of Data Communications- Networks – Building Network and its
types– Overview of Internet - Protocol Layering - OSI Model – Physical Layer –
Overview of Data and Signals - introduction to Data Link Layer - Link layer
Addressing- Error Detection and Correction.

UNIT II MEDIA ACCESS & INTERNETWORKING 9

Overview of Data link Control and Media access control - Ethernet (802.3) -
Wireless LANs – Available Protocols – Bluetooth – Bluetooth Low Energy –
WiFi – 6LowPAN–Zigbee - Network layer services – Packet Switching – IPV4
Address – Network layer protocols ( IP, ICMP, Mobile IP).

UNIT III ROUTING 9

Routing - Unicast Routing – Algorithms – Protocols – Multicast Routing and its
basics – Overview of Intradomain and interdomain protocols – Overview of
IPv6 Addressing – Transition from IPv4 to Ipv6.

UNIT IV TRANSPORT LAYER 9

Introduction to Transport layer –Protocols- User Datagram Protocols (UDP)
and Transmission Control Protocols (TCP) –Services – Features – TCP
Connection – State Transition Diagram – Flow, Error and Congestion Control -
Congestion avoidance (DECbit, RED) – QoS – Application requirements.

UNIT V APPLICATION LAYER 9

Application Layer Paradigms – Client Server Programming – World Wide Web
and HTTP - DNS- Electronic Mail (SMTP, POP3, IMAP, MIME) – Introduction to
Peer to Peer Networks – Need for Cryptography and Network Security –
Firewalls.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOK:
1. Behrouz A. Forouzan, “Data communication and Networking”, Fifth
Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2013.

REFERENCES:
1. James F. Kurose, Keith W. Ross, “Computer Networking - A Top-Down
Approach Featuring the Internet”, Pearson, Seventh Edition, 2017.
2. Nader F. Mir, “Computer and Communication Networks”, Pearson
Prentice Hall Publishers, Second Edition, 2014.
3. Ying-Dar Lin, Ren-Hung Hwang, Fred Baker, “Computer Networks: An
Open Source Approach”, McGraw Hill Education, 2011.

120
4. Larry L. Peterson, Bruce S. Davie, “Computer Networks: A Systems
Approach", Fifth Edition, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2011.

WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=HEEnLZV2wGI/
2. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=vv4y_uOneC0

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106/105/106105080/
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106/106/106106091/
3. https://www.coursera.org/specializations/computer-communications

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1. Understanding the different types of networks and networks layer (K2)
2. Apply the different WLAN technology depending upon the coverage area
and number of nodes (k3)
3. Illustrate the network layer services, packet switching, IPV4 addressing
and different network layer protocols (K3)
4. Analyse and trace the flow of information from one node to another node in
the network. (K4)
5. Demonstrate the Transport layer with UDP and TCP. (K3)
6. Explain the application layer with client server programming, WWW,
HTTP, Different Electronic mail protocols with security aspects. (K3)

CO - PO, PSO MAPPING:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 2 3 2 2 2 - - - - 2 - - 3 3

CO2 2 1 1 1 - - - - - 2 - - 2 2

CO3 2 2 1- 2 - - - - - 2 - - 2 2

CO4 3 2 2 2 2 - - - - 2 - - 2 2

CO5 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - 2 - - 2 2

CO6 3 2 2 2 2 - - - - 2 - - 3 3

121
 Syllabus ECE

SEMESTER - VI
20ECPC603 L T P C
WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
SDG NO. 9, 12 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
l To study the characteristic of wireless channel
l To understand the design of a cellular system
l To study the various digital signaling techniques and multipath
mitigation techniques
l To understand the concepts of multiple antenna techniques

UNIT I WIRELESS CHANNELS 9

Large scale path loss – Path loss models: Free Space and Two-Ray models -Link
Budget design – Small scale fading- Parameters of mobile multipath channels –
Time dispersion parameters-Coherence bandwidth – Doppler spread &
Coherence time, fading due to Multipath time delay spread – flat fading –
frequency selective fading – Fading due to Doppler spread – fast fading – slow
fading.

UNIT II CELLULAR ARCHITECTURE 9

Multiple Access techniques - FDMA, TDMA, CDMA – Capacity calculations–
Cellular concept - Frequency reuse - Channel assignment - Hand off -
interference & system capacity - Trunking & grade of service – Coverage and
capacity improvement.

UNIT III DIGITAL SIGNALING FOR FADING CHANNELS 9

Structure of a wireless communication link, Principles of Offset-QPSK, p/4-
DQPSK, Minimum Shift Keying, Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying, Error
performance in fading channels, OFDM principle – Cyclic prefix, Windowing,
PAPR.

UNIT IV MULTIPATH MITIGATION TECHNIQUES 9

Equalization – Adaptive equalization, Linear and Non-Linear equalization,
Zero forcing and LMS Algorithms. Diversity – Micro and Macro diversity,
Diversity combining techniques, Error probability in fading channels with
diversity reception, Rake receiver.

UNIT V MULTIPLE ANTENNA TECHNIQUES 9

MIMO systems – spatial multiplexing -System model -Pre-coding - Beam
122
 Syllabus ECE
forming - transmitter diversity, receiver diversity- Channel state information-
capacity in fading and non-fading channels.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Rappaport,T.S., "Wireless communications", Pearson Education, Second
Edition, 2010.
2. Andreas.F. Molisch, "Wireless Communications", John Wiley – India,
2006.

REFERENCES:
1. Andrea Goldsmith, “Wireless Communication”, Cambridge University
Press, 2011.
2. Van Nee, R., Ramji Prasad, “OFDM for Wireless Multimedia
Communications”, Artech House, 2000.
3. David Tse, Pramod Viswanath, “Fundamentals of Wireless
Communication”, Cambridge University Press, 2005.
4. Upena Dalal, “Wireless Communication and Networks”, Oxford
University Press, 2015.

WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106/106/106106167/
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117/104/117104115/
3. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117/105/117105132/

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer-
science/6-452-principles-of-wireless-communications-spring-2006/

OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to
1. Explain the different path loss models for Large and small scale
propagation to design the Link Budget for wireless Channel in different
scenarios. (K2)
2. Describe the multiple access Techniques that includes TDMA, FDMA,
CDMA, OFDMA to derive the capacities of the systems. (K2)
3. Explain the cellular system with hand off strategies and the techniques to
improve its capacity. (K2)
4. Explain the operation of transmitter and receiver pertaining to various
signalling schemes used in Fading Channels to analyze the bit error
probability. (K2)

123
 Syllabus ECE
5. Compare and interpret the different multipath mitigation techniques like
Diversity, equalization with their performance. (K2)
6. Design the MIMO system with transmit and receive diversity and
elucidate its performance using Channel State Information. (K3)

CO - PO, PSO MAPPING:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 3 3 - 2 1 1 - - 1 - 1 3 3

CO2 3 3 3 1 3 - 1 1 - 1 - 2 3 3

CO3 3 3 2 - 3 2 1 - - 1 - 2 3 3

CO4 2 2 2 - 3 1 1 - - 1 - 2 3 3

CO5 2 2 2 - 3 2 1 - - 1 - 2 3 3

CO6 3 3 2 - 2 1 1 - - 1 - 2 3 3

SEMESTER - VI
20HSPL501 COMMUNICATION AND SOFT SKILLS L T P C
SDG NO. 4, 8 LABORATORY 0 0 2 1

OBJECTIVES:
l To develop effective communication and presentation skills
l To enhance the employability and career skills of the learners
l To enable the learners for preparing job application and e-portfolio
l To make the learners use soft skills efficiently
l To develop their confidence and help them in attending interviews
successfully

UNIT I LISTENING AND SPEAKING SKILLS 6

Conversational skills participate in formal and informal talks – general, –
group discussion – time management – group dynamics – GD strategies -
making effective presentations - listening/watching interviews
conversations, documentaries - listening to lectures, discussions from social
media – improving articulation.

124
 Syllabus ECE
UNIT II ADVANCED READING AND WRITING SKILLS 6
Reading different genres of texts - writing job applications – cover letter –
ré sumé – emails – memos - writing abstracts – summaries – interpreting visual
texts - e-portfolio.

UNIT III SKILLS FOR COMPETITIVE EXAMS 6

Reading passages for competitive exams – language focus exercise – building
vocabulary tasks - FAQs related to competitive exams – current affairs -
improving global reading skills – elaborating ideas – summarizing –
understanding arguments – identifying opinion/attitude and making
inferences - critical reading.

UNIT IV SOFT SKILLS 6

Motivation – emotional intelligence – managing changes – stress management
– leadership straits – team work – career planning – intercultural
communication – creative and critical thinking

UNIT V INTERVIEW SKILLS 6

Different types of interview – personal interview – panel interview –
telephone/online interview - interview etiquette - answering questions –
offering information – mock interviews – FAQs related to job interviews
TOTAL: 30 PERIODS
REFERENCES:
1. Business English Certificate Materials, Cambridge University Press.
2. Comfort, Jeremy, et al. Speaking Effectively: Developing Speaking Skills
for Business English. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, 2011.
3. International English Language Testing System Practice Tests,
Cambridge University Press.
4. Personality Development (CD-ROM), Times Multimedia, Mumbai.

WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/109/107/109107121/
2. https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc19_hs33/preview
3. https://ict.iitk.ac.in/courses/enhancing-soft-skills-and-personality/

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://www.britishcoucil.my/english/courses-adults/learning-
tips/importance-of-soft-skills
2. https://www.skillsoft.com/content-solutions/business-skills-
training/soft-skills-training/

125
 Syllabus ECE
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course learners should be able to
1. Demonstrate a better understanding of the communication process by
articulating effectively(K2)
2. Exhibit soft skills & technical skills and construct e-portfolio
effectively(K3)
3. Apply critical thinking abilities and perform well in group discussions(K2)
4. Adapt the skills towards grooming as a professional continuously(K2)
5. Identify different types of personal interview skills through mock
interviews and practices(K2)
6. Execute the employability and career skills in their chosen profession(K3)

CO - PO MAPPING:
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 - - - - - - - 1 2 3 1 1

CO2 - - - - - - - 2 3 3 2 1

CO3 - - - - - - - 2 3 2 - 1

CO4 - - - - - - - 1 1 3 2 2

CO5 - - - - - 2 - 1 2 3 - 1

CO6 - - - - - - - 1 1 3 2 2

SEMESTER - VI
20ECPL601 L T P C
ANTENNAS LABORATORY
SDG NO. 4, 9 0 0 3 1.5

OBJECTIVES:
l To understand the measurement of antenna parameters
l Design and implement antennas using EM tools

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS : 9
1. Study of structure and operation of wired, aperture, planar and array
antennas.
2. Measurement of Radiation Pattern of Half wave dipole.
3. Measurement of radiation pattern of 5 element Yagi uda Antenna.
126
 Syllabus ECE
4. Measurement of Radiation Pattern of Planar Antennas.
5. Plot the radiation pattern of helical antenna.
6. Measurement of Radiation Pattern of broad side antenna array.
7. Measurement of Radiation Pattern of End fire antenna array.
8. Measurement of Radiation Pattern Reflector antennas.
9. Design and Simulation of Micro strip antenna using CST Tool.
10. Measurement of antenna parameters using network analyzer.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to
1. Demonstrate the structure and operation of various antennas and describe
their parameters. (K2)
2. Measure the radiation pattern of wired antennas. (K2)
3. Analyze the antenna parameters using Network Analyzer.(K3)
4. Plot the radiation pattern of an array of antennas. (K2)
5. Familiar with EM tools to implement antenna prototypes. (K1)
6. Simulate and test Microstrip antennas. (K3)

CO - PO - PSO MAPPING:
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 1 2 1 1 - - - - - - 2 3 1

CO2 3 1 2 3 3 - - - - - - 2 3 -

CO3 3 1 2 3 3 - - - - - - 2 3 1

CO4 3 11 2 3 3 - - - - - - 2 3 1

CO5 3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - 2 3 1

CO6 3 1 3 3 3 - - - - - - 2 3 1

SEMESTER - VI
20ECPL602 L T P C
NETWORKS LABORATORY
SDG NO. 4, 9 0 0 3 1.5
OBJECTIVES:
l Learn to communicate between two desktop computers.
l Learn to implement the different protocols.

127
 Syllabus ECE
l Be familiar with IP Configuration.
l Be familiar with the various routing algorithms.
l Be familiar with simulation tools.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS :
1. Implementation of Error Detection / Error Correction Techniques
2. Implementation of Stop and Wait Protocol and sliding window
3. Implementation and study of Goback-N and selective repeat protocols
4. Implementation of High Level Data Link Control
5. Implementation of IP Commands such as ping, Traceroute, nslookup.
6. Implementation of IP address configuration.
7. To create scenario and study the performance of network with CSMA /
CA protocol and compare with CSMA/CD protocols.
8. Network Topology - Star, Bus, Ring .
9. Implementation of distance vector routing algorithm.
10. Implementation of Link state routing algorithm.
11. Study of Network simulator (NS) and simulation of Congestion Control
Algorithms using NS.
12. Implementation of Encryption and Decryption Algorithms using any
programming language.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS

SOFTWARE
l C / Python / Java / Equivalent Compiler.
l MATLAB SOFTWARE (Few experiments can be practiced with
MATLAB)
l Standard LAN Trainer Kits - 4 Nos
l Network simulator like NS2/ NS3 / Glomosim / OPNET - 30
Equivalent

HARDWARE
l Standalone Desktops - 30 Nos

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1. Communicate between two desktop computers.(k1)
2. Implement different Protocols such as Stop & Wait, Go back N/Sliding
window, Selective repeat.(k2)
128
 Syllabus ECE
3. Study the performance of network with CSMA/CA protocol and compare
with CSMA/CD protocols.(k1)
4. Program using Sockets –Client server model, Echo/Ping/Talk
commands/nslookup/ IP Configuration.(k2)
5. Implement and compare Distance vector and Link state routing,
algorithms and congestion control algorithm.(k2)
6. Use simulation tool such as NS2/OPNET. (k2)

CO – PO, PSO MAPPING :

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 3 3 2 3 1 - - 1 - 2 3 2 1

CO2 3 3 3 3 3 1 - - - - 2 1 3 -

CO3 3 3 3 3 3 1 - - - - 2 1 3 -

CO4 3 3 2 2 3 - - - - - 2 2 3 -

CO5 3 3 3 2 3 - - - - - 2 2 2 -

CO6 3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - 2 2 3 1

SEMESTER - VI
20ECPJ601 L T P C
INNOVATIVE DESIGN PROJECT
SDG NO. 4,11,15 0 0 2 1

OBJECTIVES:
l To understand the engineering aspects of design with reference to simple
products
l To foster innovation in design of products
l To develop design that add value to products and solve technical
problems

COURSE PLAN
Study: Take minimum three simple products, processes or techniques in the
area of specialization, study, analyze and present them. The analysis shall be
focused on functionality, construction, quality, reliability, safety, maintenance,
handling, sustainability, cost etc. whichever are applicable. Each student in the
group has to present individually; choosing different products, processes or
techniques.
129
 Syllabus ECE
Design: The project team shall identify an innovative product, process or
technology and proceed with detailed design. At the end, the team has to
document it properly and present and defend it. The design is expected to
concentrate on functionality; design for strength is not expected.

Note: The one hour/week allotted for tutorial shall be used for discussions and
presentations. The project team (not exceeding four) can be students from
different branches, if the design problem is multidisciplinary.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
EVALUATION
1. First evaluation ( Immediately after first internal examination ) : 20
marks
2. Second evaluation ( Immediately after second internal examination): 20
marks
3. Final evaluation ( Last week of the semester) : 60 marks

Note: All the three evaluations are mandatory for course completion and for
awarding the final grade.

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1. Demonstrate innovatively on the development of components, products,
processes or technologies in the engineering field. (K3)
2. Analyze the problem requirements and arrive workable design solutions.
(K4)

CO - PO, PSO MAPPING :

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 2 3 3

CO2 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 2 3 3

130
 SEMESTER - VI
20ECTP601 L T P C
SKILL ENHANCEMENT
SDG NO. 4,11,15 0 0 2 1
APTITUDE & COGNITIVE SKILLS – PHASE 1

OBJECTIVES:
l Enhance their quantitative ability.
l Enhance their reasoning ability
l Enhance their verbal ability.

UNIT I QUANTITATIVE ABILITY – VII 10

Races And Games, Boats and Streams, Surds and Indices, Pipes and Cistern,
Alligations And Mixtures

UNIT II QUANTITATIVE ABILITY – VIII 10

Numbers, Problems on Numbers, Pick Wrong Number, Missing Number, Areas,
Shapes, Perimeter.

UNIT III REASONING ABILITY – IV 8

Data Interpretation Pie Charts, Data Interpretation Line Charts, Data
Sufficiency (DS), Data Arrangements, LR – Arrangements, LR – Ranking.

UNIT IV VERBAL ABILITY – IV 10

Sentence Correction, Sentence Improvement, Completing Statements,
Sentence Formation, Paragraph Formation.

UNIT V CREATIVITY ABILITY – IV 7

Dot Situation, Rule Detection, Embedded Images, Grouping Of Images, Image
Analysis.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

REFERENCES
l Quantitative Aptitude for Competitive Exams by R. S. Agarwal
l Quantum CAT by Sarvesh Verma
l A Modern Approach to Logical Reasoning by R. S. Agarwal
l Verbal Ability and Reading Comprehension by Arun Sharma

131
 PROBLEM SOLVING USING BASIC DATA STRUCTURES AND CST
- PHASE 2

COURSE OBJECTIVES
To enable students to
l The objective of the course is to familiarize students with basic data
structures and their use in fundamental algorithms.
l To understand CST modeling Techniques and simulation.
l To design and fabricate an antenna using suitable materials.

UNIT I LINKED LIST & STACK, QUEUE & HEAP 10

Linked List - Doubly Linked List Traversal, Circular Linked List, Structure,
Node creation, Traversal Stack, Stack –Time Complexities of the Operations,
Infix to Postfix/Prefix Conversation, Histogram Problem, Implementation -
Using Array, Using Linked List, Queue Implementation - Queue using Stack

UNIT II BINARY TREE AND HASHING 6

Binary Tree - Types of Binary Tree,Balanced Tree, Degenerate or pathological
Tree, Binary Search Tree, Inorder , Preorder , PostOrder and LevelOrder
Traversal, Hashing, Linear Probing for Collision Handling, Union and
Intersection of two Linked Lists

UNIT III TREES AND GRAPH 10

AVL Tree -Right-Left Imbalance, Left and Right Rotation, - Red Black Tree,
Rules of coloring Left and Right Rotation,Graph terminology –Representation
of graphs –Path matrix –Graph Traversal –BFS (breadth first search) –DFS
(depth first search) –Minimum spanning Tree –Kruskal's Algorithm & Prim's
Algorithm –Warshall's algorithm (shortest path algorithm).

UNIT IV CST MODELING TECHNIQUE AND SOLVER OVERVIEW 8

CST Microwave Studio Workflow- Basics View Options – Construct Objects -
Component Library- Curves - Create Cone Structure Picks – Advanced -CAD
Import Handling - CST Time and Frequency Domain Solvers- Time Domain
Simulation -Time Domain vs. Frequency Domain Frequency Domain
Simulation - CST Microwave Studio Solvers

UNIT V PORTS, MATERIALS AND BOUNDARIES 6

Ports -Ports for S-Parameter Computation- Discrete Ports -Waveguide Ports -
Materials- Material Library Creating A New Material- Normal Materials -
Metals -Surface/Transfer Impedance Models
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
132
REFERENCES
1. Weiss, Mark. A. (2012), Data structures and algorithm analysis in Java. 3
edition. Harlow, Essex : Pearson (632 p).
2. Zobel, Justin (2014), Writing for Computer Science. 3 edition. Springer
Verlag London Ltd (270 p).

ONLINE RESOURCES
1. https://www.digimat.in/nptel/courses/video/108101112/L58.html
2. http://www.nitttrc.edu.in/nptel/courses/video/108101112/lec55.pdf

OUTCOMES
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1. Analyze the applications of linear data structure using Stack and Queue
implementation. (K4)
2. Define the various hash functions and its implementation. (K2)
3. Apply the basic concepts of the Non Linear Data Structure - Trees and
Graph. (K3)
4. Understand the basic principle of CST studio and simulation methods.
[K2]
5. Design and analysis of radiating structures, filters and cavities.[K3]
6. Implementation of antenna models with suitable materials.[K4]

CO – PO, PSO MAPPING:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 - 2 - - - - - - - - - - -

CO2 3 - 2 - - - - - - - - - - -

CO3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - - - -

CO4 3 2 1 2 3 1 1 1 1 2 - - 1 2

CO5 1 1 3 2 3 2 3 1 - - - - 2 1

CO6 1 3 1 1 1 2 1 2 - - 1 - 2 2

133
 Syllabus ECE

SEMESTER - VII
20ECPC701 L T P C
RF AND MICROWAVE ENGINEERING
SDG NO. 4,7,9,11 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l To enhance the student knowledge in various parameters of microwave
networks
l To equip the students with sound technical knowledge in microwave
tubes
l To understand the fundamental concepts about microwave
semiconductor devices

UNIT I HIGH FREQUENCY NETWORK THEORY AND

PASSIVE DEVICES 10
Types of Interconnection of two port networks , Formulation of S Parameters,
Properties of S-Parameters,Reciprocal and Lossless network, Transmission
Matrix, RF Passive Components: Resistor, Inductor and Capacitor at high
frequency, Chip Resistor, Chip capacitor and microstrip lines. Passive Devices:
Waveguide corners- Bends - Twist - matched loads and movable shorts,
Waveguide Tees, Circulator, Isolator, Directional Coupler and Hybrid Rings.

UNIT II MICROWAVE SIGNAL GENERATION 9

Review of Conventional Vacuum Triodes, Tetrodes and Pentodes, High
Frequency effects in Vacuum Tubes, Two Cavity Klystron Amplifier - Transit
time- velocity modulation - bunching - efficiency, Reflex Klystron, Slow wave
structures, Helix Travelling wave tube amplifier, Magnetrons.

UNIT III MICROWAVE MEASUREMENTS 7

Measuring Instruments: Principle of operation and application of VSWR
meter, Power meter, Spectrum analyzer, Network analyzer, Measurement of
Impedance, Frequency, Power, VSWR, Q-factor, Dielectric constant, Scattering
coefficients, Attenuation, S-parameters.

UNIT IV MICROWAVE SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES 9

Tunnel Diode, Varactor diode, Crystal and Schottkey diode detector and
mixers, Gunn diode oscillator, IMPATT diode oscillator and amplifier, RF
Bipolar Junction Transistor, RF Field Effect Transistor: Construction, High
Electron Mobility Transistor: Functionality, Frequency Response,
Temperature Behaviour and Noise Performance.
134
 Syllabus ECE
UNIT V RADIO FREQUENCY CIRCUITS 10
Amplifier Design: Characteristics, Power Relations, Stability considerations,
Constant Gain, Noise Figure and Constant VSWR circles. Filter Design :
Insertion loss methods, filter transforms and filter implementation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:
1. David M.Pozar, "Microwave Engineering", Wiley, 4th Edition, 2012.
2. Reinhold Ludwig and Gene Bogdanov, "RF Circuit Design - Theory and
Applications", Prentice Hall, 2nd Edition, 2009.

REFERENCES:
1. Annapurna Das and Sisir K.Das, "Microwave Engineering", McGraw Hill
Education (India) ,3rd Edition, 2015.
2. Robert.E.Colin, "Foundations of Microwave Engineering", John Wiley and
Sons, 2nd Edition, 2007.
3. R.S. Rao, "Microwave Engineering", Prentice Hall of India, 2nd Edition,
2015.
4. Liao Y S, “Microwave devices and circuits”, Prentice Hall of India, New
Delhi,2008.

WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://www.tutorialspoint.com/microwave_engineering

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117101119/
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108101112/

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1. Analyze and characterize the given system or network based on its S-
parameters. (K2)
2. Analyze the performance of Passive microwave components. (K2)
3. Analyze the working and performance of Microwave signal generators.
(K2)
4. Knowledge on test & measurement methods for measuring power,
frequency, losses,VSWR, Scattering and spectral parameters. (K3)
5. Analyze the working of high frequency semiconductor devices. (K2)

135
 Syllabus ECE
6. Design RF amplifiers to meet criteria based on stability, gain and noise
figure requirements and also to design RF filters and Knowledge to
implement using microstrip lines. (K3)

CO - PO, PSO MAPPING :

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 3 1 1 - 1 - - - - 2 2 3 2

CO2 3 2 0 1 - 1 - - - - 2 2 3 2

CO3 3 2 0 2 - 2 - - - - 2 2 3 2

CO4 1 1 2 3 - 1 - - - - 2 2 3 2

CO5 1 1 3 1 - - - - - - 2 2 3 2

CO6 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - 2 2 3 2

SEMESTER - VII
20ECPC702 L T P C
OPTICAL COMMUNICATION
SDG NO. 9, 11 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l To study about the various optical fiber modes, configuration and
transmission characteristics of optical fibers
l To learn about the transmission characteristics associated with
dispersion and polarization techniques
l To learn about the various optical sources, detectors and transmission
techniques
l To explore various idea about optical fiber measurements and various
coupling techniques
l To enrich the knowledge about optical communication systems and
networks

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO OPTICAL FIBERS 9

Introduction, need for optical communication, salient features of optical
fibers, Ray theory of light guidance, Basic optical laws and definitions, Total
internal reflection, Acceptance angle, Numerical aperture, Modes of a fiber,
single and multimode fibers, Step-index and graded-index fibers, Fiber
fabrication techniques. Electromagnetic nature of light, Boundary Conditions,
136
 Syllabus ECE
Reflection and transmission of waves at a boundary, Modal analysis of optical
fibers, Linearly polarized modes.

UNIT II SIGNAL DEGRADATION IN OPTICAL FIBER 9

Attenuation, Absorption, Scattering losses, Bending losses, Core and Cladding
losses, Signal dispersion, Inter symbol interference and bandwidth, Intra
model dispersion, Material dispersion, Waveguide dispersion, Polarization
mode dispersion, Intermodal dispersion. Pulse broadening In GI fibers, Mode
Coupling, Design optimization of single mode fiber, Characteristics of single
mode fiber, RI Profile cutoff wave length, Dispersion calculations, Mode field
diameter.

UNIT III OPTICAL SOURCES AND DETECTORS 9

Sources and Deectors: Intrinsic and extrinsic materials, Direct and indirect
band gaps, LED structures, Surface emitting LED, Edge emitting LED, Quantum
efficiency and LED power, Light source materials, Modulation of LED, LASER
diodes, Modes and threshold conditions, Rate equations, External quantum
efficiency. PIN photo detector, Avalanche photo diodes, Photo detector noise,
Noise sources, SNR, Detector response time, Avalanche multiplication noise.

UNIT IV OPTICAL RECEIVER, MEASUREMENTS AND COUPLING 9

Fundamental receiver operation, preamplifiers, error sources, Front end
amplifiers, Digital receiver performance, Probability of error, Receiver
sensitivity, Quantum limit. Optical power measurement, Attenuation
measurement (Cut back & Insertion loss Methods), Dispersion measurement,
Fiber Numerical Aperture Measurements, Fiber cut-off Wave length
Measurements, Fiber diameter measurements, OTDR Field Applications:
OTDR Trace-Attenuation Measurements and Fiber fault location.
Coupling: Source to Fiber Power Launching, Lensing Schemes for coupling
improvement, Fiber-to-Fiber Joints, LED Coupling to Single mode Fibers-
Fiber Splicing, Optical Connectors.

UNIT V OPTICAL COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS AND NETWORKS 9

Digital Transmission Systems, System design consideration, Point–to–Point
links, Link power budget, Rise time budget, WDM Concepts and Components,
Elements of optical networks, SONET/SDH, Optical Interfaces, SONET/SDH
Rings and Networks, Broadcast and select WDM Networks, Wavelength
Routed Networks, Optical ETHERNET, Solitons, All-Optical Networking,
Evolution, Benefits, Challenges, and Future Vision.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

137
 Syllabus ECE
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Gred Keiser, "Optical Fiber Communication”, McGraw Hill Education
(India) Private Limited, Fifth Edition, Reprint 2013.
2. John M. Senior, “Optical Fiber Communication”, Pearson Education, Second
Edition, 2007.

REFERENCES:
1. Rajiv Ramaswami, “Optical Networks”, Second Edition, Elsevier, 2004.
2. J.Gower, “Optical Communication System”, Prentice Hall of India, 2001.
3. Govind P. Agrawal, “Fiber Optic Communication Systems”, Third Edition,
John Wiley & sons, 2004.

WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://ieeexplore.ieee.org/abstract/document/6166843

ONLINE REFERENCES
1. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc18_ph06

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1. Realize basic elements in optical fibers, different modes and
configurations. (K2)
2. Analyze the transmission characteristics associated with dispersion and
polarization techniques. (K2)
3. Discuss optical sources, detectors, with their use in optical communication
system. (K2)
4. Construct fiber optic receiver systems, and coupling techniques. (K3)
5. Measure Optical fiber parameters and performance (K2)
6. Design optical communication systems and its networks. (K3)

138
 Syllabus ECE
CO - PO, PSO MAPPING:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 - - - - 2 2 1

CO2 3 3 2 2 3 1 - - - - - 2 2 1

CO3 3 3 3 1 2 - 1 - - - - - 2 1

CO4 3 3 3 1 2 - - - 1 1 - - 2 1

CO5 3 2 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - 2 1

CO6 2 1 - - - - 2 1 - - - - 2 1

SEMESTER - VII
20CSPC601 L T P C
ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE
SDG NO. 4 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l To understand the various characteristics of Intelligent agents
l To learn the different search strategies in AI
l To learn to represent knowledge in solving AI problems
l To understand the different ways of designing software agents and about
the various applications of AI

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction - De inition - Future of Arti icial Intelligence – Characteristics of
Intelligent Agents – Typical Intelligent Agents – Problem Solving Approach to
Typical AI Problems – Search Strategies - Uninformed - Heuristics - Informed.

UNIT II PROBLEM SOLVING METHODS 9

Local Search Algorithms and Optimization Problems - Searching with Partial
Observations – Constraint Satisfaction Problems – Constraint Propagation -
Backtracking Search - Game Playing – Optimal Decisions in Games – Alpha-
Beta Pruning - Stochastic Games.

UNIT III REPRESENTATION OF KNOWLEDGE 9

First Order Predicate Logic – Prolog Programming – Uni ication – Forward

139
 Syllabus ECE
Chaining - Backward Chaining – Resolution – Knowledge Representation -
Ontological Engineering - Categories and Objects - Events - Mental Events and
Mental Objects - Reasoning Systems for Categories - Reasoning with Default
Information.

UNIT IV PLANNING AND LEARNING 9

Planning – Planning with State Space Search- Partial Order Planning
Algorithm – Planning Graphs - Logical Formulation of Learning - Knowledge in
Learning - Explanation-based Learning - Learning using Relevance
Information.

UNIT V NATURAL LANGUAGE PROCESSING 9

Language models - Phrase Structure Grammars - Syntactic Analysis –
Augmented Grammars and Semantic Interpretation - Application with NLP:
Developing a Simple Chatbot - Types of Chatbot.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1 Stuart J Russell and Peter Norvig, "Arti icial Intelligence: A Modern
Approach”, Prentice Hall, Third Edition, 2009.
2 Elaine Rich, Kevin Knight, Shivashankar B. Nair, “Arti icial Intelligence”,
Tata McGraw-Hill Education, Third Edition, 2008.

REFERENCES:
1. M. Tim Jones, “Arti icial Intelligence: A Systems Approach(Computer
Science)”, Jones and Bartlett Publishers, Inc.; First Edition, 2008.
2. Nils J. Nilsson, “The Quest for Arti icial Intelligence”, Cambridge University
Press, 2009.
3. William F. Clocksin and Christopher S. Mellish, “Programming in Prolog:
Using the ISO Standard”, Springer, Fifth Edition, 2003.
4. George F Luger, “Arti icial Intelligence: Structures and Strategies for
Complex Problem Solving”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, Fifth Edition,
2017.
5. Steven Bird, Ewan Klein and Edward Loper, “Natural Language Processing
with Python”, O’Reilly, 2009, https://www.nltk.org/book/.
6. I. Bratko, “Prolog: Programming for Arti icial Intelligence”, Addison-
Wesley Educational Publishers Inc., Fourth Edition, 2011.

WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://books.google.co.in/books?id=uSvYmki2yg0C&printsec=
frontcover&dq=Supervised+Learning&hl=en&sa=X&ved=0ahUKE

140
 Syllabus ECE
wigkNa1xN3oAhWawjgGHe8hAzoQ6AEIKDAA#v=onepage&q=Sup
ervised% 20Learning&f=false

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students should be able to
1. Infer the agent characteristics and its problem solving approaches.(K2)
2. Select appropriate search algorithms for any AI problem.(K1)
3. Apply the principles of AI in game playing.(K3)
4. Construct and solve a problem using irst order and predicate logic.(K3)
5. Identify the methods of solving problems using planning and
learning.(K3)
6. Implement applications for Natural Language Processing that use
Arti icial Intelligence.(K3)

CO- PO, PSO MAPPING:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 2 3 2 3 2 1 1 - 1 - - 1 2 3

CO2 2 3 2 3 2 1 1 - 1 - - 1 3 3

CO3 2 3 2 3 2 1 1 - 1 - - 1 3 2

CO4 2 3 2 3 2 1 1 - 1 - - 1 3 3

CO5 2 3 2 3 3 1 1 - 2 - - 1 2 2

CO6 2 3 2 3 3 1 1 - 2 - - 1 2 3

SEMESTER - VII
20HSMG601 PRINCIPLES OF ENGINEERING L T P C
SDG NO. 4,8,9,10,12 MANAGEMENT 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
At the end of the course, the student is expected to
l Enable the students to study the evolution of Management
l Study the functions and principles of management
l Learn the application of the principles in an organization

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT AND ORGANIZATIONS 9

Management – Science or Art – Manager Vs Entrepreneur – types of managers
– Engineers as Managers. Evolution of Management – Scienti ic, human
141
 Syllabus ECE
relations, system and contingency approaches – Types of Business
organization – Sole proprietorship, partnership, company-public and private
sector enterprises – Organization culture and Environment – Current issues
and future trends in Management; Industry 4.0 – Engineering management in
modern business.

UNIT II PLANNING 9
Planning, Technology Planning - Nature and purpose of planning – planning
process – types of planning – objectives – setting objectives – policies –
Planning premises – MBO – process - Principles and functions of engineering
management – Planning Tools and Techniques – Decision making steps and
process.

UNIT III ORGANISING 9

Nature and purpose – Formal and informal organization – organization chart –
organization structure – types – Line and staff authority –departmentalization
– delegation of authority – centralization and decentralization – Job Design –
Human Resource Management – HR Planning, Recruitment, selection,
Training and Development, Performance Management, Career planning and
management.

UNIT IV DIRECTING AND CONTROLLING 9

Foundations of individual and group behaviour – Motivation – theories and
techniques–Leadership – Level 5 leadership - theories – Leadership as a
determinant of Engineering management - Communication – process and
barriers – effective communication – Communication and IT - System and
process of controlling – budgetary and non-budgetary control techniques.

UNIT IV DIRECTING AND CONTROLLING 9

Innovation management of Product and Services, Role of R & D in
Entrepreneurship, Breakthrough Innovation, Disruptive Innovation – Modern
approaches in Engineering management – Green management, Lean
management, Managing diversity. IPR – Principles of Ethics for Engineering
Managers.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Tripathy.P.C and Reddy.P.N, “Principles of Management”, Tata McGraw Hill,
1999.

REFERENCES:
1. Stephen P. Robbins and Mary Coulter, “Management”, Prentice Hall
(India) Pvt. Ltd., 10th Edition, 2009.
142
 Syllabus ECE
2. JAF Stoner, Freeman R. E. and Daniel R Gilbert, “Management”, Pearson
Education, 6th Edition, 2004.
3. Stephen A. Robbins and David A. Decenzo and Mary Coulter,
“Fundamentals of Management”, Pearson Education, 7th Edition, 2011.
4. Robert Kreitner and Mamata Mohapatra, “Management”, Biztantra,
2008.
5. Harold Koontz and Heinz Weihrich, “Essentials of Management”, Tata
McGraw Hill,1998.

WEB RESOURCES:
1. https://www.managementstudyguide.com/organization-
management.htm
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/110/105/110105034/
3. https://courses.lumenlearning.com/boundless-management/
chapter/principles-of-management/

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/110/105/110105033/

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students should be able to
1. Understand the evolution and basic concepts of engineering
management. (K2)
2. Demonstrate the planning concepts for effective decision making
process. (K2)
3. Describe the basic concepts of organization and its function. (K2)
4. Describe the ability to direct, leadership and communicate effectively.
(K2)
5. Apply the concepts of innovation and technology management.(K3)

CO – PO, PSO MAPPING :

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 3 1 - 1 2 3 3 2 1 1 1 - 1

CO2 3 2 - 2 1 3 - 1 1 1 1 1 - 1

CO3 3 1 - 1 1 1 1 - 1 1 1 1 - 1

CO4 3 2 - 1 1 1 - - 1 1 1 1 - 1

CO5 3 1 - 1 - - 1 - 1 1 1 1 - 1

143
 Syllabus ECE

SEMESTER - VII
20ECPL701 ADVANCED COMMUNICATION L T P C
SDG NO. 4,11,15 LABORATORY 0 0 3 1.5
OBJECTIVES:
The student should be made to:
l Understand the working principle of optical sources, detector, fibers.
l Develop understanding of simple optical communication link.
l Understand the measurement of BER and Pulse broadening.
l Understand and capture an experimental approach to digital wireless
communication.
l Understand actual communication waveforms that will be sent and
received across wireless channel.

LIST OF OPTICAL EXPERIMENTS

1. Measurement of connector, bending and fiber attenuation losses.
2. Numerical Aperture and Mode Characteristics of Fibers.
3. DC Characteristics of LED and PIN Photo diode.
4. Fiber optic Analog and Digital Link Characterization - frequency
response (analog), eye diagram and BER (digital).

LIST OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION EXPERIMENTS

1. Wireless Channel Simulation including fading and Doppler effects.
2. Simulation of Channel Estimation, Synchronization & Equalization
techniques.
3. Analysing Impact of Pulse Shaping and Matched Filtering using
Software Defined Radios.
4. OFDM Signal Transmission and Reception using Software Defined
Radios.

LIST OF MICROWAVE EXPERIMENTS

1. VSWR, Impedance Measurement and Impedance Matching.
2. Characterization of Directional Couplers, Isolators, Circulators.
3. Gunn Diode Characteristics.
4. Microwave IC – Filter Characteristics.
5. S parameters Characterization of RF/ Microwave components using
Vector Network Analyzer (VNA).
6. Analysis of RF Signals using Spectrum Analyzer.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
144
 Syllabus ECE
LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS 3 STUDENTS PER
EXPERIMENT:
S.NO NAME OF THE EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
1. Trainer kit for carrying out LED and PIN diode characteristics,
Digital multi meter and optical power meter 2
2. Trainer kit for determining the mode characteristics
and losses in optical fiber 2
3. Trainer kit for analyzing Analog and Digital link performance,
2 Mbps PRBS Data source, 10 MHz signal generator
and 20 MHz Digital storage Oscilloscope 2
4. Kit for measuring Numerical aperture and Attenuation of fiber 2
5. Advanced Optical fiber trainer kit for PC to PC
communication, BER Measurement and Pulse broadening. 2
6. MM/SM Glass and plastic fiber patch chords with
ST/SC/E2000 connectors 2
7. LEDs with ST / SC / E2000 receptacles – 650 / 850 nm 2
8. PIN PDs with ST / SC / E2000 receptacles – 650 / 850 nm 2
9. Digital Communications Teaching Bundle 2
10. LabVIEW/MATLAB/Equivalent software tools 2
11. Transmit/ Receive pair of NI USRP-2920 transceivers
(50 MHz to 2.2 GHz) 2

OUTCOMES:
On completion of this laboratory course, the student should be able to
1. Analyze the performance of simple optical link by measurement of
losses and analyzing the mode characteristics of fiber.(K2)
2. Understand the Eye Pattern, Pulse broadening of optical fiber and the
impact on BER.(K3)
3. Estimate the Wireless Channel Characteristics and analyze the
performance of the Wireless Communication System.(K2)
4. Understand the intricacies in Microwave System design.(K3)
5. Interpret the characteristics of active and passive microwave
components using measurable parameters.(K3)
6. Solve the problem of operation inefficiency by measuring and
tabulating the S-matrix.(K3).

145
 Syllabus ECE
CO - PO, PSO MAPPING
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 3 3 1 3 2 2 1 2 1 - 1 3 2

CO2 3 3 2 - - - 1 - - - - - 2 1

CO3 3 3 2 - - - 1 1 - 1 - 1 3 1

CO4 3 3 2 - 1 - 1 1 - 1 - - 2 2

CO5 3 3 2 - - - 1 1 - 1 - 1 3 2

CO6 3 3 2 1 1 - 1 2 - 1 - 1 3 2

SEMESTER - VII
20CSPL601 L T P C
ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE LABORATORY
SDG NO. 4 0 0 3 1.5

OBJECTIVES:
l To learn Prolog Program
l To Implement in Prolog, C and its working environment
l To Implement N-Queen problem and puzzle problem using Prolog
l To Analyze the problem using BFS and DFS algorithm

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS :
1. Study of Prolog.
2. Write simple fact for the statements using Prolog.
3. Write predicates - one converts centigrade temperature to Fahrenheit,
other checks if a temperature is below freezing.
4. Write a program to solve 4-Queen problem.
5. Write a program to solve 8-Puzzle problem.
6. Write a program to solve any problem using Breadth First Search.
7. Write a program to solve any problem using Depth First Search.
8. Write a program to solve Travelling Salesman Problem.
9. Write a program to solve Water Jug problem.
10. Write a program to solve Missionaries and Cannibal problem.
11. Write a program to implement Library Management System.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
LAB REQUIREMENTS :
SOFTWARE : Prolog, Turbo C

146
 Syllabus ECE
OUTCOMES:
On completion of this laboratory course, the student should be able to
1 Interpret the concepts of Turbo and Prolog programming in AI.(K3)
2 Examine First order predicate logic to solve AI problems. (K4)
3 Apply Informed search strategies to solve AI problems.(K3)
4 Apply Uninformed search strategies to solve AI problems.(K3)
5 Select State Space Searching method to solve AI problems.(K3)
6 Demonstrate an application using Natural Language Processing. (K3)

CO - PO, PSO MAPPING

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 2 1 2 - 1 - 1 - - - - - 1 2

CO2 3 2 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 2 2

CO3 3 2 1 - 2 - - - - - - 1 2 1

CO4 3 2 1 - 2 - - - - - - 1 2 1

CO5 2 2 2 - 1 - 1 - - - - - 2 2

CO6 2 2 1 2 2 - - - - - - - 2 1

SEMESTER - VII
20ECPJ701 L T P C
SDG NO. 4, 6,7,8, PROJECT PHASE - I
9,11,12,13, 17 0 0 4 2
OBJECTIVES:
l To develop the ability to solve a specific problem right from its
identification and literature review till the successful solution of the
same.
l To train the students face reviews and viva voce examination.

GUIDELINES TO BE FOLLOWED:
The students may be grouped into 3 to 4 and work under a project supervisor
and prepare a comprehensive project report after completing the work to the
satisfaction of the supervisor (faculty member). The progress of the project is
evaluated based on a minimum of three reviews. The review committee may be
constituted by the Head of the Department. A project report is required at the
end of the semester. The project work is evaluated based on oral presentation

147
 Syllabus ECE
and the project report jointly by external and internal examiners constituted
by the Head of the Department. The Project Work Phase-I will have the
following Sequence:

I. Problem Identification
1. A statement of system / process specifications proposed to be
developed (Block Diagram / Concept tree)
2. List of possible solutions including alternatives and constraints
3. Cost benefit analysis
4. Time Line of activities

II. A report highlighting the design finalization [based on functional

requirements and standards (if any)]

III. A presentation including the following:

1. Implementation Phase (Hardware / Software / both)
2. Testing and Validation of the developed system
3. Learning in the Project

IV. Consolidated report preparation

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students should be able to
1. Comprehend an industrial or real life problem and identify right/ real
issue with solution. (K2)
2. Analyze the necessary studies and review the literature, design a setup
of equipment, complete the analysis. (K3)
3. Compose a project report based on the findings. (K6)

CO- PO, PSO MAPPING :

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

Co1 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 3 3 3

CO2 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3

CO3 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 3 2 3 3 3 2

148
 SEMESTER - VII
20ECTP701 L T P C
SKILL ENHANCEMENT
SDG NO. 4 & 9 0 0 2 1
APTITUDE & TECHNICAL REFRESHER & COMPANY
SPECIFIC TRAINING AND TENSOR FLOW
OBJECTIVES:
l Enhance their quantitative ability.
l Enhance their reasoning ability
l Enhance their verbal ability.
l Understand the various layers and data loaders of Tensorflow
l Simulate various neural network models using tensor flow

UNIT I PRODUCT COMPANY SPECIFIC TRAINING – I 10

Product Specific Training for Amazon, Microsoft, IBM, ThoughtWorks, Juspay,
Paypal, Mu Sigma, Zoho Corporation, VM Ware, Directi, Oracle, Wells Fargo,
Goldman Sachs, Chargebee, Coda Global, Temenos, Freshworks, Adobe
Systems., Ernst and Young, BA Continuum, Standard Chartered, AON Hewitt,
Soliton Technologies, Payoda Technologies, Infoview Technologies, Athena
Health Technology.

UNIT II PRODUCT COMPANY SPECIFIC TRAINING – II 10

Product Specific Training for TCS, Wipro, TechMahindra, InfoView,
RobertBosch, NTT Data, Verizon, Payoda Technologies. CTS, Accenture,
MindTree, MPhasis, Odessa Technologies, Vuram Technologies, Hewlett
Packard, HCL.

UNIT III SERVICE COMPANY SPECIFIC TRAINING - I 10

Capgemini, Infosys, IBM, UGAM Solutions, Skava Systems, L&T Infotech,
Bahwan Cybertech, Dhyan Infotech.

UNIT IV BASICS OF TENSOR FLOW 8

Tensors- Create a Tensor - Tensor Operations - The nn.Module -A word about
Layers - Datasets and DataLoaders - Understanding Custom Datasets -
Understanding Custom DataLoaders

UNIT V TRAINING A NEURAL NETWORK 7

Training a Neural Network - Loss functions - Custom Loss Function -
Optimizers - Using GPU/Multiple GPUs
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS
149
REFERENCES :
1. Quantitative Aptitude for Competitive Exams by R. S. Agarwal
2. Quantum CAT by Sarvesh Verma
3. A Modern Approach to Logical Reasoning by R. S. Agarwal
4. Verbal Ability and Reading Comprehension by Arun Sharma
5 Neural Networks a Comprehensive Foundations, Simon Haykin, PHI
edition
6 Learn TensorFlow 2.0 by Pramod Singh, 1 st Edition Apress publisher.

ONLINE RESOURCES
1. https://www.tensorflow.org/guide/basics
2. https://www.javatpoint.com/tensorflow-introduction

OUTCOMES
Upon completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1. Apply quantitative and reasoning skills. (K3)
2. Improve verbal ability (K6)
3. Inculcate the training to the students in various MNCs. (K1)
4. Understand the various layers and data loaders of Tensorflow. [K2]
5. Design and implementation of neural networks with different
functions [K4]
6. Simulating the neural network models with tensor flow. [K3]

CO - PO - PSO MAPPING
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 2 2 3 2 2 1 - 2 1 - 2 1 -

CO2 - - - - 1 1 1 1 - 1 - 1 - -

CO3 1 2 2 3 1 3 - 1 2 1 - 2 2 -

CO4 2 2 2 3 2 2 1 - 2 1 1 2 2 2

CO5 2 2 2 3 3 2 1 - 1 1 1 2 2 2

CO6 2 2 2 3 3 2 1 - 2 1 1 2 2 2

150
 Syllabus ECE

SEMESTER - VIII
20ECPJ801
PROJECT PHASE-II L T P C
SDG NO. 4,6,7,
8, 9,11,12,13,17 0 0 8 4

OBJECTIVES:
l To develop the ability to solve a specific problem right from its
identification and literature review till the successful solution of the same.
l To train the students face reviews and viva voce examination

GUIDELINES TO BE FOLLOWED:
The students may be grouped into 3 to 4 and work under a project supervisor
and prepare a comprehensive project report after completing the work to the
satisfaction of the supervisor (faculty member). The progress of the project is
evaluated based on a minimum of three reviews. The review committee may
be constituted by the Head of the Department. A project report is required at
the end of the semester. The project work is evaluated based on oral
presentation and the project report jointly by external and internal examiners
constituted by the Head of the Department. The Project Work Phase-II will
have the following Sequence:
I. Problem Identification
1. A statement of system / process specifications proposed to be
developed (Block Diagram / Concept tree)
2. List of possible solutions including alternatives and constraints
3. Cost benefit analysis
4. Time Line of activities

II. A report highlighting the design finalization [based on functional

requirements and standards (if any)]

III. A presentation including the following

1. Implementation Phase (Hardware / Software / both)
2. Testing and Validation of the developed system
3. Learning in the Project

IV. Consolidated report preparation

TOTAL: 120 PERIODS

151
 Syllabus ECE

OUTCOMES :
Upon completion of the course, the students should be able to
1. Comprehend an industrial or real life problem and identify right/
real issue with solution. (K2)
2. Analyze the necessary studies and review the literature, design a
setup of equipment, complete the analysis. (K3)
3. Compose a project report based on the findings. (K6)

CO- PO, PSO MAPPING :

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 3 3 3

CO2 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3

CO3 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 3 2 3 3 3 2

152
 Syllabus ECE

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - I
20ECEL501 ADVANCED COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS L T P C
SDG NO. 4, 9 AND TECHNIQUES 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
l To learn about modern communication systems and techniques
l To deal with Information theory and channel capacity
l To learn source and channel coding techniques
l To acquire knowledge about Television systems
l To understand Satellite systems & orbits

UNIT I MODERN COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 9

Introduction to modern communication system, techniques and frequency
band allocation

UNIT II INFORMATION THEORY 9

Concept of amount of information, information units Entropy: marginal,
conditional, joint and relative entropies, relation among entropies Mutual
information, information rate, channel capacity.

UNIT III SOURCE CODING AND CHANNEL CODING 9

Introduction to source coding and channel coding techniques, Shannon Fano
coding, Shannon Fano Elias coding, Huffman coding, Parity check coding.

UNIT IV BASIC CONCEPT OF TELEVISION SYSTEM 9

Image characteristics; Interlaced scanning, horizontal and vertical resolution,
video bandwidth; Luminance and chrominance signals, composite video
signal; TV camera; Transceiver architecture for TV; Smart TVs: Digital TV and
video compression, HDTV, LED, LCD and Plasma TV.

UNIT V BASIC CONCEPT OF SATELLITE

COMMUNICATION SYSTEM 9
Introduction to satellite systems; Orbital period and velocity; Coverage angle
and slant range; Satellite link design; Multiple access techniques used in
satellite systems.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Haykin, S., “Communication Systems”, Fourth Edition, John Wiley & Sons,
2001.

153
 Syllabus ECE
2. Tomasi W., “Advanced Electronic Communication Systems”,
Pearson/Prentice-Hall, Sixth Edition. 2004.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Kennedy G., Davis B., “Electronic Communication Systems”, Tata McGraw-
Hill, Fourth Edition 2008.
2. Proakias, J.G., and Salehi, M., “Communication Systems Engineering”,
Second Edition, Pearson Education. 2002
3. Roddy, D. and Coolen, V., “Electronic Communications”, Fourth Edition
Prentice-Hall of India 1997.
4. B.P.Lathi, “Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems”, Third
Edition, Oxford University Press, 2007.
5. B.Sklar, “Digital Communications Fundamentals and Applications”,
Second Edition, Pearson Education, 2007.

WEB REFERENCES:
1 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108/102/108102117/
2 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117/108/117108097/
3 https://www.udemy.com/share/102l8U/

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1 https://www.coursera.org/learn/information-theory
2 https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical-engineering-and-computer
science/ 6-441-information-theory-spring-2016/

OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students should be able to:
1. Discuss advanced communication systems and techniques(K2)
2. Demonstrate the measurement of Information theory and coding (K2)
3. Explain Channel capacity and Entropy of modern communication
systems(K2)
4. Interpret the characteristics of television (K2)
5. Generalize the concept of satellite communication systems (K2)
6. Illustrate Smart TV systems (K2)

154
 Syllabus ECE
CO- PO, PSO MAPPING :
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 2 2 2 1 1 - - - - 1 1 3 2

CO2 3 3 3 3 3 1 - - - - 1 1 3 2

CO3 3 3 2 2 3 2 - - - - 2 2 3 2

CO4 3 3 3 2 3 2 - - - - 2 2 3 2

CO5 3 3 3 2 3 2 - - - - 2 2 3 2

CO6 3 3 3 2 3 2 - - - - 2 2 3 2

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - I
20ECEL502 L T P C
INDUSTRIAL IoT
SDG NO. 3,4,11,15 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l Introduce how IoT has become a game changer in the new economy
where the customers are looking for integrated value
l Bring the IoT perspective in thinking and building solutions
l Introduce the tools and techniques that enable IoT solution and Security
aspects

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Introduction to IOT, IOT Vs. IIOT, History of IIOT, Components of IIOT -Sensors,
Interface, Networks, People &Process, Hype cycle, IOT Market, Trends& future
Real life examples, Key terms – IOT Platform, Interfaces, API, clouds, Data
Management Analytics, Mining &Manipulation; Role of IIOT in Manufacturing
Processes Use of IIOT in plant maintenance practices, Sustainability through
Business excellence tools; Challenges & Benefits in implementing IIOT.

UNIT II ARCHITECTURES 9
Overview of IOT components; Various Architectures of IOT and IIOT,
Advantages & disadvantages, Industrial Internet - Reference Architecture;
IIOT System components: Sensors, Gateways, Routers, Modem, Cloud brokers,
servers and its integration, WSN,WSN network design for IOT.

155
 Syllabus ECE
UNIT III SENSOR AND INTERFACING 9
Introduction to sensors, Transducers, Classification, Roles of sensors in IIOT,
Various types of sensors, Design of sensors, sensor architecture, special
requirements for IIOT sensors, Role of actuators, types of actuators. Hardwire
the sensors with different protocols such as HART, MODBUS-Serial & Parallel,
Ethernet, BACNet , Current, M2M etc.

UNIT IV PROTOCOLS AND CLOUD 9

Need of protocols; Types of Protocols, Wi-Fi, Wi-Fi direct, Zigbee, Z wave,
Bacnet, BLE,Modbus, SPI , I2C, IIOT protocols –COAP, MQTT,6lowpan, lwm2m,
AMPQ IIOT cloud platforms : Overview of cots cloud platforms, predix,
thingworks, azure etc. Data analytics, cloud services, Business models: Saas,
Paas, Iaas.

UNIT V PRIVACY, SECURITY AND GOVERNANCE 9

Introduction to web security, Conventional web technology and relationship
with IIOT, Vulnerabilities of IoT, Privacy, Security requirements, Threat
analysis, Trust, IoT security tomography and layered attacker model, Identity
establishment, Access control, Message integrity, Non-repudiation and
availability, Security model for IoT, Network security techniques Management
aspects of cyber security.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1 Daniel Minoli, “Building the Internet of Things with IPv6 and MIPv6: The
Evolving World of M2M Communications”, ISBN: 978-1-118-47347-4,
Willy Publications
2 Bernd Scholz-Reiter, Florian 2. Michahelles, “Architecting the Internet of
Things”, ISBN 978-3- 642- 19156-5 e-ISBN 978-3-642-19157-2,
Springer

REFERENCES:
1. Hakima Chaouchi, “ The Internet of Things Connecting Objects to the
Web” ISBN : 978-1-84821-140-7, Willy Publications
2. Olivier Hersent, David Boswarthick, Omar Elloumi, The Internet of
Things: Key Applications and Protocols, ISBN: 978-1-119-99435-0, 2 nd
Edition, Willy Publications
3. Inside the Internet of Things (IoT), Deloitte University Press
4. Internet of Things- From Research and Innovation to Market
Deployment;By Ovidiu & Peter; River Publishers Series
5. Five thoughts from the Father of the Internet of Things; by By Phil
Wainewright – Kevin Ashton

156
 Syllabus ECE
6. How Protocol Conversion Addresses IIoT Challenges: White Paper By
RedLion.

WEB REFERENCES:
1 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106/105/106105195/
2 https://freevideolectures.com/course/4231/nptel-introduction-
industry-industrial-internet-things

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1 https://www.coursera.org/lecture/digital-thread-implementation/
the-industrial-internet-of-things-iiot-za9wH
2 https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc20_cs24/preview

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1. Review the components and key terms in IOT (K1)
2. Describe the architectures of IOT, IIOT (K1)
3. Understand, design and develop the real life IoT applications using off
the shelf hardware and software (K1)
4. Understand various IoT layers and their relative importance (K1)
5. Study various IoT platforms and Security (K1)
6. Realize the importance of Data Analytics in IoT (K1)

CO – PO, PSO MAPPING :

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 1 - - - - - - - - 1 1 1 1

CO2 3 1 2 2 - 2 - - - - 2 2 3 2

CO3 3 1 3 2 - 2 - - - - 2 2 3 2

CO4 3 1 3 2 - 2 - - - - 2 2 3 2

CO5 3 1 3 2 2 2 - - - - 2 2 3 2

CO6 3 1 3 2 2 2 - - 2 3 2 2 3 2

157
 Syllabus ECE

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - I
20ECEL503 L T P C
FPGA AND ASIC DESIGN
SDG No. 04,09 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
l To learn the architecture of different types of FPGA
l To familiarize the different types of programming technologies and
logic devices.
l To study the design flow of different types of ASIC.
l To analyze the synthesis, Simulation and testing of systems.
l To understand the design issues of SOC.

UNIT I FPGA 9
Field Programmable gate arrays- Logic blocks, routing architecture, Design
flow technology - mapping for FPGAs, Xilinx XC4000 - ALTERA’s FLEX
8000/10000, ACTEL’s ACT-1,2,3 and their speed performance Case studies:
Altera MAX 5000 and 7000 - Altera MAX 9000 – Spartan II and Virtex II FPGAs -
Apex and Cyclone FPGAs

UNIT II OVERVIEW OF ASIC AND PLD 9

Types of ASICs - Design flow – CAD tools used in ASIC Design – Programming
Technologies: Antifuse – static RAM – EPROM and EEPROM technology,
Programmable Logic Devices: ROMs and EPROMs – PLA –PAL. Gate Arrays –
CPLDs and FPGAs

UNIT III ASIC PHYSICAL DESIGN 9

System partition -partitioning - partitioning methods – interconnect delay
models and measurement of delay - floorplanning - placement – Routing :
global routing - detailed routing - special routing - circuit extraction - DRC

UNIT IV LOGIC SYNTHESIS, SIMULATION AND TESTING 9

Design systems - Logic Synthesis - Half gate ASIC -Schematic entry - Low level
design language - PLA tools -EDIF- CFI design representation. Verilog and logic
synthesis -VHDL and logic synthesis - types of simulation -boundary scan test -
fault simulation - automatic test pattern generation.

UNIT V SOC DESIGN 9

Design Methodologies – Processes and Flows - Embedded software
development for SOC – Techniques for SOC Testing – Configurable SOC –

158
 Syllabus ECE
Hardware / Software codesign Case studies: Digital camera, Bluetooth radio /
modem, SDRAM and USB.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1 John V. Oldfield, Richard C Dore, Field Programmable Gate Arrays, Wiley
Publications1995.
2 M.J.S .Smith, "Application Specific Integrated Circuits, Addison -Wesley
Longman Inc.,1997
3 R. Rajsuman, System-on-a-Chip Design and Test. Santa Clara, CA: Artech
House Publishers, 2000.

REFERENCES:
1 S. Trimberger, Field Programmable Gate Array Technology, Edr, Kluwer
Academic Publications, 1994.
2 John V.Oldfield, Richard C Dore, Field Programmable Gate Arrays, Wiley
Publications1995
3 P.K.Chan & S. Mourad, Digital Design Using Field Programmable Gate
Array, Prentice Hall, 1994.
4 Parag.K.Lala, Digital System Design using Programmable Logic Devices ,
BSP, 2003.
5 S. Brown, R. Francis, J. Rose, Z. Vranesic, Field Programmable Gate
Array, Kluwer Pubin, 1992.
6 Wayne Wolf, FPGA-Based System Design, Prentice Hall PTR, 2004

WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117108040/
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117106092/
3. https://freevideolectures.com/course/2327/vlsi-circuits/23
4. https://freevideolectures.com/course/2327/vlsi-circuits/51

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://www.intel.com/content/dam/www/programmable/us/
en/pdfs/literature/an/an311.pdf
2. https://www.intrinsix.com/soc-design-fpga-design
3. https://hardwarebee.com/fpga-vs-asic-difference/

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1 Describe the basic architecture types in FPGA.(K2

159
 Syllabus ECE
2 Interpret different types of programming technologies and logic
devices.(K2)
3 Analyze the synthesis, Simulation and testing of systems.(K4)
4 Describe the basic architecture types in ASIC. (K2)
5 Apply different high performance algorithms in ASICs.(K3)
6 Discuss the design issues of SOC.(K2)

CO - PO, PSO MAPPING :

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 2 2 1 - 1 - - - - - 2 3 2

CO2 3 2 2 3 3 1 2 - 1 - 1 2 2 2

CO3 3 2 1 3 3 1 - - 1 - - 2 2 2

CO4 3 2 2 1 - 1 - - - - - 2 3 2

CO5 3 2 1 2 1 2 - - - - - 2 2 1

CO6 3 2 1 3 3 2 2 - - - 1 2 3 2

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - I
20ECEL504 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC L T P C
SDG NO 04,09 CONTROLLERS 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l To impart knowledge on the principle and working of Programmable
Logic Controllers
l To learn PLC programming.
l To study Ladder Logic Diagrams.
l To implement Counter and Timer logic.
l To understand PLC Functions.

UNIT I PLC BASICS AND PROGRAMMING 9

PLC system, I/O modules and interfacing, CPU processor, programming
Equipment, programming formats, construction of PLC ladder diagrams,
Devices connected to I/O modules. Input instructions, outputs, operational
procedures, programming examples using contacts and coils.

160
 Syllabus ECE
UNIT II LADDER DIAGRAMS AND REGISTERS 9
Digital logic gates, programming in the Boolean algebra system, conversion
examples Ladder Diagrams for process control: Ladder diagrams & sequence
listings, ladder diagram construction and flowchart for spray process system.
PLC Registers: Characteristics of Registers, module addressing, holding
registers, Input Registers, Output Registers.

UNIT III PLC FUNCTIONS 9

Timer functions & Industrial applications, counters, counter function
industrial applications, Arithmetic functions, Number comparison functions,
number conversion functions. Data Handling functions: SKIP, Master control
Relay, Jump, Move, FIFO, FAL, ONS, CLR & Sweep functions and their
applications.

UNIT IV ANALOG PLC OPERATION 9

Analog modules & systems, Analog signal processing, Multi bit Data
Processing, Analog output Application Examples, PID principles, position
indicator with PID control, PID Modules, PID tuning, PID functions.

UNIT V TIMERS AND COUNTERS 9

Timer Instructions: ON Delay timer instruction, Retentive Timer, Cascading
Timers, Example: Industrial Applications, Industrial Process Timing
Applications. Counter Instructions: Up counter, Down Counter and
Up/Down Counter instructions, Cascading Counters, Combining counter and
Timer Functions.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1 Programmable Logic Controllers- Principles and Applications by John W.
Webb & Ronald A. Reiss, Fifth Edition, PHI, 2009.
2 Programmable Logic Controllers- Programming Method and
Applications JR. Hackworth &F.D Hackworth Jr. Pearson, 2004.

REFERENCES:
1 Programmable logic controller by Frank D. Petruzella, Tata McGraw-Hill
publication,2007.
2 Introduction to programmable logic controller by Gary dunning,Thomson
Asia Pte Ltd.Publication, Singapore
3 Sinha, Priyabrata,” Speech Processing in Embedded Systems”,Springer
2010.

161
 Syllabus ECE
4 Programmable Logic Controllers: Principles and Applications by John W.
Webb and Ronald A.Reis,Prentice – Hall India publication,Fifth
edition,2009
5 Programmable Logic Controllers by W. Bolton, Elsevier Newnes
publication, Fourth edition,2007.
6 Programmable Controllers An engineer’s guide by E.A.Parr, Elsevier
Newnes publication Third edition 2008.

WEB REFERENCES:
1 h t t p s : / / e l e c t r i c a l - e n g i n e e r i n g - p o r t a l . c o m / re s o u rc e s / p l c -
programming-training
2 https://udemy.com/plc
3 https://www.solisplc.com/tutorials/how-to-read-ladder-logic

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1 https://www.intechopen.com/books/programmable-logic-controller
2 https://www.intechopen.com/books/programmable-logic-
controller/new -applications -using-plcs-in-access-netWorks

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1 Describe the working of PLCs. (K2)
2 Develop programs for simple applications(K3)
3 Design Ladder Diagrams for the process.(K3)
4 Write PLC programs using Functions (K3)
5 Create Analog PLC systems.(K4)
6 Define the Timer and Counter Functions.(K2)

CO - PO, PSO MAPPING :

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 3 3 1 - 1 - - - - - 2 3 2

CO2 3 3 3 3 3 1 - - - - - 2 2 2

CO3 3 3 3 3 3 1 - - - - - 2 2 2

CO4 3 3 3 2 1 2 -- - - - - 2 2 2

CO5 3 3 3 3 3 2 - - - -- - 2 3 2

CO6 3 3 3 3 1 2 - - - - - 2 3 2

162
 Syllabus ECE
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - I
20ECEL505 L T P C
SENSORS AND RFID
SDG NO. 4, 9, 11 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l To acquire knowledge in different types passive sensors
l To get insight about self generating sensor.
l To realize the applications of sensors
l To Understand and designing Radio frequency identification (RFID)
systems, middleware architectures for real-world applications.

UNIT I PASSIVE SENSORS 9

Sensor classification, primary sensors, magnetoresistors, light dependent
resistors, resistive hygrometers, resistive gas sensors, liquid conductivity
sensors, capacitive sensors, inductive sensors, electromagnetic sensors.

UNIT II SELF GENERATING, DIGITAL AND INTELLIGENT SENSORS 9

Thermoelectric sensor, Piezoelectric sensor, Pyroelectric sensor, Photovoltaic
sensor, electrochemical sensors, position encoder, resonant sensors, SAW
sensors, Digital flow meter.

UNIT III SENSORS BASED ON SEMICONDUCTORS 9

Thermometer based on semiconductor junction, magnetodiode,
magnetotransistor, photodiode phototransistor, sensors based on MOSFET,
Charge coupled sensors, CCD imaging sensors, Ultrasonic based sensors.

UNIT IV OVERVIEW OF RFID TECHNOLOGY 9

Introduction- Core components of RFID systems-RFID Tags- RFID
Interrogators- RFID Controllers- Frequency- selection criteria for RFID
systems- Automatic identification and data capture systems- Smart Tags vs.
Barcodes- RFID technology in supply chain management.

UNIT V RFID MIDDLEWARE AND INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY

INTEGRATION 9
RFID Middleware- Recent focus on middleware- Core functions of RFID
middleware- Middle ware as part of an RFID system-The EPC architecture-
Present state of middleware development-Applications of RFID Technology.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

163
 Syllabus ECE
TEXT BOOKS:
1 Sensors and Signal Conditioning, Ramó n Pallá s-Areny, John G. Webster,
Second Edition published by Wiley 2012
2 Amin Rida and Manos M. Tentzeris, RFID-Enabled Sensor Design and
Applications (Artech House Integrated Microsystems), 2011, First edition,
Artech House Publishers, UK.

REFERENCES:
1 Miodrag Bolic, David Simplot-Ryl, and Ivan Stojmenovic, RFID Systems:
Research Trends and Challenges, 2011,First edition., Wiley, USA
2 John Vetelino, Aravind Reghu, Introduction to Sensors, 2020, First edition.,
2011, CRC Press

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1 Design sensor systems (K2)
2 Describe a smart systems (K1)
3 Explain the operating principles and applications of sensors (K1)
4 Design systems using Sensors based on Semiconductors. (K3)
5 Understand the components of RFID technology and its concepts (K1)
6 Design a RF component or a product applying the standards and with
realistic constraints at a rudimentary level. (R3)

CO - PO - PSO MAPPING :
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 - 1 1 1 1 3 2

CO2 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 - 1 1 1 1 3 2

CO3 3 3 3 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 3 3

CO4 3 2 3 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2

CO5 3 3 3 1 1 1 2 - 1 1 1 1 3 2

CO6 3 3 3 1 1 1 2 - 1 1 1 1 3 2

164
 Syllabus ECE

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - I
20ECEL506 SUSTAINABLE ENERGY AND L T P C
SDG NO. 4, 9, 11 ENERGY MANAGEMENT 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l To provide students with a general awareness on the importance of
energy and its conservation, its impact on society.
l To enable students with different backgrounds to understand the
different aspects of energy engineering.
l To understand the various energy sources, energy conversion processes
l To understand the energy management, energy audit and energy
conservation measures
l To understand the economic aspects of renewable energy based power
generation.

UNIT I SUSTAINABLE ENERGY RESOURCES 9

Energy resources, Energy conversion processes and devices – Energy
conversion plants – Conventional - Thermal, Hydro, Nuclear fission , and Non –
conventional – Solar, Wind Biomass, Fuel cells, Magneto Hydrodynamics and
Nuclear fusion. Energy from waste, Energy plantation.

UNIT II ENERGY MANAGEMENT 9

Energy Management – Definitions and significance – objectives
–Characterizing of energy usage – Energy Management program – Energy
strategies and energy planning Energy Audit – Types and Procedure –
Optimum performance of existing facilities – Energy management control
systems – Computer applications in Energy management.

UNIT III ENERGY CONSERVATION 9

Energy conservation – Principles – Energy economics – Energy conservation
technologies – cogeneration – Waste heat recovery – Combined cycle power
generation – Heat Recuperators – Heat regenerators – Heat pipes – Heat
pumps – Pinch Technology Energy Conservation Opportunities.

UNIT IV SOCIO-ECONOMICAL ASPECTS OF ENERGY RESOURCES 9

General concepts-Economical impacts Rural development, Poverty
alleviation, Employment; Security of supply and use Environmental and
ethical concerns Economical aspects of renewable energy systems vs large
hydro and thermal power projects.

165
 Syllabus ECE
UNIT V SUSTAINABILITY ISSUES OF ENERGY USE AND
INTERNATIONAL TREATIES & CONVENTION ON
ENVIRONMENTAL MITIGATION 9
Externalities - Future Energy Systems – Clean Energy Technologies United
Nations Frameworks Convention on climate change (UNFCC) Various
convention and treaties at international level aiming at CO2 mitigation
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Amlan Chakrabarti, Energy Engineering and Management, Prentice Hall
India, 2011
2. Rai G. D., Non-conventional Energy Sources, Khanna Publishers, 2011.
3. Eastop T. D. and D. R. Croft, Energy Efficiency for Engineers &
Technologists, Longman, 1990.
4. Albert Thumann P. E. and W. J. Younger, Handbook of Energy Audits,
Fairmont Press, 2008

REFERENCES:
1. Ristinen RA. Kraushaar JJ. Energy and the Environment, Second edition,
John Wilet & Sons, 2006
2. Banerjee BP. Handbook of Energy and Environment in India, Oxford
University Press, 2005.
3. MC Dass, Fundamentals of Ecology, Tata McGraw Hill, 1994
4. Kaushik ND. Kaushik K. Energy, Ecology & Environment, Capital
Publishing, 2004.
5. De AK. Environmental hemistry, New Age International Publishers, 2005

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to:
1 Realize the impact of energy on society (K2)
2 Describe the need for sustainable energy, global and Indian energy
policies. (K1)
3 Gain knowledge on various techniques of energy management and
conservation. (K1)
4 Explain the basic ideas of renewable energy sources. (K1)
5 Gain insight in specialist manpower required to meet the challenges
of the energy sector. (K1)
6 Understand the economic aspects of renewable energy based power
generation. (K1)

166
 Syllabus ECE
CO - PO, PSO MAPPING :
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 - 2 3 2 2 3 2

CO2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 - 2 3 3 3 3 2

CO3 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 1 3 2 3 3 3 3

CO4 3 2 3 2 3 2 2 1 3 2 2 2 2 2

CO5 3 3 3 3 2 1 2 - 2 2 2 3 3 2

CO6 3 3 3 3 2 1 2 - 2 2 2 3 3 2

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - I
20ECEL507 L T P C
SENSORS AND MEASUREMENTS
SDG NO. 4, 9, 11 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l To understand the purpose of measurement, the methods of
measurements, errors associated with measurements.
● To know the principle of transduction, classifications and the
characteristics of different transducers and study its biomedical
applications.
● To know the different display and recording devices.

UNIT I SCIENCE OF MEASUREMENT 9

Measurement System – Instrumentation – Classification and Characteristics of
Transducers – Static and Dynamic – Errors in Measurements – Calibration –
Primary and secondary standards.

UNIT II DISPLACEMENT, PRESSURE, TEMPERATURE SENSORS 9

Resistive Transducers: Strain Gauge: Gauge factor, sensing elements,
configuration, biomedical applications; strain gauge as displacement &
pressure transducers, RTD materials & range, Characteristics, thermistor
characteristics, biomedical applications of Temperature sensors Capacitive
transducer, Inductive transducer, LVDT, Active type: Thermocouple
–characteristics.

UNIT III PHOTOELECTRIC AND PIEZOELECTRIC SENSORS 9

Phototube, scintillation counter, Photo Multiplier Tube (PMT), photovoltaic,

167
 Syllabus ECE
Photoconductive cells, photo diodes, phototransistor, comparison of
photoelectric transducers, spectrophotometric applications of photo electric
transducers. Piezoelectric active transducer and biomedical applications as
pressure & Ultrasound transducer.

UNIT IV SIGNAL CONDITIONING & SIGNAL ANALYSER 9

AC and DC Bridges – Wheatstone bridge, Kelvin, Maxwell, Hay, Schering –
Concepts of filters, Pre-amplifier – impedance matching circuits – isolation
amplifier. Spectrum analyzer.

UNIT V DISPLAY AND RECORDING DEVICES 9

Digital voltmeter – Multimeter – CRO – block diagram, CRT – vertical &
horizontal deflection system, DSO, LCD monitor, PMMC writing systems, servo
recorders, photographic recorder, magnetic tape recorder, Inkjet recorder,
thermal recorder. Demonstration of the display and recording devices.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Doebelin E.O. and Manik D.N., “Measurement Systems”, Tata McGraw-Hill
Education Pvt. Ltd., Sixth Edition, 2011.
2. L.A Geddes and L.E.Baker, “Principles of Applied Biomedical
Instrumentation”, John Wiley and sons, Third Edition, Reprint 2008.

REFERENCES:
1. A . K . S a w h n e y, “ E l e c t r i c a l & E l e c t r o n i c s M e a s u r e m e n t a n d
Instrumentation”, Dhanpat Rai&Co, New Delhi, Seventeenth Edition, 2004.
2. Khandpur R.S, “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw
Hill, New Delhi, Third Edition, 2014.
3. Leslie Cromwell, Fred J. Weibell, Erich A. Pfeiffer, “Biomedical
Instrumentation and Measurement”, Prentice Hall India Pvt. Ltd, New
Delhi, Second Edition, Reprint, 2013.
4. Albert D.Helfricka n d W i l l i a m D . C o o p e r, “ M o d e r n E l e c t r o n i c
Instrumentation and Measurement Techniques”, Prentice Hall of India,
2007
5. John G.Webster,Medical Instrumentation Application and Design,fourth
edition,Wiley India Pvt Ltd,New Delhi.

ONLINE RESOURCE
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108/108/108108147/

168
 Syllabus ECE
WEB RESOURCES
1. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=q8UuRkOQ9A0
2. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=7TabKYSbdH4

COURSE OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to:
1 Classify different methods of measurements.(K2)
2 Discuss the principle of different sensors and its applications.(K2)
3 Analyze the characteristics of different transducers.(K4)
4 Analyse the function of various signal conditioning circuits. (K4)
5 Distinguish different display and recording devices for various
applications.(K2)
6 Classify the application of sensors and transducer on biomedical
applications.(K2)

CO – PO, PSO MAPPING:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 - - - - 2 - - - - - 2 1 1

CO2 3 3 3 3 - - − − - 2 - 2 1 1

CO3 3 3 3 3 - - − − - − - 2 1 1

CO4 3 3 3 3 − − - - - - - 2 1 1

CO5 3 − − 3 - - − − - − - 3 1 1

CO6 3 2 2 2 − 3 − − - − − 2 1 1

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - I
20ECEL508 L T P C
CONTROL SYSTEMS ENGINEERING
SDG NO. 4, 9, 11 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l Describe the Modeling of Electrical & Mechanical systems &
representation of systems
l Test the time domain analysis of control systems required for stability
analysis
l Test the frequency domain analysis
l Examine the stability analysis of control systems
l Design of compensators
169
 Syllabus ECE
UNIT I SYSTEM MODELLING AND REPRESENTATION 9
Control System: Terminology and Basic Structure-Feedforward and Feedback
control theory- Electrical and Mechanical Transfer Function Models-AC and
DC servomotors-Block diagram Models-Signal flow graphs models.

UNIT II TIME RESPONSE ANALYSIS 9

Transient response-steady state response-Measures of performance of the
standard first order and second order system-effect on an additional zero and
an additional pole-steady error constant and system- type number-PID
control-Analytical design for PD, PI, PID control systems.

UNIT III FREQUENCY RESPONSE AND SYSTEM ANALYSIS

Closed loop frequency response-Performance specification in frequency
domain-Frequency response of standard second order system- Bode Plot -
Polar Plot- Nyquist plots.

UNIT IV STABILITY ANALYSIS 9

Concept of stability-Bounded - Input Bounded - Output stability-Routh
stability criterion-Relative stability-Root locus concept-Guidelines for
sketching root locus-Nyquist stability criterion.

UNIT V COMPENSATOR DESIGN AND STATE VARIABLE MODEL 9

Compensators: Performance criteria – Lag and Lead compensators
networks– Design of Lag, Lead and Lag-Lead compensators using Bode plot
method. Concepts of State, State variable, State model-State models for simple
electrical system– Phase variable model – Canonical model- Controllability
and Observability using Kalman’s test method.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. M.Gopal, “Control System–Principles and Design”, Tata McGraw Hill,
Fourth Edition, 2012.
2. Norman Nise, “Control System Engineering” John Wiley & Sons, Sixth
Edition, 2011.

REFERENCES:
1. J.Nagrath and M.Gopal, “Control System Engineering”, New Age
International Publishers, Fifth Edition, 2007.
2. Katsuhiko Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering”, Fifth Edition, Prentice
Hall of India, 2012.
3. S.K.Bhattacharya, “Control System Engineering”, Third Edition, Pearson,
2013.
170
 Syllabus ECE
4. Benjamin.C.Kuo, “Automatic Control Systems”, Prentice Hall of India, 7th
Edition, 1995.
5. Katsuhiko Ogata, “Discrete time control systems”, Second Edition, Prentice
Hall of India, 1995.

WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108106098/
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108101037/

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://lecturenotes.in/notes/15854-note-for-control-system-
engineering-cse-by-amity-kumar
2. https://lecturenotes.in/notes/23763-note-for-control-system-
engineering-cse-by-suman-kumar-acharya

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to:
1 Develop a mathematical model for a given system in Laplace domain and
time domain.(K2)
2 Compute transfer function of systems modeled as block diagram/signal
flow graph/state space representation.(K2)
3 Derive the output response and steady state error of first order and second
order control systems for standard input signals.(K2)
4 Find the closed loop frequency response and open loop frequency
response using Bode plot/ Polar plot/ Nyquist plot.(K3)
5 Determine stability of a system using Routh Hurwitz / Root locus/ Nyquist
criterion.(K3)
6 Design controllers, lag and lead compensator for desired system
performance.(K3)

CO - PO - PSO MAPPING
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 2 2 3 - - - - - 2 - - 1 2 2

CO2 2 2 3 - - - - - 2 - - 1 2 2

CO3 2 2 3 - - - - - 2 - - 1 2 2

CO4 2 2 3 - - - - - 2 - - 1 2 2

CO5 2 2 2 - - - - - 2 - - 1 2 2

CO6 2 2 2 - - - - - 2 - - 1 2 2
171
 Syllabus ECE

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - I
20ECEL509
SOFT COMPUTING L T P C
SDG NO. 4, 9, 11 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
l To learn the basic concepts of Soft Computing
l To become familiar with various techniques like neural networks,
genetic algorithms and fuzzy systems.
l To apply soft computing techniques to solve problems.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO SOFT COMPUTING 9

Introduction-Artificial Intelligence-Artificial Neural Networks-Fuzzy
Systems-Genetic Algorithm and Evolutionary Programming-Swarm
Intelligent Systems-Classification of ANNs-McCulloch and Pitts Neuron
Model-Learning Rules: Hebbian and Delta- Perceptron Network-Adaline
Network-Madaline Network.

UNIT II ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS 9

Back propagation Neural Networks - Kohonen Neural Network -Learning
Vector Quantization -Hamming Neural Network - Hopfield Neural Network-
Bi-directional Associative Memory -Adaptive Resonance Theory Neural
Networks- Support Vector Machines - Spike Neuron Models.

UNIT III FUZZY SYSTEMS 9

Introduction to Fuzzy Logic, Classical Sets and Fuzzy Sets - Classical Relations
and Fuzzy Relations -Membership Functions -Defuzzification - Fuzzy
Arithmetic and Fuzzy Measures - Fuzzy Rule Base and Approximate Reasoning
- Introduction to Fuzzy Decision Making.

UNIT IV GENETIC ALGORITHMS 9

Basic Concepts- Working Principles -Encoding- Fitness Function -
Reproduction - Inheritance Operators - Cross Over - Inversion and Deletion -
Mutation Operator - Bit-wise Operators -Convergence of Genetic Algorithm.

UNIT V HYBRID SYSTEMS 9

Hybrid Systems -Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic and Genetic -GA Based Weight
Determination - LR-Type Fuzzy Numbers - Fuzzy Neuron - Fuzzy BP
Architecture - Learning in Fuzzy BP- Inference by Fuzzy BP - Fuzzy ArtMap: A
Brief Introduction - Soft Computing Tools - GA in Fuzzy Logic Controller Design

172
 Syllabus ECE
- Fuzzy Logic Controller
TOTAL :45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:
1. S.N.Sivanandam , S.N.Deepa, "Principles of Soft Computing", Wiley India
Pvt.Ltd., Second Edition, 2011.
2. S.Rajasekaran, G.A.Vijayalakshmi Pai, "Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic and
Genetic Algorithm, Synthesis and Applications ", PHI Learning Pvt.Ltd.,
2017.

REFERENCES:
1 Jyh-Shing Roger Jang, Chuen-Tsai Sun, Eiji Mizutani, "Neuro-Fuzzy and
Soft Computing", Prentice-Hall of India, 2002.
2 Kwang H.Lee, "First course on Fuzzy Theory and Applications", Springer,
2005.
3. James A. Freeman and David M. Skapura, "Neural Networks Algorithms,
Applications, and Programming Techniques", Addison Wesley, 2003.
4. George J. Klir and Bo Yuan, "Fuzzy Sets and Fuzzy Logic-Theory and
Applications", Prentice Hall, 1996.
5. N.P.Padhy, S.P.Simon, "Soft Computing with MATLAB Programming",
Oxford University Press, 2015.

WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S1877050
916325467
2. https://www.worldscientific.com/worldscibooks/10.1142/3706

ONLINE COURSES.
1. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc22_cs54/preview
2. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=K9gjuXjJeEM

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to:
1. Differentiate the principle behind Soft computing techniques and
conventional AI techniques (K2)
2. Describe Artificial neural network, fuzzy logic and Genetic algorithm
concepts (K2)
3. Demonstrate evolutionary and fuzzy techniques to provide human like
expertise.(K3)

173
 Syllabus ECE
4. Apply ANN models and Fuzzy logic principles for industrial and societal
application(K3)
5. Apply hybrid soft computing techniques to handle uncertain and
imprecise environment(K3)
6. Apply soft computing tools to provide solutions to complex real life
problems.(K3)

CO - PO - PSO MAPPING
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 2 1 1 2 2 2 1 - - - 2 2 3 2

CO2 3 2 3 2 1 2 1 - - - 2 2 3 2

CO3 3 3 3 3 2 3 - - - - 2 2 3 2

CO4 3 3 3 2 3 2 1 - - - 2 2 3 2

CO5 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 - - - 2 2 3 2

CO6 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 - - - 2 2 3 2

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - I
20ECEL510 L T P C
BIOSIGNAL AND IMAGE PROCESSING
SDG NO. 4, 9, 11 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l To understand the characteristics of standard and biomedical signals
l To gain knowledge about the various electrical and non electrical
physiological parameters and methods of recording and transmitting
these parameters.
l To gain knowledge in removing the noise and artifacts in biomedical
signals.
l To provide fundamentals of the image in time and frequency domain
l To understand the basic concepts of image enhancement, image
restoration, image segmentation, feature extraction in medical images

UNIT I CLASSIFICATION OF BIOMEDICAL SIGNALS 10

Introduction- Overview of CT and DT signals, Sources and recording systems
of biomedical signals- Electrocardiogram (ECG), Electroencephalogram
(EEG), Electromyogram (EMG), Electrooculogram (EOG), Electroretinogram
(ERG), Types of electrodes.
174
 Syllabus ECE
UNIT II TIME SERIES ANALYSIS AND SPECTRAL ESTIMATION 7
Time series analysis-linear prediction models-Time variant systems- Adaptive
segmentations - spectral Estimation-Blackman Tuckey method - Periodogram
and model based estimation.

UNIT III FILTERING TECHNIQUES 10

Time-domain Filters - synchronized averaging, Moving Average Filters,
Derivative-based operators to remove low-frequency artifacts. Frequency-
domain filters - Removal of High Frequency noise, Removal of low frequency
noise.

UNIT IV FUNDAMENTALS OF IMAGE PROCESSING 9

Image perception, MTF of the visual system, Image fidelity criteria, Image
model, Image sampling and quantization – two dimensional sampling theory,
Image quantization, Optimum mean square quantizer, Image transforms – 2D-
DFT and other transforms.

UNIT V BIO-MEDICAL IMAGE PROCESSING 9

Principles behind X-ray, CT,MRI and Ultrasound imaging process, pre-
processing- Image Enhancement operations – Image noise and modelling,
Image restoration – Image degradation model, Inverse and Weiner filtering,
Geometric transformations and correction, Overview of image segmentation
and Feature extraction
TOTAL:L+T=45PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Allan V.Oppenheim, S.Wilsky and S.H.Nawab, “Signals and Systems”,
Pearson, 2015
2. Leslie Cromwell, “Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurement”,
Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2007.
3. Rafael C.Gonzalez and Richard E.Woods, “Digital Image Processing”, Third
Edition, Pearson Education, 2008, New Delhi
4. Anil J Jain, “Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing”, Prentice Hall of
India 2006

REFERENCES:
1. Khandpur, R.S., “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”, TATA Mc
Graw-Hill, New Delhi, 2003.
2. John G.Webster, “Medical Instrumentation Application and Design”, Third
Edition, Wiley India Edition, 2007.

175
 Syllabus ECE
3. Joseph J.Carr and John M.Brown, “Introduction to Biomedical Equipment
Technology”, JohnWiley and Sons, New York, 2004.
4. https://www.physio-pedia.com/Medical_Imaging.
5. Atam P.Dhawan, “Medical Image Analysis”, Wiley Interscience Publication.
6. NJ S.Sridhar, “Digital Image Processing”, Oxford University Press, 2011,
New Delhi.
7. Alasdair McAndrew, “Introduction to Digital Image Processing with
Matlab”, Cengage Learning 2011, India.
8. John L.Semmlow, “Biosignal and Biomedical Image Processing Matlab
Based applications”, Marcel Dekker Inc., New York,2004

WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://youtu.be/cebsXYLw4V4
2. https://youtu.be/4fPFBUsk6ec
3. https://youtu.be/UhgedHMxvjw

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108/105/108105101/
2. https://www.digimat.in/nptel/courses/video/108105101/L12.html
3. https://www.digimat.in/nptel/courses/video/108105101/L34.html

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to:
1 Summarize the fundamental concepts of various biomedical signals
and images(K2)
2 Identify the amplitude and frequency of ECG, EEG, EMG & PCG and employ
various time series analysis (K2)
3 Examine the lead systems and recording setup of ECG, EEG, EMG & PCG for
diagnosis.(K2)
4 Apply appropriate time domain and frequency domain filters on
biomedical signals and biomedical images to remove artifacts and to
enhance images. (K3)
5 Apply appropriate degradation and restoration models on medical images
to recover the original image from degraded image.(K3)
6 Discuss types of image segmentation and feature extraction of medical
images for analysis and classification.(K2)

176
 Syllabus ECE
CO - PO - PSO MAPPING
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 2 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 - - 2 1 2 2

CO2 3 3 2 3 2 3 2 2 - - 2 1 3 2

CO3 3 3 2 3 2 2 2 2 - - 1 2 2 2

CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 - - 2 2 2 3

CO5 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 - - 2 1 3 2

CO6 2 2 2 3 3 1 2 2 - - 2 1 2 2

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - I
20MGEL501 L T P C
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS
SDG NO. 4,89,12 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l To get an introductory insight about the IPR in national and
international context
l To understand the procedures for IPR, registration and its enforcement

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9
Intellectual property: Introduction, Meaning, Nature and significance types of
intellectual property, importance of intellectual property rights, Protection of
human innovations by IPR such as Patents, Trademarks, Copyright, Industrial
Designs Geographical Indications, and Trade Secrets

UNIT II AGREEMENTS AND TREATIES 9

International Treaties and Conventions on IPRs, TRIPS Agreement, PCT
Agreement, Patent Act of India, General agreement on trade and tariff (GATT),
Ben convention, Rome convention ,Role of WTO and WIPO

UNIT III PATENTS 9

Concept of Patent – Historical view of Patent system in India and International
Scenario, patent searching process, ownership rights and transfer,
compulsory licenses, Procedure for filing of patents, Grants of patent ,
Benchmarks for patentability of inventions, Recent key changes and
development.

177
 Syllabus ECE
UNIT IV TRADEMARKS AND COPYRIGHTS 9
Concept of Trademarks and copyrights – Rationale behind the protection-
Purpose, function and acquisition, ownership issues, Procedure for
Registration, Industrial design and integrated circuits, protection of
geographical indications and plant varieties, Recent Trends in copyrights and
Trademark., Trade secrets -liability for misappropriations of trade secrets

UNIT V LEGAL ASPECTS AND NEW DEVELOPMENTS 9

Infringements of patents– Criteria of Infringement – Modes of Infringement-
remedies and modification Protection against unfair competition,
enforcement of intellectual property rights, Intellectual property audits, New
developments of intellectual property, Impact of international instruments
relating to the protection of intellectual properties Future of IPR in National
and International levels.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:
1. S.V. Satarkar, Intellectual Property Rights and Copy Rights, Ess Ess
Publications, New Delhi, 2002.
2. V. Scople Vinod, Managing Intellectual Property, Prentice Hall of India
pvt Ltd, 2012
3. P.Narayanan, Intellectual property rights Eastern law house-2018, Third
Edition (revised and updated)
4. Deborah, E. Bouchoux, Intellectual property right, Cengage learning-
2018 5th Edition

REFERENCES
1. Sterling, J. L. A., World copyright law, (2008) Third Edition, London,
Sweet & Maxwell
2. GP Reddy, Intellectual property rights & other laws, Gogia law agency
3. Barrett, Margreth, Intellectual Property, (2009) Third Edition, New York
Aspen publishers
4. Inventing the Future: An introduction to Patents for small and medium
sized Enterprises; WIPO publication
5. Cornish, William Intellectual Property: Patents, Copyright, Trademarks
and allied rights, (2010) Seventh Edition, London Sweet & Maxwell.
6. Kankanala and Kalyan.C : Indian Patent Law and Practice (2010), India,
Oxford University Press

WEB RESOURCES:
1. https://www.wipo.int/edocs/lexdocs/laws/en/ws/ws020en.pdf
178
 ECE
Syllabus
2. http://caaa.in/Image/34_Hb_on_IPR.pdf
3. http://www.ipindia.nic.in/patents.htm
4. http://www.ipindia.nic.in/trade-marks.htm
5. https://assets.publishing.service.gov.uk/government/uploads/
system/uploads/attachment_data/file/627956/IP-Rights-in-India.pdf
6. https://economictimes.indiatimes.com/small-biz/resources/startup-
handbook/intellectual-property-rights- registration/articleshow/
59126802.cms?from=mdr

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://www.coursera.org/learn/introduction-intellectual-property
2. https://www.edx.org/course/intellectual-property-law-and-policy-
part-1
3. https://www.classcentral.com/tag/intellectual-property
4. https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc19_mg58/preview

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the students will be able to:
1 Describe the concepts of Intellectual property rights. (K2)
2 Explain the agreements and treaties of Intellectual property rights. (K2)
3 Identify the needs and avenues for patents. (K2)
4 Discuss the necessity of Trade marks and Copy rights. (K2)
5 Explain the legal context and developments of Intellectual property
rights. (K2)

CO - PO, PSO MAPPING

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 1 1 1 - 1 1 1 1 1 - - 1

CO2 3 1 3 1 2 - 1 1 - - - 1

CO3 1 1 2 2 2 - 1 1 - - - 1

CO4 2 1 1 2 2 - 1 1 - - - 1

CO5 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 - - - 1

179
 Syllabus ECE

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - II
20ECEL601 L T P C
RADIO ACCESS NETWORKS
SDG NO. 4, 8, 9 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l To introduce the concept of RAN.
l To bring awareness on recent developments in radio communication
l To impart knowledge on the working of RANs.
l To introduce the concept of 5G and CRAN
l To understand the fundamental theory and potential applications of
CRAN.

UNIT I RAN ARCHITECTURE FOR UMTS 9

Evolution of RAN- Architectures for UMTS, flow of data, channel types, Non
access stratum, iubTransport network, signalling procedures, planning.

UNIT II RADIO TECHNOLOGIES 9

Linearizing transmitters- superconducting filters and cryogenic Receiver
front end - Remote Radio Head and Radio over fiber - software Radio Base
stations.

UNIT III OVERVIEW OF 5G 9

5G concepts- objectives, activities, deployment strategies, wireless spectrum
for 5G, channel access methods, Architecture requirements and principles, 5G
system architecture, Network slicing

UNIT IV 5G RAN 9
Frameless Network architecture for user centric 5G RAN, Energy efficient
control and user plane adaptation, routing strategy- Distributed Architecture
of 5g mobile networks-RAN slicing

UNIT V CLOUD RADIO ACCESS NETWORKS 9

Basics of C-RAN, Evolved C-RAN with NGFI, Deployment cases and
Standardization activities, Advanced C-RAN architecture and Add-on cells, C-
RAN System Model, Link Adaptation, Resource Allocation
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

180
 Syllabus ECE
TEXT BOOKS
1. Chris Johnson, “Radio Access Networks for UMTS, Principles and
Practice”, John Wiley & Sons, Ltd, 2008.
2. Mugen Peng, Tony Q. S. Quek, Osvaldo Simeone, Wei Yu, “Cloud Radio
Access Networks: Principles, Technologies, and Applications”,
Cambridge University Press,2017

REFERENCES
1. Yingjie Jay Guo,”Advances in Mobile Radio Access Networks”, Boston,
London, 2004.
2. Mugen Peng, Yaohua Sun, and Zhongyuan Zhao,”Fog Radio Access
Networks (F-RAN): Architectures, Technologies, and Applications”,
Springer, 2020.
3. Devaki Chandramouli, Juho Pirskanen, Rainer Liebhart, “5G for the
connected world”, John Wiley &Sons, Ltd, 2008.
4. Quek, T. Q., Peng, M., Simeone, O., & Yu, W. (Eds.). (2017). Cloud radio
access networks: Principles, technologies, and applications. Cambridge
University Press.
5. Sirotkin, S. (2021). 5G Radio Access Network Architecture: The Dark Side
of 5G. Wiley-IEEE Press.

WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=1_x9axf0jlk
2. h t t p s : / / w w w. yo u t u b e . c o m / wa t c h ? v = x n g K 7 p 5 S t w w & l i s t =
RDCMUCQLQxPH8mL0bnA7B3lIfNww&index=4
3. h t t p s : / / w w w. y o u t u b e . c o m / w a t c h ? v = Y h 0 4 D J n U 1 r g & l i s t =
RDCMUCQLQxPH8mL0bnA7B3lIfNww&index=5
4. h t t p s : / / w w w. yo u t u b e . c o m / wa tc h ? v = RWO SY J g A X Bw & l i s t =
RDCMUCQLQxPH8mL0bnA7B3lIfNww&start_radio=1&t=89

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://www.sciencedirect.com/topics/computer-science/radio-
access-network
2. https://www.tutorialspoint.com/5g/5g_architecture.htm

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1. Explain the architecture and signaling mechanisms in Radio Access
Networks (K2)
2. Describe the transmitter receiver and filter structures in radio over fiber
(K2)
181
 Syllabus ECE
3. Identify the different channel access methods and deployment strategy
in 5G Architecture (K2)
4. Interpret the energy efficient control and routing strategy in 5G
architecture (K2)
5. Elucidate the basic C-RAN architecture and activities (K2)
6. Explain the advance C- RAN architecture and the resource allocation(K2)

CO - PO, PSO MAPPING :

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 2 - 3 - 1 - - - - 3 3 2 2

CO2 3 3 3 1 2 1 - - - - 3 3 2 2

CO3 3 3 2 1 3 1 - - - - 3 3 2 2

CO4 3 3 2 1 3 1 - - - - 3 3 2 2

CO5 3 3 2 1 1 3 1 - - - 3 3 2 2

CO6 3 3 2 1 1 - - - - - 3 3 2 2

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - II
20ECEL602 L T P C
WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS
SDG NO. 7, 9, 14 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l Learn adhoc network and sensor network fundamentals
l To understand the wireless sensor architecture
l Have an in-depth knowledge on sensor network and design issues
l To understand the infrastructure establishment of sensor networks
l Have an exposure to mote programming platforms and tools

UNIT I OVERVIEW OF WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS 9

Elements of adhoc Wireless Networks - Challenges for Wireless Sensor
Networks, Enabling Technologies for Wireless Sensor Networks.

UNIT II ARCHITECTURES 9
Single node Architecture - Hardware Components, Energy Consumption of
Sensor Nodes, Operating Systems and Execution Environments, Network

182
 Syllabus ECE
Architecture - Sensor Network Scenarios, Optimization Goals and Figures of
Merit, Gateway Concepts.

UNIT III NETWORKING SENSORS 9

Physical Layer and Transceiver Design Considerations, MAC Protocols for
Wireless Sensor Networks, Low Duty Cycle Protocols and Wakeup Concepts -
S-MAC, The Mediation Device Protocol, Wakeup Radio Concepts, Address and
Name Management, Assignment of MAC Addresses, Routing Protocols-
Energy-Efficient Routing, Geographic Routing.

UNIT IV INFRASTRUCTURE ESTABLISHMENT 9

Topology Control, Clustering, Time Synchronization, Localization and
Positioning, Sensor Tasking and Control.

UNIT V SENSOR NETWORK PLATFORMS AND TOOLS 9

Topology Control, Clustering, Time Synchronization, Localization and
Positioning, Sensor Tasking and Control.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Holger Karl, Andreas Willig, "Protocols And Architectures for Wireless
Sensor Networks", John Wiley, 2005.
2. Feng Zhao & Leonidas J. Guibas, “Wireless Sensor Networks - An
Information Processing Approach", Elsevier, 2007.

REFERENCES:
1. Kazem Sohraby, Daniel Minoli, Taieb Znati, “Wireless Sensor Networks
Technology, Protocols and Applications”, John Wiley, 2007.
2. Anna Hac, “Wireless Sensor Network Designs”, John Wiley, 2003.

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1. Know the basics of Ad Hoc networks and Wireless Sensor Networks (K2).
2. Explain the architecture and networking scenarios of Sensor Networks
(K3).
3. To comprehend the functionalities of physical and data link layer with the
knowledge of routing protocol (K3).
4. Illustrate the infrastructure establishment and network management
(K4).
5. Demonstrate the OS used in Wireless Sensor Networks and build basic
modules (K4).

183
 Syllabus ECE
6. Explain the sensor network platforms and the tools used to establish
wireless connectivity (K2).

CO - PO, PSO MAPPING:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 2 0 3 - 1 - - - - 3 3 2 2

CO2 3 3 3 1 2 1 - - - - 3 3 2 2

CO3 3 3 2 1 3 1 - - - - 3 3 2 2

CO4 3 3 2 1 3 1 - - - - 3 3 2 2

CO5 3 3 2 1 1 3 1 - - - 3 3 2 2

CO6 3 3 2 1 1 3 1 - - - 3 3 2 2

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - II
20ECEL603 L T P C
CMOS ANALOG IC DESIGN
SDG NO. 4 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l To study the fundamentals of analog circuits and MOS device models
l To gain knowledge on various configurations of MOS transistors and
feedback concepts
l To study the characteristics of noise and frequency response of the
amplifier
l To learn the concepts of Op-Amp frequency compensation, capacitor
switches and PLLs

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ANALOG IC DESIGN

AND CURRENT MIRRORS 9
Concepts of Analog Design - General consideration of MOS devices – MOS I/V
Characteristics – Second order effects – MOS device models. Basic current
mirrors- Cascode current mirrors- Active current mirrors- large and small
signal analysis- Common mode properties.

UNIT II AMPLIFIERS AND FEEDBACK 9

Basic Concepts – Common source stage- Source follower- Common gate stage-
Cascode stage. Single ended and differential operation- Basic Differential pair-
Common mode response- Differential pair with MOS loads- Gilbert Cell.

184
 Syllabus ECE
Feedback- General Consideration of feedback circuits- Feedback topologies-
Effect of loading- Effect of feedback on Noise.

UNIT III FREQUENCY RESPONSE OF AMPLIFIERS AND NOISE 9

General considerations- Miller Effect and Association of Poles with Nodes,
Common source stage- Source followers- Common gate stage- Cascode stage-
Differential pair. Noise- Statistical characteristics of noise- Types of noise-
Representation of noise in circuits- Noise in single stage amplifiers- Noise in
differential pairs- Noise Bandwidth.

UNIT IV OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER STABILITY AND FREQUENCY

COMPENSATION 9
General Considerations- One and Two Stage Op Amps- Gain Boosting-
Comparison- Common mode feedback- Input range limitations- Slew rate-
Power Supply Rejection- Noise in Op Amps- General consideration of stability
and frequency compensation- Multipole system- Phase margin- Frequency
compensation- Compensation of two stage op Amps- Other compensation
techniques.

UNIT V SWITCHED CAPACITOR CIRCUITS AND PLLS 9

General Considerations- Sampling switches- Switched Capacitor Amplifiers-
Switched Capacitor Integrator- Switched Capacitor Common mode feedback.
Phase Locked Loops-Simple PLL- Charge pump PLLs - Non ideal Effects in
PLLs- Delay locked loops- its applications.
TOTAL:45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOK:
1. Behzad Razavi, "Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits", Tata
McGraw Hill, 2001, Thirty Third re-print, 2016.

REFERENCES:
1. Phillip Allen and Douglas Holmberg "CMOS Analog Circuit Design"
Second Edition, Oxford University Press, 2004.
2. Paul R. Gray, Paul J. Hurst, Stephen H. Lewis, Robert G. Meyer, Analysis
and Design of Analog Integrated Circuits, Fifth Edition, Wiley, 2009
3. Grebene, "Bipolar and MOS Analog Integrated circuit design", John
Wiley & sons, Inc., 2003
4. Erik Brunn – CMOS Analog IC Design Fundamentals, Bookboon
5. R. J. Baker, CMOS: Circuit Design, Layout, and Simulation. USA: Wiley,
2010.

185
 Syllabus ECE
WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/content/storage2/courses/117101105
/downloads/L1.pdf
2. https://nptel.ac.in/content/storage2/nptel_data3/html/mhrd/
3. ict/text/117106030/lec1.pdf
4. https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc20_ee26

ONLINE REFERENCES
1. https://aicdesign.org/
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117101105/
3. https://ocw.tudelft.nl/courses/analog-integrated-circuit-design/

OUTCOMES :
Upon completion of the course, student should be able to:
1 Realize the concepts of Analog MOS devices and current mirror circuits
(K2).
2 Design different configurations of Amplifiers and feedback circuits.(K3)
3 Analyze the characteristics of frequency response of the amplifier.(K3)
4 Perform noise analysis in the amplifiers (K4)
5 Perform stability analysis and frequency compensation techniques of
Op- Amp Circuits.(K4)
6 Construct switched capacitor circuits and PLLs(K3)

CO – PO, PSO MAPPING:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 1 - 2 2 - - - 2 - - 2 3 2 2

CO2 1 2 2 2 2 - 1 2 - - 2 3 2 2

CO3 1 - 2 2 2 - 1 2 - - 2 3 1 2

CO4 1 - 2 2 2 - 1 2 - - 2 3 1 2

CO5 1 - 2 2 2 2 - 2 2 2 2 3 1 2

CO6 1 - 2 2 2 - - 2 - - 2 3 1 2

186
 Syllabus ECE

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - II
20ECEL604 L T P C
SOFTWARE FOR EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
SDG NO. 4 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
l To expose the students to the fundamentals of embedded Programming
l To Introduce the GNU C Programming Toolchain in Linux.
l To study basic concepts of embedded C, Embedded OS & Python
Programming
l To introduce time driven architecture, Serial Interface with a case study
l To involve Discussions/ Practice/Exercise onto revising & familiarizing
the concepts acquired over the 5 Units of the subject for improved
employability skills

UNIT I EMBEDDED PROGRAMMING 9

C and Assembly - Programming Style - Declarations and Expressions - Arrays,
Qualifiers and Reading Numbers - Decision and Control Statements -
Programming Process - More Control Statements - Variable Scope and
Functions - C Preprocessor - Advanced Types – Simple Pointers -Debugging
and Optimization – In-line Assembly.

UNIT II C PROGRAMMING TOOLCHAIN IN LINUX 9

C preprocessor - Stages of Compilation - Introduction to GCC - Debugging with
GDB - The Make utility - GNU Configure and Build System - GNU Binary
utilities- Profiling - using gprof - Memory Leak Detection with valgrind -
Introduction to GNU C Library

UNIT III EMBEDDED C 9

Embedded C-Adding Structure to ‘C’ Code: Object oriented programming with
C, Header files for Project and Port, Examples. Meeting Real-time constraints:
Creating hardware delays - Need for timeout mechanism - Creating loop
timeouts - Creating hardware timeouts- Industrial real time applications

UNIT IV EMBEDDED OS 9
Creating embedded operating system: Basis of a simple embedded OS,
Introduction to sEOS, Using Timer 0 and Timer 1, Portability issue, Alternative
system architecture, Important design considerations when using sEOS-
Memory requirements - embedding serial communication & scheduling data
transmission - Case study: Integrated alarm system.
187
 Syllabus ECE
UNIT V PYTHON PROGRAMMING 9
Basics of PYTHON Programming Syntax and Style – Python Objects–
Dictionaries – comparison with C & C++, programming on Conditionals and
Loops – Files-Functions – Input and Output – Errors and Exceptions
–Functions – Modules – Classes and OOP – Execution Environment.
TOTAL : 45 HOURS

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Steve Oualline, ‘Practical C Programming Third Edition’, O’Reilly Media,
Inc, 2006.
2. Michael J Pont, “Embedded C”, Pearson Education, 2007.
3. Christian Hill, Learning Scientific Programming with Python,
CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS ,2016.
4. Wesley J.Chun, “Core python application Programming Third Edition '',
Pearson Educat, 2016.
5. Mark J.Guzdial,``Introduction to computing and programming in
python – a Multimedia approach ,Fourth Edition, Pearson Education,
2015.

REFERENCES:
1. Stephen Kochan, “Programming in C”, Third Edition, Sams Publishing,
2009.
2. Mark Lutz,”Learning Python, Powerful OOPs,O’reilly,2011.
3. Peter Prinzs, Tony Crawford, “C in a Nutshell”, O’Reilly, 2016.
4. Dr. Bandu Meshram, “Object Oriented Paradigm C++ Beginners Guide
CC + +”, SPD, 2016.
5. David Griffiths, Dawn Griffiths, “Head First C”, O’reilly, 2015.

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117106112/
2. https://nptel.ac.in/content/storage2/nptel_data3/html/mhrd/ict/
text/108102045/lec19.pdf
3. https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc20_cs14/preview
4. https://www.coursera.org/learn/introduction-embedded-systems

WEB RESOURCES
1. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=IY4xrpJQwOY
2. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tE7cP-Xyfzw

188
 ECE
Syllabus
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1. Use GNU C to develop embedded software.(K3)
2. Explain fundamental embedded systems design paradigms,
architectures, possibilities and challenges, both with respect to software
and hardware. (K2)
3. Improve Employability and entrepreneurship capacity due to knowledge
upgradation on recent trends in embedded systems design. (K3)
4. Analyze the concepts of operating systems to design embedded systems.
(K3)
5 . Program an embedded system using python.(K4)
6. Develop Embedded C programs. (K4)

CO – PO, PSO MAPPING

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 2 1 2 1 1 1 - - - - - 2 2 1

CO2 3 2 2 2 2 1 - - - - - 1 2 1

CO3 3 2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 1 2 2

CO4 3 2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 1 2 2

CO5 3 3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - 1 2 1

CO6 3 3 3 3 3 1 - - - - - 1 2 2

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - II
20ECEL605 ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE AND L T P C
SDG NO. 4 & 9 COMPATIBILITY 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l To introduce and discuss various issues related to the system packaging
l To introduce about CAD used in designing wiring boards and testing

UNIT I OVERVIEW OF ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS PACKAGING 9

Functions of an Electronic Package, Packaging Hierarchy, IC packaging: MEMS
packaging, consumer electronics packaging, medical electronics packaging,
Trends, Challenges, Driving Forces on Packaging Technology, Materials for

189
 Syllabus ECE
Microelectronic packaging, Packaging Material Properties, Ceramics,
Polymers, and Metals in Packaging, Material for high density interconnect
substrates.

UNIT II ELECTRICAL ISSUES IN PACKAGING 9

Electrical Issues of Systems Packaging, Signal Distribution, Power
Distribution, Electromagnetic Interference, Transmission Lines, Clock
Distribution, Noise Sources, Digital and RF Issues. Design Process Electrical
Design: Interconnect Capacitance, Resistance and Inductance fundamentals;
Packaging roadmaps - Hybrid circuits - Resistive, Capacitive and Inductive
parasitic.

UNIT III CHIP PACKAGES 9

IC Assembly - Purpose, Requirements, Technologies, Wire bonding, Tape
Automated Bonding, Flip Chip, Wafer Level Packaging, reliability, wafer level
burn – in and test. Single chip packaging: functions, types, material processes,
properties, characteristics, trends. Multi chip packaging: types, design,
comparison, trends. System – in - package (SIP); Passives: discrete, integrated,
and embedded.

UNIT IV PCB, SURFACE MOUNT TECHNOLOGY AND

THERMAL CONSIDERATIONS 9
Printed Circuit Board: Anatomy, CAD tools for PCB design, Standard
fabrication, Micro via Boards. Board Assembly: Surface Mount Technology,
Through Hole Technology, Process Control and Design challenges. Thermal
Management, Heat transfer fundamentals, Thermal conductivity and
resistance, Conduction, convection and radiation – Cooling requirements.

UNIT V TESTING 9
Reliability, Basic concepts, Environmental interactions. Thermal mismatch
and fatigue – failures – thermo mechanically induced –electrically induced –
chemically induced. Electrical Testing: System level electrical testing,
Interconnection tests, Active Circuit Testing, Design for Testability.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOK:
1. V. P. Kodali, “Engineering EMC Principles, Measurements and
Technologies”, IEEE Press, New York, 1996.
2. Henry W. Ott, “Noise Reduction Techniques in Electronic Systems”, A Wiley
Inter Science Publications, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1988.

190
 Syllabus ECE
REFERENCES:
1. Blackwell (Ed), “The Electronic Packaging Handbook”, CRC Press, 2000.
2. Tummala, Rao R, “Microelectronics Packaging Handbook”, McGraw Hill,
2008.
3. Bosshart, “Printed Circuit Boards Design and Technology”, Tata McGraw
Hill, 1988.
4. R.G. Kaduskar and V.B.Baru, “Electronic Product design”, Wiley India, 2011.
5. R.S.Khandpur, “Printed Circuit Board”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2005.
6. Michael L. Bushnell & Vishwani D. Agrawal, “Essentials of Electronic
Testing for Digital, Memory & Mixed signal VLSI Circuits”, Kluwer Academic
Publishers, 2000.
7. M. Abramovici, M. A. Breuer, and A.D. Friedman, “Digital System Testing
and Testable Design”, Computer Science Press, 1990.

WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112105267/
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108108031/
3. http://www.nptelvideos.in/2012/11/an-introduction-to-electronics-
system.html

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://www.classcentral.com/course/swayam-electronic-packaging-
and-manufacturing- 13021
2. https://advancedengineering.umd.edu/electronic-packaging
3. https://www.ipcindia.org.in/fundamentals-of-electronics-systems-
packaging-esp

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1. Identify the various types and mechanisms of Electromagnetic
Interference (K1)
2. Learn various types of EMI Coupling mechanisms. (K1)
3. Propose suitable EMC techniques for the identified EMI. (K2)
4. Adopt various EMI control mechanisms in PCB Design. (K2)
5. Describe the various EMC measurement techniques and devices. (K1)
6. Impart comprehensive insight about the current EMC standards. (K2)

191
 Syllabus ECE
CO - PO, PSO MAPPING :
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 - - - 1 3 2

CO2 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 - - - 1 3 2

CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 - - 2 1 3 2

CO4 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 - - 2 1 3 2

CO5 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 - - 2 1 3 2

CO6 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 - - 2 1 3 2

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - II
20ECEL606 GREEN RADIO COMMUNICATION L T P C
SDG NO. 4,8,9,12 NETWORKS 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l To understand green communication concepts
l To understand model architectures and algorithms
l To understand power Consumption methodology
l To understand carbon emission impact on the environment
l To understand model test-beds

UNIT I COMMUNICATION ARCHITECTURES AND MODEL 9

Fundamental trade-offs on the design of green radio networks-Introduction,
Insight from Shannon’s capacity formula-SE-EE trade-off, BW-PW trade-off,
DL-PW trade-off & DE-EE trade-off, Impact of practical constraints.
Algorithms for energy harvesting Wireless networks-Technologies, Point to
point channel, MAC policies and multi-hop networks, Introduction to physical
layer design.

UNIT II PHYSICAL COMMUNICATIONS TECHNIQUES 9

Green modulation and coding schemes in energy constrained wireless
networks-Introduction, System model and assumptions, Energy consumption
of uncoded scheme, Energy consumption analysis of LT coded modulation,
Energy efficiency metrics for wireless networks, Energy efficient cooperative
networks.

192
 Syllabus ECE
UNIT III BASE STATION POWER MANAGEMENT TECHNIQUES 9
Opportunistic spectrum and load management concepts, Assessment of
power saving potential, Energy saving techniques-Energy consumption model
of RBS, EE metric, RBS energy saving methods, Power management for a
wireless base station, Power consumption model of a base station,
Optimization of power management.

UNIT IV GREEN COMMUNICATIONS FOR CARBON

EMISSION REDUCTIONS 9
Architectures and Standards: Introduction, Network Architectures and
Technologies to Reduce Carbon Emissions - Networks and Protocols,
Integrated Optical-Wireless Access, Test beds -Green star, SAVI, NetVirt,
Carbon Standards for Communications Technologies- Power and Performance
Measurement Challenges- Network and System Operation Challenges.

UNIT V GREEN RADIO TEST- BED AND STANDARDS 9

Introduction, Energy efficiency evaluation framework(E3F),Power model,
Traffic model, Case study : Energy efficiency of LTE, Green metrics,
Fundamental challenges and future potential, Standardization fora
–ETSI,3GPP,TIA and 3GPP2,ATIS.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Ekram Hossain,Vijay K.Bhargava, Gerhard P.Fettweis, “Green Radio
Communication Networks ” Cambridge University Press, 2012.
2. Jinsong Wu Sundeep Rangan, Honggang Zhang, “Green Communications
Theoretical fundamentals ,Algorithms and Applications “ CRC press,2013.

REFERENCES:
1. Richard Yu F, Zhang Xi and Victor Leung C M, “Green Communications
and Networking”, First Edition, CRC press, 2012.
2. Mazin Al Noor, “Green Radio Communication Networks Applying Radio-
Over-Fibre Technology for Wireless Access”, GRINVerlag, 2012.
3. Mohammad Obaidat S, Alagan Anpalagan and Isaac Woungang,
“Handbook of Green Information and Communication Systems”, First
Edition, Academic Press, 2012.
4. Ramjee Prasad, Shingo Ohmori, Dina Simunic, “Towards Green ICT”,
River Publishers, 2010.

193
 Syllabus ECE
WEB REFERENCES:
1. http://www.comsoc.org/webcasts/view/wireless
2. http://www.comsoc.org/webcasts/view/wireless
3. http://www.comsoc.org/webcasts/view/wireless

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://youtu.be/d4-uWmash04

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to:
1 Understand Green Communication Concepts and related
architectures(K2)
2 Compare Different modulation and coding schemes(K2)
3 Develop the power consumption models(K2)
4 Explore Architectures and Technologies to Reduce Carbon
Emissions(K2)
5 Explore test-beds and standards(K2)
6 Demonstrate various base station power management techniques (K2)

CO - PO - PSO MAPPING
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 2 2 1 - 2 - - - - 2 2 3 2

CO2 3 2 3 1 - 1 - - - - 1 2 3 2

CO3 3 2 3 1 - 2 - - - 1 2 2 3 2

CO4 3 2 2 1 3 1 - - - - 2 2 3 2

CO5 3 2 2 1 3 2 - - 2 3 2 2 3 2

CO6 3 2 2 1 3 2 - - 2 3 2 2 3 2

194
 Syllabus ECE

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - II
20ECEL607 L T P C
BIOMEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION
SDG NO. 4,8,9,12 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
l To describe the basic theory of Bio potential Electrodes
l To describe the Bio potential measurement.
l To design Bio potential amplifiers for acquisition of bio signals.
l To measure the various non-electrical physiological parameter
measurements and biochemical measurements.

UNIT I BIOPOTENTIAL ELECTRODES 9

Origin of bio potential and its propagation. Electrode-electrolyte interface,
electrode– skin interface, half-cell potential, impedance, polarization effects of
electrode – non polarizable electrodes. Types of electrodes - surface, needle
and micro electrodes and their equivalent circuits. Recording problems -
measurement with two electrodes.

UNIT II BIOPOTENTIAL MEASUREMENT 9

Bio signal characteristics– frequency and amplitude ranges. ECG – Einthoven‘s
triangle, standard 12 lead system, block diagram. Measurements of heart
sounds - PCG. EEG – 10-20 electrode system, unipolar, bipolar and average
mode, Functional block diagram. EMG – unipolar and bipolar mode, block
diagram, EOG and ERG.

UNIT III BIOPOTENTIAL AMPLIFIER 8

Need for bio-amplifier - single ended bio-amplifier, differential bio-amplifier –
right leg driven ECG amplifier. Band pass filtering, isolation amplifiers –
transformer and optical isolation - isolated DC amplifier and AC carrier
amplifier. Artifacts and removal.

UNIT IV NON ELECTRICAL PHYSIOLOGICAL

PARAMETER MEASUREMENT 10
Te m p e ra t u re , re s p i ra t i o n ra te a n d p u l s e ra te m e a s u re m e n t s ,
Plethysmography, Pulse oximetry, Blood Pressure: direct methods - Pressure
amplifiers - systolic, diastolic, mean detector circuit, indirect methods -
auscultatory method, oscillometric method, ultrasonic method. Blood flow -
Electromagnetic and ultrasound blood flow measurement. Cardiac output
measurement- Indicator dilution, dye dilution and thermodilution method.

195
 Syllabus ECE
UNIT V BIOCHEMICAL MEASUREMENT 9
Biochemical sensors - pH, pO2 and pCO2, Ion selective Field Effect Transistor
(ISFET), immunologically sensitive FET (IMFET), Blood glucose sensors -
Blood gas analyzers, colorimeter, flame photometer, spectrophotometer,
blood cell counter, auto analyzer.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Joseph J. Carr and John M. Brown, “Introduction to Biomedical
equipment technology”, Pearson Education, Fourth Edition, 2014.
2. John G.Webster, “Medical Instrumentation Application and Design”,
John Wiley and Sons, New York, Fourth Edition, 2009.

REFERENCES:
1. Khandpur R.S, “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”, Tata
McGraw Hill, New Delhi, Third Edition, 2014.
2. L.A Geddes and L.E.Baker, “Principles of Applied Biomedical
Instrumentation”, John Wiley and Sons, Third Edition, Reprint 2008.
3. Leslie Cromwell, Fred J. Weibell, Erich A. Pfeiffer, Biomedical
Instrumentation and Measurements, Pearson Education India,
Second Edition, 2015.
4. Myer Kutz, “Standard Handbook of Biomedical Engineering & Design”,
McGraw-Hill Publisher, 2003.

WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=49CWbXNJ3WE
2. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cNYBk0_fbb0

COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
1. Explain the electrode behavior and circuit models (K2)
2. Apply the fundamentals of Bio potential recording (K3)
3. Construct the various bio amplifiers (K2)
4. Illustrate various nonelectrical physiological parameters (K2)
5. Describe the Cardiac output measurement (K2)
6. Identify various biochemical parameters (K3)

196
 Syllabus ECE
CO – PO, PSO MAPPING:
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 2 2

CO2 3 3 2 2 1 1 - - - - - 1 2 1

CO3 3 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - 3 2

CO4 2 3 2 2 2 3 - - - - - 1 2 1

CO5 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 - - - - - 2 1

CO6 2 2 3 2 2 2 3 1 - - - - 2 1

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - II
20ECEL608 L T P C
PATTERN RECOGNITION
SDG NO. 4, 9 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l To Study the fundamentals of pattern classifiers.
l To know about various clustering concepts.
l To originate the various structural pattern recognition and feature
extraction.
l To understand the basics of concept learning and decision trees.
l To explore recent advances in pattern recognition.

UNIT I PATTERN CLASSIFIER 9

Overview of Pattern recognition – Discriminant functions – Supervised
learning –Parametric estimation – Maximum Likelihood Estimation –
Bayesian parameter Estimation – Problems with Bayes approach– Pattern
classification by distance functions –Minimum distance pattern classifier.

UNIT II CLUSTERING 9
Clustering for unsupervised learning and classification -Clustering concept –
C-means algorithm – Hierarchical clustering procedures -Graph theoretic
approach to pattern clustering -Validity of clusters.

197
 Syllabus ECE
UNIT III FEATURE EXTRACTION AND STRUCTURAL PATTERN
RECOGNITION 9
KL Transforms – Feature selection through functional approximation – Binary
selection -Elements of formal grammars - Syntactic description - Stochastic
grammars –Structural representation.

UNIT IV INTRODUCTION, CONCEPT LEARNING AND DECISION TREES 9

Learning Problems – Designing Learning Systems, Perspectives and Issues –
Concept Learning – Version Spaces and Candidate Elimination Algorithm –
Inductive bias – Decision Tree learning – Representation – Algorithm –
Heuristic Space Search.

UNIT V RECENT ADVANCES 9

Neural network structures for pattern recognition -Neural network based
pattern associators – Unsupervised learning in neural pattern recognition -
Self organizing networks -Fuzzy logic -Fuzzy pattern classifiers -Pattern
classification using Genetic Algorithms.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Tom M. Mitchell, “Machine Learning”, McGraw-Hill Education (Indian
Edition), 2013.
2. Tou and Gonzalez, Pattern Recognition Principles, Wesley Publication
Company, London, 1974

REFERENCES:
1. Duda R.O., Hart.P.E., Pattern Classification and Scene Analysis, Wiley, New
York,1973.
2. Morton Nadier, Eric Smith P., Pattern Recognition Engineering, John
Wiley & Sons, New York, 1993.
3. Narasimha Murty M, Susheela Devi V, “Pattern Recognition – An
Algorithmic Approach”, Springer, Universities Press, 2011.
4. Robert J.Schalkoff, "Pattern Recognition: Statistical, Structural and
Neural Approaches", John Wiley &Sons Inc., New York, 2007.

WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117108048/
2. https://cedar.buffalo.edu/~srihari/CSE555/

198
 Syllabus ECE
3. https://sites.cs.ucsb.edu/~yfwang/courses/cs290i_prann/
lecture.html

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://freevideolectures.com/course/3194/pattern-recognition
2. https://www.classcentral.com/course/swayam-pattern-recognition-
and-application-14228

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to:
1. Understand the principles of pattern recognition (K2)
2. Illustrate the algorithm to classify the data and to identify the
patterns(K2)
3. Utilize the given data set to extract and select features for Pattern
recognition.(K3)
4. Interpret the decision tree and concept learning.(K2)
5. Illustrate the neural network structure for pattern recognition.(K2)
6. Illustrate the fuzzy logic in pattern recognition.(K2)

CO – PO, PSO MAPPING:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 2 2 3 1 2 2 - - - 2 2 3 2

CO2 3 2 3 2 1 2 1 - - - 2 2 3 2

CO3 3 3 3 3 2 3 - - - - 2 2 3 3

CO4 3 3 3 2 3 2 1 - - - 2 2 3 3

CO5 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 - 2 3 2 2 3 3

CO6 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 - 2 3 2 2 3 3

199
 Syllabus ECE

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - II
20ECEL609 L T P C
MACHINE LEARNING TECHNIQUES
SDG NO. 9 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l To understand the need for machine learning for various problem
solving
l To study the various supervised, semi-supervised and unsupervised
learning algorithms in machine learning
l To learn the new approaches in machine learning
l To design appropriate machine learning algorithms for problem
solving

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 11
Machine Learning- Definition, Types of machine learning - Supervised,
Unsupervised, Reinforcement learning, Deep learning and Deep
reinforcement learning, Learning Problems – Perspectives and Issues –
Concept Learning – Version Spaces and Candidate Eliminations – Inductive
bias – Decision Tree learning – Representation – Algorithm – Heuristic Space
Search tools for ML - Matlab,WEKA and Google Colab

UNIT II NEURAL NETWORKS AND GENETIC ALGORITHMS 9

Neural Network Representation – Problems – Perceptrons – Multilayer
Networks and Back Propagation Algorithms – Advanced Topics – Genetic
Algorithms – Hypothesis Space Search – Genetic Programming – Models of
Evaluation and Learning, Case Study-Travelling salesman problem using
Genetic algorithm

UNIT III BAYESIAN AND COMPUTATIONAL LEARNING 9

Bayes Theorem – Concept Learning – Maximum Likelihood – Minimum
Description Length Principle – Bayes Optimal Classifier – Gibbs Algorithm –
Naıv̈e Bayes Classifier – Bayesian Belief Network – EM Algorithm – Probability
Learning – Sample Complexity – Finite and Infinite Hypothesis Spaces –
Mistake Bound Model, Case study

UNIT IV INSTANT BASED LEARNING 7

K-Nearest Neighbour Learning - Weighted Regression -Radial base Function-
Case based Learning, Case study

200
 Syllabus ECE
UNIT V ADVANCED LEARNING 9
Learning Sets of Rules – Sequential Covering Algorithm – Learning Rule Set –
First Order Rules – Sets of First Order Rules – Induction on Inverted Deduction
– Inverting Resolution – Analytical Learning – Perfect Domain Theories –
Explanation Base Learning – FOCL Algorithm – Reinforcement Learning –
Task – Q-Learning – Temporal Difference Learning
TOTAL:L+T=45PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Tom M. Mitchell, “Machine Learning”, McGraw-Hill Education (India)
Private Limited, 2013
2. Shai Shalev-Shwartz, Shai Ben-David, “Understanding Machine Learning
from Theory to Algorithms”, Cambridge University press,2015
.
REFERENCES:
1. Ethem Alpaydin, “Introduction to Machine Learning (Adaptive
Computation and Machine Learning)”, MIT Press 2004.
2. Stephen Marsland, “Machine Learning: An Algorithmic Perspective”, CRC
Press, 2009.
3. Trevor Hastie, Robert Tibshirani & Jerome H. Friedman, “The Elements of
Statistical Learning”, Springer series in statistics, Second Edition, 2009.
4. Christopher M.Bishop ,”Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning”,
Springer, 2006.

WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://youtu.be/ukzFI9rgwfU
2. https://youtu.be/GwIo3gDZCVQ
3. https://youtu.be/r0168kd5r34

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://nptel.ac. in/courses/106/106/106106139/
2. https://youtu.be/PPLop4L2eGk

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to:
1 Differentiate between supervised, unsupervised, semi-supervised
machine learning approaches.(K2)
2 Select appropriate tools for real time data and application. (K3)
3 Apply specific supervised or unsupervised machine learning algorithms
for appropriate data.(K3)
201
 Syllabus ECE
4 Analyse and suggest the appropriate machine learning approach for the
various types of problem. (K4)
5 Design and modify existing machine learning algorithms to suit an
individual application. (K5)
6 Provide useful case studies on the advanced machine learning algorithms.
(K3)

CO – PO, PSO MAPPING:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 2 2 3 3 2 - - 2 1 1 3 2 2

CO2 2 3 3 3 3 3 - - 1 2 1 3 2 3

CO3 2 3 3 2 2 2 - - 1 1 2 3 3 2

CO4 3 3 3 3 3 2 - - 3 2 2 3 2 2

CO5 2 3 3 3 3 2 - - 2 2 2 3 2 2

CO6 2 3 3 3 3 3 -3 - 1 1 1 2 2 2

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - II
20ECEL610 L T P C
MEDICAL ELECTRONICS
SDG NO. 3,4 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l To gain knowledge about the various physiological parameters both
electrical and non-electrical and the methods of recording and also
the method of transmitting these parameters.
l To study about the various assist devices used in the hospitals.
l To gain knowledge about equipment used for physical medicine and
the various recently developed diagnostic and therapeutic
techniques.

UNIT I ELECTRO-PHYSIOLOGY AND BIO-POTENTIAL RECORDING 9

Sources of bio medical signals, Bio-potentials, Bio potential electrodes,
biological amplifiers, ECG, EEG, EMG, PCG, lead systems and recording
methods, typical waveforms and signal characteristics.

202
 Syllabus ECE
UNIT II BIO-CHEMICAL AND NON ELECTRICAL PARAMETER
MEASUREMENT 9
pH, PO2, PCO2, Colorimeter, Auto analyzer, Blood flow meter, Cardiac output,
respiratory, blood pressure, temperature and pulse measurement, Blood Cell
Counters.

UNIT III ASSIST DEVICES 9

Cardiac pacemakers, DC Defibrillator, Dialyzer, Ventilators, Magnetic
Resonance Imaging Systems, Ultrasonic Imaging Systems, Heart lung machine

UNIT IV PHYSICAL MEDICINE AND BIOTELEMETRY 9

Diathermies- Shortwave, ultrasonic and microwave type and their
applications, Surgical Diathermy, Biotelemetry.

UNIT V RECENT TRENDS IN MEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION 9

Telemedicine, Insulin Pumps, Radio pill, Endomicroscopy, Brain machine
interface, Lab on a chip, Laser in medicine, cryogenic application.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Leslie Cromwell, “Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurement”,
Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2007.
2. Khandpur, R.S., “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw
Hill, New Delhi, 2003.

REFERENCES:
1. Myer Kutz, “Standard Handbook of Biomedical Engineering and Design”,
McGraw Hill Publisher, 2003.
2. John G.Webster, “Medical Instrumentation Application and Design”, 3rd
Edition, Wiley India Edition, 2007.
3. Joseph J.Carr and John M.Brown, “Introduction to Biomedical Equipment
Technology”, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 2004.
4. R.D.Lele, “Computers in Medicine,” Tata McGraw Hill, NewDelhi-1989.
5. Onkar N. Pandey, Rakesh Kumar, “Medical Electronics”, S.K. Kataria & Sons,
2009

WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://books.google.co.in/books/about/Principles_of_Medical_
Electronics_and_Bi.html?id=Uu1_6V7H5n8C
2. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=JOMsijqtHps

203
 Syllabus ECE
3. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=i2mZylgP1Fk
4. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=R8obTqD9MBY

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://academicearth.org/biomedical-engineering/ww.youtube
2. https://www.ecs.soton.ac.uk/undergraduate/biomedical-electronic-
engineering
3. https://www.sciencedirect.com/topics/engineering/medical-
electronics
4. https://study.com/articles/Biomedical_Instrumentation_Courses_
and_Training_Programs.html

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to:
1. Identify the amplitude and frequency of ECG, EEG, EMG & PCG. (K3)
2. Sketch the lead systems and recording setup of ECG, EEG, EMG & PCG for
diagnosis. (K2)
3. Describe the measurement techniques for biochemical and non-electrical
parameters for the purpose of screening. (K2)
4. Illustrate the working of assist devices and application of therapeutic
instruments on different diseased conditions. (K2)
5. Explain the functioning of MRI and Ultrasound imaging for diagnosis. (K2)
6. Summarize the working principle of Bio -Telemetry, Tele-medicine and
recent trends in various diagnostic equipment. (K2)

CO – PO, PSO MAPPING:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 3 2 2 1 1 - - - - - 1 2 1

CO2 2 2 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 1 1

CO3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 - - - - - 2 1

CO4 2 2 2 2 - 2 - - - - - - 2 2

CO5 2 2 - 1 - 1 - - - - - - 1 1

CO6 - 2 2 1 1 - - - - - - - 2 1

204
 Syllabus ECE

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - II
20MGEL601 L T P C
TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT
SDG NO. 4,8,9,12 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l To understand the concepts and philosophies of Quality Management
l To know the impact and significance of TQM principles on
organizations in recent times.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION 8
Need and Evolution of Quality, Quality-Definitions, statements and
dimensions of product and service quality TQM-concepts, Elements and
Framework, Benefits & Obstacles of TQM , TQM-Culture, Stategic Quality
Management, Costs of Quality.

UNIT II CONTRIBUTIONS AND APPROACHES

TO QUALITY MANAGEMENT 9
Renowned quality gurus- Deming, Juran, Crosby and Ishikawa, Contributions
of Taguchi – Loss Function, Signal to Noise Ratio and design of experiments,
Kaizen -principles and practices-5 S tools, Poka Yoke-8Discipline
Methodology, Just in time, Continous process improvement-PDCA cycle and 5
why analysis

UNIT III CUSTOMER FOCUS AND TEAMWORK 8

Identifying Customer Needs, QFD - Process, Building HoQ, Customer
Satisfaction Measurement Techniques. Employee Involvement Practices.
Individual Participation - Suggestion Systems & Empowerment, Motivation,
Leadership, Partnerships - Cross-Functional Teams, Supplier/Customer
Partnerships, Problem -Solving Teams - Quality Circles.

UNIT IV STATISTICAL TOOLS & TECHNIQUES 11

SQC - Tools For Data Collection And Analysis – Seven tools(old and new),
Statistical Process Control (SPC) – Construction of Control Chart – Variables
and Attributes. Process Capability – concepts and measurement. Six Sigma
models ,Lean six sigma, BPR, TPM, FMEA and Benchmarking.

UNIT V QUALITY SYSTEMS AND STANDARDS 9

Need for ISO 9000- ISO 9001: 2015 quality system-guidelines and clausewise
requirements, Quality audits-types and responsibilities, ISO 14001:2004 EMS,

205
 Syllabus ECE
ISO / TS 16949:2002, ISO 27001:2005 ISMS, SEI – CMMIand Awards - Demings
Prize, MBNQA and criteria.

TEXT BOOKS
1. Besterfield, Total Quality Management, 3rd Edition, Pearson India
2 Shridhara K Bhat, Total Quality Management. Himalaya Publishing
House, 2010.

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Bedi Kanishka, Quality Management, Oxford University Press
2. Kiran D.R., Total Quality Management - Key Concepts and Case Studies,
Butterworth-Heinemann, 2016.
3. Poornima M Charantimath, Total Quality Management. Pearson India,
2017
4. Sharma DD, Total Quality Management, Principles, Practice and Cases,
Sultan Chand and Sons.
5. Douglas C. Montgomory, Introduction to Statistical Quality Control,
Wiley Student Edition, 4th Edition, Wiley India Pvt Limited, 2008

MOOC REFERENCES
1. https://www.coursera.org/lecture/supply-chain-management/total-
quality-management-wLrvy
2. https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc20_mg34/preview
3. https://www.openlearning.com/courses/total-quality-management/
4. https://www.udemy.com/course/tqm-in-academics/

ONLINE RESOURCES
1. https://www.unido.org/sites/default/files/2009-04/A_roadmap_
to_quality_volume_1_0.pdf
2. https://www.investopedia.com/terms/t/total-quality-management-
tqm.asp
3. https://www.researchgate.net/publication/237006071_Total_
Quality_Management_in_Academic_Libraries_A_Study
4. https://www.isixsigma.com/methodology/total-quality-management-
tqm/introduction-and-implementation-total-quality-management-tqm/
5. https://study.com/academy/lesson/five-principles-of-total-quality-
management-tqm.html

206
OUTCOME:
1 Understand quality concepts and philosophies of TQM. (K2)
2 Apply TQM principles and concepts of continuous improvement. (K3)
3 Explain the quality tools, management tools and statistical fundamentals
to improve quality. (K2)
4 Demonstrate the various TQM tools as a means to improve quality. (K2)
5 Illustrate quality tools and procedures for better quality output. (K3)

CO – PO, PSO MAPPING:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 1 3 1 - 1 - 1 1 - - - 1

CO2 3 3 3 2 2 - 1 1 - - - 1

CO3 3 3 2 2 2 - 1 1 - - - 1

CO4 2 2 3 2 2 - 1 1 - - - 1

CO5 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 - - - 1

207
 Syllabus ECE
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - III
20ECEL701 L T P C
COGNITIVE RADIO
SDG NO. 4 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l To understand the evolving software defined radio and cognitive
radio techniques and their essential functionalities.
l To study the basic architecture and standard for cognitive radio.
l To understand the physical, MAC and Network layer design of
cognitive radio.
l To expose the student to evolve applications and advanced features
of cognitive radio

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO SOFTWARE-DEFINED RADIO

AND COGNITIVE RADIO 9
Evolution of Software Defined Radio and Cognitive radio: goals, benefits,
definitions, architectures, relations with other radios, issues, enabling
technologies, radio frequency spectrum and regulations.

UNIT II COGNITIVE RADIO ARCHITECTURE 9

Cognition cycle – orient, plan, decide and act phases, organization; SDR as a
platform for Cognitive Radio – Hardware and Software Architectures;
Overview of IEEE 802.22 standard for broadband wireless access in TV bands.

UNIT III SPECTRUM SENSING AND DYNAMIC SPECTRUM ACCESS 9

Introduction – Primary user detection techniques – energy detection, feature
detection, matched filtering, cooperative detection and other approaches;
Fundamental Tradeoffs in spectrum sensing; Spectrum Sharing Models of
Dynamic Spectrum Access - Unlicensed and Licensed Spectrum Sharing;
Fundamental Limits of Cognitive Radio.

UNIT IV MAC AND NETWORK LAYER DESIGN

FOR COGNITIVE RADIO 9
MAC for cognitive radios – Polling, ALOHA, slotted ALOHA, CSMA, CSMA / CA;
Network layer design – routing in cognitive radios, flow control and error
control techniques.

UNIT V ADVANCED TOPICS IN COGNITIVE RADIO 9

Overview of security issues in cognitive radios, auction based spectrum
208
 Syllabus ECE
markets in cognitive radio networks, public safety and cognitive radio,
cognitive radio for Internet of Things.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Alexander M. Wyglinski, Maziar Nekovee, Thomas Hou, “Cognitive Radio
Communications and Networks”, Academic Press, Elsevier, 2010.
(Unit I to IV)
2. Huseyin Arslan(Ed.), “Cognitive Radio, Software Defined Radio and
Adaptive Wireless Systems”, Springer, 2007. (Unit V)

REFERENCES:
1. Bruce Fette, “Cognitive Radio Technology”, Newnes, 2006.
2. Kwang-Cheng Chen, Ramjee Prasad, “Cognitive Radio Networks”, John
Wiley and Sons, 2009.
3. Ezio Biglieri, Professor Andrea J.Goldsmith, Dr.Larry J.Greenstein, Narayan
B.Mandayam, H. Vincent Poor, “Principles of Cognitive Radio”, Cambridge
University Press,2012.

WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://www.classcentral.com/course/swayam-basics-of-software-
defined-radios-and-practical-applications-10088
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108107107/
3. https://www.ofcom.org.uk/research-and-
data/technology/general/emerging-tech/cognitive-radio

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://link.springer.com/chapter/10.1007/978-981-10-4280-5_68
2. https://www.sciencedirect.com/topics/computer-science/cognitive-
radio-network

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1. Elaborate on the architecture implications of software defined radio
along with its radio frequency spectrum and regulations (K2)
2. Devise a Smart agent model in CR (K3)
3. Enumerate the Physical and Link layer parameters to improve the
performance of communication link in CR (K3)
4. Discuss about the MAC schemes related to cognitive radio networks in
detail (K2)

209
 Syllabus ECE
5. Make use of the concept of wireless networks to build next generation
networks (K3)
6. Provide a review of security issues in cognitive network and CR- IoT
framework with neat diagram (K2)

CO - PO, PSO MAPPING :

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 2 1 3 3 2 1 3 1 1 2 1 3 3 -

CO2 3 2 3 3 1 1 3 1 1 2 1 3 2 -

CO3 2 2 2 3 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 3 3

CO4 3 2 3 3 2 1 3 1 1 2 1 2 - 3

CO5 3 1 3 3 1 1 3 1 1 2 1 2 - 3

CO6 2 2 2 3 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 3 3

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - III

20ECEL702 SMART ANTENNA FOR MOBILE L T P C
SDG NO. 4,9,11,15 COMMUNICATION AND GPS 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
l To understand the applications of antenna arrays to Mobile
Communications.
l To learn the architecture of smart antenna systems.
l To learn the Smart Antennas Techniques for CDMA
l To acquire knowledge on GPS and GPS Signals
l To understand GPS orbits and GPS position determination

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO SMART ANTENNAS 9

Spatial Processing for Wireless Systems, Key Benefits of Smart Antennas,
Smart antenna introduction, smart antenna configuration, SDMA, architecture
of smart antenna systems.

UNIT II APPLICATIONS OF SMART ANTENNAS IN MOBILE

COMMUNICATIONS 9
Mobile communication systems with smart antennas, Application of Antenna
Arrays to Mobile Communications, Beam Forming and Direction-of-Arrival
Considerations.

210
 Syllabus ECE
UNIT III SMART ANTENNAS TECHNIQUES FOR CDMA 9
Non-Coherent CDMA Spatial Processors, Coherent CDMA Spatial Processors
and the Spatial Processing Rake Receiver, Multi-User Spatial Processing,
Dynamic Re-sectoring Using Smart Antennas, Downlink Beamforming for
CDMA.

UNIT IV OVERVIEW OF GPS & GPS SIGNALS 9

Overview of GPS- Global Positioning Systems: Basic concept, system
architecture, space segment, user segment, GPS aided Geo-augmented
navigation (GAGAN) architecture. Signal structure, anti-spoofing (AS),
selective availability, Difference between GPS and GALILEO satellite
construction.

UNIT V GPS ORBITS AND SATELLITE POSITION DETERMINATION 9

GPS orbital parameters, description of receiver independent exchange format
(RINEX) – Observation data and navigation message data parameters, GPS
position determination. GPS / GNSS Smart antennas.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. T.S. Rappaport and J.C. Liberti, “Smart Antennas for Wireless
Communications”, Prentice Hall India. 1999
2. Tapan K Sarkar ,” Smart Antennas “, IEEE Press, John Wiley & Sons
Publications,2003
3. B. Hoffman – Wellenhof, H. Liehtenegger and J. Collins, “GPS – Theory and
Practice”, Springer – Wien, New York (2001).
4. Gottapu Sasibhushana Rao , “Global Navigation Satellite Systems”, Mc-
Graw Hill Education, New Delhi, 2010.

WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc20_ce51/preview
2. https://www.coursera.org/lecture/state-estimation-localization-self-
driving-cars/lesson-3-the-global-navigation-satellite-systems-gnss-
TDlnE

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://www.edn.com/millimeter-wave-beamforming-and-antenna-
design/
2. https://www.memoireonline.com/08/08/1453/study-of-smart-
antennas-on-mobile-communications.html

211
 Syllabus ECE
5. https://www.rohde-schwarz.com/mea/solutions/test-and-
measurement/rf-microwave-components/antennas/over-the-air-ota-
beamforming-applications_253908.html

OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students should be able to:
1 Examine the application of smart antennas to Mobile
Communications(K3)
2 Analyze Beam forming considerations and Spatial Processing for
Wireless Systems (K4)
3 Discuss smart antenna configurations for mobile communication and
GPS(K2)
4 Describe Smart Antennas Techniques for SDMA and CDMA (K2)
5 Explain Global Positioning Systems and Orbital Parameters (K2)
6 Design GPS/GNSS smart antennas for the satellite position, navigation,
timing and Signal corrections (K4)

CO - PO, PSO MAPPING :

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 2 2 2 1 1 - - - - 1 1 3 2

CO2 3 3 3 3 3 1 - - - - 1 1 3 2

CO3 3 3 2 2 3 2 - - - - 2 2 3 2

CO4 3 3 3 2 3 2 - - - - 2 2 3 2

CO5 3 3 3 2 3 2 - - - - 2 2 3 2

CO6 3 3 3 2 3 2 - - - - 2 2 3 2

212
 Syllabus ECE

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - III

20ECEL703 L T P C
MIXED SIGNAL IC DESIGN
SDG NO. 4 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
l To Study the mixed signal of submicron CMOS circuits
l To Understand the various integrated based filters and topologies
l To Learn the data converters architecture, modeling and signal to
noise ratio
l To Study the integrated circuit of oscillators and PLLs

UNIT I SUBMICRON CMOS CIRCUIT DESIGN 9

Submicron CMOS: Overview and Models, CMOS process flow, Capacitors and
Resistors. Digital circuit design: The MOSFET Switch, Delay Elements, An
Adder. Analog Circuit Design: Biasing, Op-Amp Design, Circuit Noise.

UNIT II INTEGRATOR BASED CMOS FILTERS 9

Integrator Building Blocks - low pass filter, Active RC integrators, MOSFET-C
Integrators, gm-C integrators, Discrete time integrators. Filtering Topologies:
The Bilinear transfer function, The Biquadratic transfer function, Filters using
Noise shaping.

UNIT III DATA CONVERTER ARCHITECTURES 9

DAC Architectures - Resistor string, R-2R ladder Networks, Current Steering,
Charge Scaling DACs, Cyclic DAC and Pipeline DAC. ADC Architecture - Flash,
Two-step flash ADC, Pipeline ADC, Integrating ADC's, Successive
Approximation ADC.

UNIT IV DATA CONVERTER MODELING AND SNR 9

Sampling and Aliasing: A modeling approach, Impulse sampling, The sample
and Hold, Quantization noise. Data converter SNR: An overview, Clock Jitter,
Improving SNR using Averaging, Decimating filter for ADCs, Interpolating
filter for DACs, Band pass and High pass sinc filters - Using feedback to improve
SNR.

UNIT V OSCILLATORS AND PLL 9

LC oscillators, Voltage Controlled Oscillators. Simple PLL, Charge pumps PLLs,
Non ideal effects in PLLs, Delay Locked Loops.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

213
 ECE
Syllabus
TEXT BOOK:
1. David A. Johns, Ken Martin, “Analog Integrated Circuit Design”, Wiley
Student Edition, 2013

REFERENCES:
1. R.Jacob Baker, “CMOS Mixed Signal Circuit Design”, Wiley India, IEEE Press,
Reprint, 2008.
2. R.Jacob Baker, “CMOS Circuit Design, Layout and Simulation”, Wiley India,
IEEE Press, 2nd Edition, Reprint, 2009.
3. Behzad Razavi, “Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits”, McGraw Hill,
33rd Reprint, 2016.

WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117106030/
2. https://www.youtube.com/playlist?list=PLLDC70psjvq5vtrb0EdII4x
IKA15ec-Ij
3. https://www.ee.iitb.ac.in/web/academics/courses/EE719

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://engineering.tamu.edu/electrical/academics/degrees/ graduate/
mixed-signal-integrated-circuit-design-online-certificate.html
2. https://www.classcentral.com/course/swayam-analog-ic-design-10032
3. https://extension.berkeley.edu/public/category/courseCategory
CertificateProfile.do?method=load&certificateId=54012374

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1. Apply the concepts for mixed signal MOS circuits.(K3)
2. Analyze the characteristics of IC based CMOS filters.(K3)
3. Design various data converter architecture circuits.(K3)
4. Illustrate the signal to noise ratio and modeling of mixed signals.(K3)
5. Design oscillators and phase lock loop circuits.(K3)
6. Extend the Mixed Signal Design to Different Applications(K3)

214
 Syllabus ECE
CO - PO, PSO MAPPING:
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 1 2 3 3 - - - - - - - - 1 2

CO2 1 2 3 3 - - - - - - - - 1 2

CO3 1 2 3 3 - - - - - - - - 1 2

CO4 1 2 3 3 - - - - - - - - 1 2

CO5 1 2 3 3 - - - - - - - - 1 2

CO6 1 2 3 3 - - - - - - - - 1 2

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - III

20ECEL704 EMBEDDED PROCESSOR L T P C
SDG NO. 4,9 FOR SIGNAL PROCESSING 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l To study the architecture of embedded processor
l To introduce the number formats and quantization in real time
processing.
l To learn the memory systems and data transfer in Blackfin
Processor.
l To introduce the concept of code optimization and power
management.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED PROCESSOR 9

Embedded Processor: Micro Signal Architecture -Real-Time Embedded Signal
Processing. The Blackfin Processor: An Architecture for Embedded Media
Processing - Overview of the Blackfin Processor Architecture: Hardware
Processing Units and Register Files-Bus Architecture and Memory-Basic
Peripherals.

UNIT II REAL-TIME DSP FUNDAMENTALS AND IMPLEMENTATION 9

Number Formats Used in the Blackfin Processor-Fixed-Point Formats -Fixed-
Point Extended Format -Fixed-Point Data Types -Emulation of Floating-Point
Format - Block Floating-Point Format-Dynamic Range, Precision, and
Quantization Errors - Incoming Analog Signal and Quantization -Dynamic
Range, Signal-to-Quantization Noise Ratio, and Precision -Sources of
Quantization Errors in Digital Systems Overview of Real-Time Processing.

215
 Syllabus ECE

UNIT III MEMORY SYSTEM AND DATA TRANSFER 9

Overview of Signal Acquisition and Transfer to Memory-DMA Operations and
Programming-Using Cache in the Blackfin Processor-Comparing and
Choosing Between Cache and Memory DMA- Scratchpad Memory of Blackfin
Processor.

UNIT IV CODE OPTIMIZATION AND POWER MANAGEMENT 9

Using Assembly Code for Efficient Programming - Using Hardware Loops -
Using Dual MACs -Using Parallel Instructions -Special Addressing Modes:
Separate Data Sections - Using Software Pipelining- Power Consumption and
Management in the Blackfin Processor.

UNIT V DSP APPLICATIONS 9

Overview of Audio Compression -Audio Encoding -Audio Decoding- Digital
Image Processing- Overview of Image Representation- Color Conversion-
Image Enhancement.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Woon-Seng Gan,Sen M.Kuo,” Embedded Signal Processing with the
Micro Signal Architecture”, Wiley-IEEE Press,January 2007.
2. Proakis and Manolokis, “Digital Signal Processing: Principles,
Algorithms, and Applications, Pearson, July 2013

REFERENCES:
1. S.K. Mitra ,“Digital Signal Processing”, Mc-Graw Hill,. Third Edition, 2006.
2. Sinha, Priyabrata,” Speech Processing in Embedded Systems”, Springer
2010.
3. Phil Lapsley, Jeff Bier, Amit Shoham, Edward A. Lee, ”DSP Processor
Fundamentals: Architectures and Features”, Wiley-IEEE Press, 2017.
4. Edward Ashford Lee and Sanjit Arunkumar Seshia, “Introduction To
Embedded Systems”, Second Edition, 2017

WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://youtu.be/D-TM91xLZY4?t=171
2. https://youtu.be/_wTAd5nr05g?t=23
3. https://www.mouser.in/new/analog-devices/adi-adsp-bf609-
processors/

216
 ECE Syllabus
ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://www.analog.com/media/en/technical-
documentation/application-notes/EE-213.pdf
2. https://www.analog.com/en/technical-articles/fixed-point-vs-floating-
point-dsp.html
3. https://www.analog.com/media/en/technical-
documentation/application-notes/EE367.pdf

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to:
1 Describe the architectural features, DSP computational building blocks
and memory interfacing of Blackfin Processor.(K2)
2 Differentiate the number formats, fixed and floating-point
representation, types of errors used in Blackfin processor.(K2)
3 Analyze and implement the real time digital signal processing
fundamentals.(K3)
4 Compare DMA Operations and Cache in Blackfin Processor (K3)
5 Optimize the interaction of Embedded hardware designs with their
software(K4)
6 Model real-time applications using embedded system concepts.(K4)

CO - PO, PSO MAPPING :

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 2 3 2

CO2 3 2 2 3 3 - - - - - 2 2 2

CO3 3 2 1 3 3 - - - 1 1 `1 2 2 2

CO4 3 2 1 2 1 - - - - - - 2 2 1

CO5 3 2 1 3 3 - - - - - 2 3 2

CO6 2 2 3 2 3 - - - 2 2 2 2 2 3

217
 Syllabus ECE

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - III

20ECEL705 ANTENNAS FOR MODERN WIRELESS L T P C
SDG NO. 4,9,11 COMMUNICATION 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
l Enhance the knowledge in applications of Mobile Handset Antennas
l Understand the radiation concepts in Fractal, Millimeter Antennas
l Gain basic knowledge of different types of materials and methods used
for fabrication of flexible electronics.
l Understand and designing Radio frequency identification (RFID)
systems, middleware architectures for real-world applications.
l To make use of antenna measurement methods

UNIT I MOBILE HANDSET ANTENNAS 9

Review of antenna basic parameters - Frequency bands for commercial
applications - Cellular handset antenna design issues - Helical wire antennas
and variants - Evolution of the PIFA - Ceramic chip and resonator antennas -
SAR measurement and minimization - Provision for GPS and Bluetooth

UNIT II FRACTAL and MILLIMETER WAVE ANTENNAS 9

Fractal antenna geometries - Iterated function systems - Fractal antenna
elements - Radiation characteristics - Fractal antenna arrays - Antenna arrays
based on aperiodic tilings. Millimeter wave and Terahertz applications -
Waveguide antennas - Printed planar antennas - On-chip antennas - Sub
millimeter wave antennas - Vivaldi antenna & long slot array for ultra
wideband characteristics.

UNIT III BROADBAND PLANAR and SMART ANTENNA 9

Suspended plate antennas - Techniques for broad impedance bandwidth -
Techniques for enhanced radiation performance - Planar monopole antennas -
Applications in high speed wireless communications -Beam steering - Degree
of freedom - Key benefits of smart antennas technology - Narrow band
processing: Signal model- Conventional beam former-Null steering beam
former-Optimal beam former-Optimization using reference signal-Optimal
beam space processor.

UNIT IV EBG STRUCTURES DESIGN 9

Parametric study of a mushroom-like EBG structure: Patch width effect, Gap
width effect, Substrate thickness effect, Substrate permittivity effect -
Comparison of mushroom and uni planar EBG designs - Polarization
dependent EBG surface designs: Rectangular patch EBG surface, Slot loaded
218
 Syllabus ECE
EBG surface, EBG surface with offset vias, PDEBG reflector - Compact spiral
EBG designs: - Single, Double and Four arm spiral design - Dual layer EBG
design.

UNIT V FABRICATION AND MEASUREMENT TECHNIQUES

OF FLEXIBLE ANTENNAS 9
Introduction, Material Selection - Conductive and substrate materials and its
characterization, Antenna Fabrication method and impedance matching
strategy in wearable and flexible antennas, Measurement Techniques.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOK:
1. Modern Antennas, S.Drabowitch, A. Papiernik, H.D. Griffiths, J.Encinas
and B.L.Smith, Second Edition, Springer-
2. Innovation in Wearable and Flexible antennas, Haider R. Khaleel
California State University, Sonoma, USA, Published by WIT Press
Ashurst Lodge, Ashurst, Southampton, SO40 7AA, UK, WIT Press 2015.
3. John.L.Volakis, "Antenna Engineering Handbook", Tata McGraw Hill,
Fourth Edition, 2007.
4. Amin Rida and Manos M. Tentzeris, RFID-Enabled Sensor Design and
Applications (Artech House Integrated Microsystems), 2011, First
edition, Artech House Publishers, UK.

REFERENCE:
1. Antenna Theory - C.A. Balanis, John Wiley & Sons, Third edition., 2005
2. Antennas – John D. Kraus, McGraw-Hill (International Edition), Second
edition. 1988

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to:
1 Illustrate SAR value measurement & minimization methods for mobile
handset. (K1)
2 Design and explain radiation parameters of simple Fractal antenna and
Fractal array (K2)
3 Analyze Waveguide, Printed planar, Vivaldi antennas & long slot array
(K2)
4 Illustrate the performance and applications of antenna for high speed
wireless communication. (K2)
5 Design an EBG structures. (K3)
6 Explain the fabrication and measurement techniques of flexile antennas.
(K1)

219
 Syllabus ECE
CO - PO, PSO MAPPING :
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2 2 - - - - 1 1 - 1 1

CO2 3 2 2 - - - - 1 1 - 1 1

CO3 3 2 2 - - - - 1 1 - 1 1

CO4 3 2 2 - - - - 1 1 - 1 1

CO5 3 2 2 - - - - 1 1 - 1 1

CO6 3 2 2 - - - - 1 1 - 1 1

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - III

20ECEL706 MICROWAVE AND MILLIMETER L T P C
SDG NO. 9, 12 WAVE CIRCUITS AND SYSTEMS 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l To study trend in the designing and modeling of Microwave and mm
wave circuits.
l To Summarize the applications of Microwave and mm wave circuits
and systems.
l To analyze modeling of noise for UWB systems.
l To illustrate concept of MIOS and SIW technologies.
l To outline the design of RF circuits and RF Mems.

UNIT I DESIGN AND MODELING TRENDS 9

Introduction to Low Coefficient Accurate Nonlinear Microwave and
Millimeter Wave Nonlinear Transmitter Power Amplifier Behavioural Models,
Artificial Neural Network in Microwave Cavity Filter Tuning, Wideband
Directive Antennas with High Impedance Surfaces - AMC Characterization, 2
Antenna over AMC, Wideband Directive Antenna Using AMC with a Lumped
Element Wideband Directive Antenna Using a Hybrid AMC

UNIT II MODELLING OF SUBSTRATE NOISE AND MITIGATION

SCHEMES FOR UWB SYSTEMS 9
Ultra Wideband Systems – Developments and Challenges, Impact Evaluation
of Substrate Noise, Analytical Modelling of Switching Noise in Lightly Doped
Substrate, Substrate Noise Suppression and Isolation for UWB Systems.

220
 SyllabusECE
UNIT III APPLICATIONS 9
Short-Range Tracking of Moving Targets by a Handheld UWB Radar System -
Handheld UWB Radar System, UWB Radar Signal Processing, Advances in the
Theory and Implementation of GNSS Antenna Array Receivers - GNSS:
Satellite-Based Navigation Systems, Challenges in the Acquisition and
Tracking of GNSS Signals, Design of Antenna Arrays for GNSS, Multiband RF
Front-Ends for Radar and Communications Applications- Minimum Sub-
Nyquist Sampling , Design of Signal-Interference Multiband Bandpass Filters,
Building and Testing of Direct-Sampling RF Front-Ends

UNIT IV RECONFIGURABLE RF CIRCUITS AND RF-MEMS 9

Reconfigurable RF Circuits – Transistor-Based Solutions, Design Example:
Tunable Band Pass filter, Beamforming Network, LNA and VCO,
Reconfigurable RF Circuits Using RF-MEMS

UNIT V MIOS and SIW TECHNOLOGIES 9

Quiet-Sun Spectral Flux Density, Radiation Mechanism in Flares, Solar Flares
Flux Density, Solar Flares Peak Flux Distribution, Atmospheric Variability,
Ionospheric Variability, Antenna Design - Antenna e (SIW) Technology -
Substrate Integrated Waveguide Technology, Passive SIW Cavity-Backed
Antennas, Design of Coupled Oscillator Systems for Power Combining,
Coupled Oscillator Array with Beam-Scanning Capabilities.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOK:
1 Apostolos Georgiadis, Hendrik Rogier, Luca Roselli, Paolo Arcioni
Microwave and Millimeter Wave Circuits and Systems: Emerging Design,
Technologies and Applications, 2012, Wiley

REFERENCE:
1 Joy Laskar, Babak Matinpour, Sudipto Chakraborty, “Modern Receiver
Front- Ends Systems, Circuits, and Integration”, Wiley- Interscience, 2004.

WEB REFERENCES:
1 https://www.everythingrf.com/
2 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117/105/117105139/#

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kYp0ipC-wtE
2 https://mtt.org/webinar-library/microwave-and-millimeter-wave-
power-amplifiers-technology-applications-and-future-trends/
221
 ECE Syllabus
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to:
1 Summarize the trend in the designing and modeling of Microwave and
mm wave circuits (K1)
2 Apply the Microwave and mm wave circuits and systems to various
communication technologies (K2)
3 Model and suppress various noise sources in communication systems.
(K2)
4 Illustrate concept of MIOS and SIW technologies (K1)
5 Design RF circuits and RF Mems (K3)
6 Illustrate the design and applications of Microwave and mm wave circuits
and systems (K2)

CO - PO, PSO MAPPING

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 3 2 1 1 1 1 - 1 1 1 1 3 2

CO2 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 - 1 1 1 1 3 2

CO3 3 3 3 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 3 3

CO4 3 2 3 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2

CO5 3 3 3 1 1 1 2 - 1 1 1 1 3 2

CO6 3 3 3 1 1 1 2 - 1 1 1 1 3 2

222
 Syllabus ECE

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - III

20ECEL707 DSP PROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE L T P C
SDG NO. 4,8,9,12 AND PROGRAMMING 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l To learn the basics on Digital Signal Processors
l To design the Programmable DSP's Architecture, On-chip Peripherals
and Instruction set
l To design and simulate programming for signal processing
applications
l To learn and design Advanced Programmable DSP Processors
l To design and compare the features of different family Processors

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF PROGRAMMABLE DSPs 9

Introduction to Programmable DSPs, Architectural Features of PDSPs -
Multiplier and Multiplier accumulator – Modified Bus Structures and Memory
access – Multiple access memory – Multi-port memory – VLIW architecture-
Pipelining – Special Addressing modes in P-DSPs – On chip Peripherals,
Applications of Programmable DSPs.

UNIT II INFINITE IMPULSE RESPONSE FILTERS 9

Architecture of C5X Processor – Addressing modes – Assembly language
Instructions - Pipeline structure, On-chip peripherals – Block Diagram of DSP
starter.

UNIT III TMS320C6X PROCESSOR 9

Architecture of the C6x Processor - Instruction Set – Addressing modes,
Assembler directives, On-chip peripherals, DSP Development System: DSP
Starter Kit - Code Composer Studio - Support Files – Introduction to AIC23
codec and other on-board peripherals, Real-Time Programming Examples for
Signals and Noise generation, Frequency analysis, Filter design .

UNIT IV ADSP PROCESSORS 9

Architecture of ADSP-21XX and ADSP-210XX series of DSP processors-
Addressing modes and assembly language instructions – Application
programs –Filter design, FFT calculation.

UNIT V ADVANCED PROCESSORS 9

Study of TI's advanced processors - TMS320C674x and TMS320C55x DSPs,

223
 Syllabus ECE
ADSP's Black fin and Sigma DSP Processors, NXP's DSP56Fxx Family of DSP
Processors, Comparison of the features of TI, ADSP and NXP DSP family
processors. TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:
1. B. Venkataramani and M. Bhaskar, “Digital Signal Processors –
Architecture, Programming and Application” Tata McGraw – Hill
Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2003.
2. John G Proakis and Manolakis, “Digital Signal Processing Principles,
Algorithms and Applications”, Pearson, Fourth Edition, 2007

REFERENCES:
1. Avtar Singh and S. Srinivasan, Digital Signal Processing – Implementations
using DSP Microprocessors with Examples from TMS320C54xx, Cengage
Learning India Private Limited, Delhi 2012 .
2. RulphChassaing and Donald Reay, Digital Signal Processing and
Applications with the C6713 and C6416 DSK, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.,
Publication, 2012 (Reprint).
3. User guides Texas Instruments, Analog Devices and NXP.

WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://www.ti.com
2. https://www.analog.com/media/en/technical-documentation

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://www.academia.edu/38043202/Architecture_of_ TMS320C50_
DSP_Processor
2. http://www.ti.com/general/docs/gencontent.tsp?contentId=46898

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1 Design and analyze the concept of Digital signal Processor. (K3)
2 Demonstrate their ability to Program the DSP Processor for signal
processing applications (K3)
3 Demonstrate the On-chip Peripherals and Instruction set.(K3)
4 Discuss, Compare and select the suitable advanced DSP Processor for
real time Processing applications. (K2)
5 Apply and analyze the concept of Advanced Programmable DSP
processor. (K3)
6 Explain the fundamental concept of Programmable architecture (K2)

224
 Syllabus ECE
CO - PO, PSO MAPPING :
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 2 2 1 1 1 - - - 1 - 2 2 1

CO2 3 3 2 2 3 - - - - 2 - 2 2 1

CO3 3 3 2 1 3 - - - - 2 - 2 2 2

CO4 3 3 1 2 3 - - - - 2 - 2 2 1

CO5 3 3 2 1 3 - - - - 1 - 2 2 1

CO6 3 3 2 1 3 - - - - 1 - 2 2 1

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - III

20ECEL708 BRAIN COMPUTER INTERFACE L T P C
SDG NO. 4, 9 AND ITS APPLICATIONS 3 1 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l To understand the basic concepts of brain computer interface
l To study the various signal acquisition methods
l To describe about the signal processing methods used in BCI
l To understand the various machine learning methods of BCI.
l To explain the various applications of BCI

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO BCI 9

Introduction - Brain structure and function, Brain Computer Interface Types -
Synchronous and Asynchronous -Invasive BCI -Partially Invasive BCI - Non
Invasive BCI, Structure of BCI System, BCI Monitoring Hardware, EEG, ECOG,
MEG, FMRI.

UNIT II BRAIN ACTIVATION 9

Brain activation patterns - Spikes, Oscillatory potential and ERD, Slow cortical
potentials, Movement related potentials-Mu rhythms, motor imagery,
Stimulus related potentials - Visual Evoked Potentials – P300 and Auditory
Evoked Potentials, Potentials related to cognitive tasks.

UNIT III FEATURE EXTRACTION METHODS 9

Data Processing – Spike sorting, Frequency domain analysis, Wavelet analysis,
Time domain analysis, Spatial filtering -Principal Component Analysis (PCA),

225
 Syllabus ECE
Independent Component Analysis (ICA), Artifacts reduction, Feature
Extraction - Phase synchronization and coherence.

UNIT IV MACHINE LEARNING METHODS FOR BCI 9

Classification techniques –Binary classification, Ensemble classification,
Multiclass Classification, Evaluation of classification performance, Regression
- Linear, Polynomial, RBF’s, Perceptron’s, Multilayer neural networks, Support
vector machine, Graph theoretical functional connectivity analysis.

UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF BCI 9

Case Studies - Invasive BCIs: decoding and tracking arm (hand) position,
controlling prosthetic devices such as orthotic hands, Cursor and robotic
control using multi electrode array implant, Cortical control of muscles via
functional electrical stimulation. Noninvasive BCIs:P300 Mind Speller, Visual
cognitive BCI, Emotion detection. Ethics of Brain Computer Interfacing.
TOTAL:L+T=45PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Tom M. M1. Rajesh.P.N.Rao, “Brain-Computer Interfacing: An
Introduction”, Cambridge University Press, First edition, 2013.
2. 2. Jonathan Wolpaw, Elizabeth Winter Wolpaw, “Brain Computer
Interfaces: Principles and practice”, Oxford University Press, USA, First
Edition , January 2012.

REFERENCES:
1. Ella Hassianien, A & Azar.A.T (Editors), “Brain-Computer Interfaces
Current Trends and Applications”, Springer, 2015.
2. Bernhard Graimann, Brendan Allison, GertPfurtscheller, "Brain-
Computer Interfaces: Revolutionizing Human-Computer Interaction",
Springer, 2010
3. Ali Bashashati, MehrdadFatourechi, Rabab K Ward, Gary E Birch,” A
survey of signal Processing algorithms in brain–computer interfaces
based on electrical brain signals” Journal of Neural Engineering, Vol.4,
2007, PP.32-57
4. Arnon Kohen, “Biomedical Signal Processing”, Volume I and II, CRC Press
Inc, Boca Rato, Florida.
5. Bishop C.M., “Neural networks for Pattern Recognition”, Oxford,
Clarendon Press, 1995.
6. Andrew Webb, “Statistical Pattern Recognition”, Wiley International,
Second Edition, 2002.

226
 Syllabus ECE
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to:
1. Comprehend and appreciate the significance and role of this course in the
present contemporary world (K2)
2. Explain the concept of BCI (K2)
3. Illustrate the various signal acquisition methods and its functions (K2)
4. Determine the appropriate feature extraction methods (K3)
5. Explain various machine-learning algorithms. (K2)
6. Discuss the case studies for various applications of BCI (K2)

CO – PO, PSO MAPPING:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 - 3 - - - - 3 - - - - - 2 1

CO2 3 3 - 3 - - - - 3 - - - - -

CO3 3 3 3 3 3 3 - - - - - - 2 3

CO4 3 3 - - 3 - - - - - - - 2 1

CO5 3 3 - - 3 - - - - - - - 2 1

CO6 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 -

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - III

20ECEL709 L T P C
DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING
SDG NO. 4 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
l To become familiar with digital image fundamentals.
l To get exposed to image enhancement techniques in Spatial and
Frequency domain.
l To learn concepts of degradation function and restoration techniques.
l To study image segmentation and representation techniques.
l To become familiar with image compression and recognition methods.

UNIT I DIGITAL IMAGE FUNDAMENTALS 9

Steps in Digital Image Processing – Components – Elements of Visual
Perception – Image Sensing and Acquisition – Image Sampling and
Quantization – Relationships between pixels - Color image fundamentals -
RGB, HSI models, Two-dimensional mathematical preliminaries, 2D
transforms - DFT, DCT.
227
 SyllabusECE
UNIT II IMAGE ENHANCEMENT 9
Spatial Domain: Gray level transformations – Histogram processing – Basics of
Spatial Filtering– Smoothing and Sharpening Spatial Filtering, Frequency
Domain: Introduction to Fourier Transform– Smoothing and Sharpening
frequency domain filters – Ideal, Butterworth and Gaussian filters,
Homomorphic filtering, Color image enhancement.

UNIT III IMAGE RESTORATION 9

Image Restoration - degradation model, Properties, Noise models – Mean
Filters – Order Statistics – Adaptive filters – Band reject Filters – Band pass
Filters – Notch Filters – Optimum Notch Filtering – Inverse Filtering – Wiener
filtering.

UNIT IV IMAGE SEGMENTATION 9

Edge detection, Edge linking via Hough transform – Thresholding - Region
based segmentation – Region growing – Region splitting and merging –
Morphological processing- erosion and dilation, Segmentation by
morphological watersheds – basic concepts – Dam construction – Watershed
segmentation algorithm.

UNIT V IMAGE COMPRESSION AND RECOGNITION 9

Need for data compression, Huffman, Run Length Encoding, Shift codes,
Arithmetic coding, JPEG standard, MPEG. Boundary representation, Boundary
description, Fourier Descriptor, Regional Descriptors – Topological feature,
Texture - Patterns and Pattern classes - Recognition based on matching
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E. Woods, “Digital Image Processing”,
Pearson, 3rd Edition , 2010, Fifth Edition. (Unit I – V)
2. Anil K. Jain, “Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing”, Pearson, 2002.
(Unit I –V)

REFERENCES:
1. Kenneth R. Castleman, “Digital Image Processing”, Pearson, 2006.
2. Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E. Woods, Steven Eddins, “Digital Image
Processing using MATLAB”, Pearson Education, Inc., 2011.
3. D,E. Dudgeon and R. M. Mersereau, “Multidimensional Digital Signal
Processing”, Prentice Hall Professional Technical Reference, 1990.
4. William K. Pratt, “Digital Image Processing”, John Wiley, New York,4th
Edition,2007.
5. Milan Sonka, Vaclav Hlavac & Roger Boyle, "Image processing, Analysis
and Machine Vision", Thomson Asia Prt. Ltd, 4th Edition, 2015.
228
 ECE Syllabus
6. Sid Ahmed M.A., "Image Processing - Theory, Algorithm and
Architecture", McGraw Hill, 2009

WEB REFERENCES:
1. Introduction to sensors: http://www.shortcourses.com/sensors/
2. Digital Image Fundamentals::
http://www.ph.tn.tudelft.nl/Courses/FIP/Frames/fip.html
3. DIAL-Digital Image Analysis Laboratory
http://www.ece.arizona.edu/~dial/
4. JPEG image compression standard: www.jpeg.org

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://www.tutorialspoint.com/dip/image_processing_
introduction.htm
2. https://sisu.ut.ee/imageprocessing/book/1

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to:
1 Summarize the digital image acquisition concepts and color model
fundamentals (K2).
2 Elaborate the image enhancement techniques in spatial and 2D
transform domain (K3).
3 Describe image degradation models and filtering techniques (K3).
4 Discuss types of image segmentation techniques and morphological
operators (K2).
5 Identify image compression techniques (K2).
6 Utilize to represent image in form of boundary and regional
descriptors (K2).

CO – PO, PSO MAPPING:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 1 - - - - - - - - - - - -

CO2 3 2 2 3 2 - - - - - 2 2 2 1

CO3 2 2 2 2 2 - - - - - 2 2 2 1

CO4 2 1 2 3 2 - - - - - 2 - 2 1

CO5 2 2 2 2 2 - - - - - 2 2 2 1

CO6 3 1 2 2 2 - - - - - 3 2 2 1

229
 Syllabus ECE

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - III

20ECEL710 DEEP LEARNING PRINCIPLES L T P C
SDG NO. 4 AND PRACTICES 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
l Learn the Deep learning fundamentals
l Be familiar with CNN
l Be exposed to deep models
l Be familiar with RNN
l Learn to represent image/signal in form of features
l Apply deep learning techniques to applications

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO DEEP LEARNING 9

History of Deep learning, McCulloch Pitts Neuron, Perceptrons - Perceptron
Learning Algorithm, Multilayer Perceptrons, Gradient Descent, Feedforward
Neural Networks, Backpropagation– neural network and state-of-the art
approaches to deep learning.

UNIT 2 CONVOLUTIONAL NEURAL NETWORKS 9

Convolutional Neural Networks -LeNet, AlexNet, VGGNet, GoogLeNet, ResNet,
Guided Backpropagation. Familiarization of convolutional neural network
toolbox.

UNIT 3 DEEP MODELS FOR AI 9

Deep generative architectures - Restricted Boltzmann Machines, Deep Belief
Networks, Auto encoders, Bayesian approach. Familiarization of deep neural
network toolbox.

UNIT 4 RECURRENT NETWORKS 9

Introduction to RNN, Training RNs with back propagation - issues – Long
short term memory networks, Backpropagation through time – vanishing
gradient, RNN extensions – Deep (Bidirectional) RNNs. Familiarization of
recurrent neural network toolbox.

UNIT 5 DEEP LEARNING APPLICATIONS 9

Applications of Deep Learning–object recognition and Computer vision tasks,
Natural language processing, Speech and audio processing Case Study: Named
Entity Recognition – Opinion Mining using Recurrent Neural Networks –
Parsing and Sentiment Analysis using Recursive Neural Networks – Sentence

230
 Syllabus ECE
Classification using Convolutional Neural Networks – Dialogue Generation
with LSTMs.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Goodfellow, I., Bengio, Y., & Courville, A. (2016). Deep learning. MIT
press.
2. Bengio, Y. (2009). Learning deep architectures for AI. Foundations and
trends® in Machine Learning.

Reference Books and papers:

1. LeCun, Y., Bengio, Y., & Hinton, G. (2015). Deep learning. nature.
2. Hochreiter, S., & Schmidhuber, J. (1997). Long short-term memory.
Neural computation.
3. Hinton, G. E., Sejnowski, T. J., & Ackley, D. H. (1984). Boltzmann
machines: Constraint satisfaction networks that learn. Pittsburgh:
Carnegie-Mellon University, Department of Computer Science.
4. Collobert, R., Weston, J., Bottou, L., Karlen, M., Kavukcuoglu, K., &Kuksa,
P. (2011). Natural language processing (almost) from scratch. Journal of
machine learning research.
5. Kim, Y. (2014). Convolutional neural networks for sentence
classification. arXiv preprint arXiv:1408.
6. Kalchbrenner, N., Grefenstette, E., &Blunsom, P. (2014). A convolutional
neural network for modeling sentences. arXiv preprint arXiv:1404.2188.
7. Larochelle, H., Bengio, Y., Louradour, J., &Lamblin, P. (2009). Exploring
strategies for training deep neural networks. Journal of machine
learning research,.
8. Lee, H., Grosse, R., Ranganath, R., & Ng, A. Y. (2009, June). Convolutional
deep belief networks for scalable unsupervised learning of hierarchical
representations. In Proceedings of the 26th annual international
conference on machine learning.
9. Salakhutdinov, R., & Hinton, G. (2009, April). Deep Boltzmann machines.
In Artificial intelligence and statistics.

WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://freevideolectures.com/course/4068/nptel-deep-learning
2. https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc19_cs54

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://www.edx.org/professional-certificate/ibm-deep-learning
2. https://www.edx.org/course/deep-learning-with-tensorflow

231
 Syllabus ECE
OUTCOMES
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to:
1. Review the basic concepts of neural networks (K1)
2. Implement different types of Convolutional Neural Network (K3)
3. Analyze different deep models (K4)
4. Get familiar with the use of deep learning toolbox (K3)
5. Apply Recurrent Neural Network to different applications (K3)
6. Discuss the applications of deep learning in NLP and image processing
(K2)

CO – PO, PSO MAPPING:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 3 1 3 1 1 - - - - - 1 2 1

CO2 3 3 1 3 1 1 - - - - - 1 2 1

CO3 3 2 1 3 1 1 - - - - - 1 2 1

CO4 3 3 1 3 1 1 - - - - - 1 2 1

CO5 3 2 1 3 1 1 - - - - - 1 2 1

CO6 3 2 1 3 1 1 - - - - - 1 2 1

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - III

20MGEL701 FOUNDATION SKILLS IN INTEGRATED L T P C
SDG NO. 9 & 12 PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l To understand the global trends and development methodologies of
various types of products and services.
l To conceptualize, prototype and develop product management plan
for a new product based on the type of the new product and
development methodology integrating the hardware, software,
controls, electronics and mechanical systems.
l To understand requirement engineering and know how to collect,
analyze and arrive at requirements for new product development and
convert them in to design specification.
l To understand system modeling for system, sub-system and their
interfaces and arrive at the optimum system specification and
characteristics.

232
 Syllabus ECE
l To develop documentation, test specifications and coordinate with
various teams to validate and sustain up to the EoL (End of Life)
support activities for engineering customer.

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT 9

Global Trends Analysis and Product decision - Social Trends - Technical
Trends- Economical Trends - Environmental Trends - Political/Policy Trends -
Introduction to Product Development Methodologies and Management -
Overview of Products and Services - Types of Product Development -
Overview of Product Development methodologies - Product Life Cycle –
Product Development Planning and Management.

UNIT II REQUIREMENTS AND SYSTEM DESIGN 9

Requirement Engineering - Types of Requirements - Requirement
Engineering - traceability Matrix and Analysis - Requirement Management -
System Design & Modeling - Introduction to System Modeling - System
Optimization - System Specification - Sub-System Design - Interface Design.

UNIT III DESIGN AND TESTING 9

Conceptualization - Industrial Design and User Interface Design - Introduction
to Concept generation Techniques – Challenges in Integration of Engineering
Disciplines - Concept Screening & Evaluation - Detailed Design - Component
Design and Verification – Mechanical, Electronics and Software
Subsystems - High Level Design/Low Level Design of S/W Program - Types of
Prototypes, S/W Testing- Hardware Schematic, Component design, Layout
and Hardware Testing – Prototyping - Introduction to Rapid Prototyping and
Rapid Manufacturing - System Integration, Testing, Certification and
Documentation

UNIT IV SUSTENANCE ENGINEERING AND END-OF-LIFE (EOL) SUPPORT9

Introduction to Product verification processes and stages - Introduction to
Product Validation processes and stages - Product Testing Standards and
Certification - Product Documentation - Sustenance -Maintenance and Repair
– Enhancements - Product EoL - Obsolescence Management – Configuration
Management - EoL Disposal.

UNIT V BUSINESS DYNAMICS – ENGINEERING SERVICES INDUSTRY 9

The Industry - Engineering Services Industry - Product Development in
Industry versus Academia –The IPD Essentials - Introduction to Vertical
Specific Product Development processes -Manufacturing/Purchase and
Assembly of Systems - Integration of Mechanical, Embedded and Software

233
 Syllabus ECE
Systems – Product Development Trade-offs - Intellectual Property Rights and
Confidentiality – Security and Configuration Management.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXTBOOKS:
1. Book specially prepared by NASSCOM as per the MoU.
2. Karl T Ulrich and Stephen D Eppinger, "Product Design and Development",
Tata McGraw Hill, 5th Edition, 2011.
3. John W Newstorm and Keith Davis, "Organizational Behavior", Tata
McGraw Hill, 11th Edition, 2005.

REFERENCES:
1. Hiriyappa B, “Corporate Strategy – Managing the Business”, Author House,
2013.
2. Peter F Drucker, “People and Performance”, Butterworth – Heinemann
[Elsevier], Oxford, 2004.
3. Vinod Kumar Garg and Venkita Krishnan N K, “Enterprise Resource
Planning – Concepts”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2003.
4. Mark S Sanders and Ernest J McCormick, "Human Factors in Engineering
and Design", McGraw Hill Education, 7th Edition, 2013.

WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://www.udemy.com/course/strategic-product-management-and-
leadership/
2. https://www.udemy.com/course/building-insanely-great-products/
3. https://www.coursera.org/learn/customer-insights-orientation

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://pursuite-production.s3-ap-southeast-1.amazonaws.com/
media/cms_page_media/162/FSIPD+OBF+-+2012+F0_1.pdf
2. https:// futureskillsnasscom. edcast. com/ pathways/ product-
management-primer-pathway/cards/5603673#

OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
1 Explain the basic essentials of product development. (K2)
2 Discuss the learnings to incorporate effective design for product
development. (K2)
3 Describe the various tools of innovation & product development process
in the Business context. (K2)
4 Identify the various process and choose the appropriate tools for
designing, development and testing. (K2)
234
 Syllabus ECE
5 Discuss disruptive models / process to manage a product development
from start to finish. (K2)

CO – PO, PSO MAPPING:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 1 2 2 1 1 - - 2 - -

CO2 3 3 3 3 2 1 1 - 3 - 2 -

CO3 3 2 3 3 3 1 2 1 3 - 2 3

CO4 3 3 2 3 2 - - - - 2 - -

CO5 3 3 3 3 2 1 2 1 3 - 3 -

235
 Syllabus ECE
PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - IV
20ECEL801 5G AND 6G WIRELESS L T P C
SDG NO. 4,8 9,
11,15 COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l Understand the Basics of 5G and Beyond Wireless communication
l Bring a basic understanding of the key technologies and enablers of
5G and beyond communication systems.
l Study 5G Radio Access Technology
l Learn massive MIMO and mmWave (mmW) communication
l Understand 6G Technology
l Learn 6G concepts

UNIT I DRIVERS FOR 5G 9

Evolution of LTE Technology to Beyond 4G – Pillars of 5G – Standardization
Activities -Use cases and Requirements – System Concept – Spectrum and
Regulations: Spectrum for 4G – Spectrum Challenges in 5G – Spectrum
Landscape and Requirements – Spectrum Access Modes and Sharing
Scenarios

UNIT II 5G ARCHITECTURE AND MILLIMETER

WAVE COMMUNICATION 9
5G Architecture: Software Defined Networking – Network Function
Virtualization – Basics about RAN Architecture –High-Level Requirements for
5G Architecture – Functional Architecture and 5G Flexibility – Physical
Architecture and 5G Deployment Millimeter Wave Communication: Channel
Propagation – Hardware Technologies for mmW Systems

UNIT III 5G RADIO ACCESS TECHNOLOGIES 9

Access Design Principles for Multi-user Communications – Multi-carrier with
Filtering – Non-orthogonal Schemes for Efficient Multiple Access – Radio
Access for Dense Deployments – Radio Access for V2X Communication.

UNIT IV MASSIVE MULTIPLE-INPUT MULTIPLE –OUTPUT SYSTEMS 9

MIMO in LTE – Single-user MIMO – Multi-user MIMO – Capacity of Massive
MIMO – Pilot Design of Massive MIMO – Resource Allocation and Transceiver
Algorithms for Massive MIMO

236
 Syllabus ECE
UNIT-V 6G OVERVIEW 9
Introduction to 6G Key Enablers: Wireless energy harvesting, machine
learning, visible light communication - IRS.
TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Asif Oseiran, Jose F.Monserrat and Patrick Marsch, “5G Mobile and
Wireless Communications Technology”, Cambridge University Press,
2016.
2. Jonathan Rodriquez, “Fundamentals of 5G Mobile Networks”, Wiley,
2015
3. Patrick Marsch, Omer Bulakci, Olav Queseth and Mauro Boldi, “5G
System Design – Architectural and Functional Considerations and Long
Term Research”, Wiley, 2018

WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc22_ee56/preview
2. http://www.iitkgp.ac.in

ONLINE REFERENCES:
1. https://hcis-journal.springeropen.com/articles/10.1186/s13673-
020-00258-2
2. https://www.qualcomm.com
3. www.electronics-notes.com › technology-basics
4. https://www.researchgate.net

OUTCOMES:
At the end of this course, the students should be able to:
1. Explain 4G-LTE and 5G cellular communication networks and
Spectrum standards (K2)
2. Describe 5G architectures and millimeter-wave communication (K2)
3. Illustrate the 5G techniques for the design of communication systems
(K2).
4. Describe various modulation and multiplexing techniques for 5G (K2)
5. Discuss the machine learning algorithms for resource allocation in 5G
MIMO systems(K2)
6. Explain the 6G technology (K2)

237
 Syllabus ECE
CO - PO, PSO MAPPING :
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 2 0 3 0 1 0 0 0 0 3 3 2 2

CO2 3 3 3 1 2 1 0 0 0 0 3 3 2 2

CO3 3 3 2 1 3 1 0 0 0 0 3 3 2 2

CO4 3 3 2 1 3 1 0 0 0 0 3 3 2 2

CO5 3 3 2 1 1 3 1 0 0 0 3 3 2 2

CO6 3 3 2 1 1 3 1 0 0 0 3 3 2 2

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - IV
20ECEL802 UNDERWATER WIRELESS L T P C
SDG NO. 7, 9, 14 COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
l Basics, Challenges and Issues in underwater acoustic propagation
l Different communication channels related to sea
l Architecture and the modeling of WSN scenario for underwater
communication
l Applications and designing of underwater wireless models

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 8
Overview – Peculiarities of underwater acoustic communication channels
relative to radio communication channels – Explorations establishing an
innovative digital underwater acoustic communication signal processing
system – Communication sonar equation.

UNIT II ACOUSTIC PROPERTIES AND ELEMENTS 10

Acoustic waves in water – The wave equation in various coordinate systems –
radiation of a spherical source – Reciprocity – Oceanographic and physical
properties – Reflection and transmission in multi-layered media – Ray
acoustics and ray tracing – Normal modes – Acoustic transducers and
antennas – Hydro acoustics.

UNIT III UNDERWATER ACOUSTIC COMMUNICATION CHANNELS 9

Theoretical methods of underwater acoustic fields – Sound transmission loss
in the sea – Multipath effects in underwater acoustic communication channels

238
 Syllabus ECE
– Fluctuation of transmitted sound in underwater acoustic communication
channels – Noise in the sea.

UNIT IV UNDERWATER WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS 10

Architecture – Propagation phenomena of underwater sensor network –
Issues and challenges – Radio communication model for underwater WSN.
Case Study: Optimal Node Placement in underwater WSN.

UNIT V DESIGN AND APPLICATIONS 8

ROV: Modeling, Design and Control – AUV: Design Essentials and Concepts –
Modeling and control.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Lufen Xu and Tianzeng Xu, “Digital Underwater Acoustic
Communications”, Academic Press, 2016.
2. Jens M Hovem, “Marine acoustics: The physics of sound in underwater
environments”, Los Altos Hills: Peninsula publishing, 2012.

REFERENCES:
1. K. M. Awan, P. A. Shah, K. Iqbal, S. Gillani, W. Ahmad, and Y. Nam,
“Underwater Wireless Sensor Networks: A Review of Recent Issues and
Challenges”, WCMC, 2019.
2. Emad Felemban, Faisal Karim Shaikh, Umair Mujtaba Qureshi, Adil A.
Sheikh, and Saad Bin Qaisar, “Underwater Sensor Network Applications: A
Comprehensive Survey”, IJDSN, Vol.11, 2015.
3. Carlos Uribe and Walter Grote, “Radio communication model for
underwater WSN”, 2009, 3 r d International Conference on New
Technologies, Mobility and Security, Pages (147-151).
4. Muhamad Felamban, Basem Shihada, and Kamran Jamshaid, “Optimal
Node Placement in Underwater Wireless Sensor Networks”, 2013, 27th
International Conference on Advanced Information Networking and
Applications (AINA), (pp. 492-499).
5. L. G. Garcıá-Valdovinos, T. Salgado-Jimé nez, M. Bandala-Sá nchez, L. Nava-
Balanzar, R. Herná ndez - Alvarado, and J. Cruz-Ledesma, “Modelling,
Design and Robust Control of a Remotely Operated Underwater Vehicle”,
International Journal of Advanced Robotic Systems, Vol.11(1), 2014.
6. L. A. Gonzalez, “Design, Modelling and Control of an Autonomous
Underwater Vehicle”, Bachelor of Engineering Honours Thesis 2004,
Mobile Robotics Lab – CIIPS, The University of Western Australia.

239
 Syllabus ECE
ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. Gomes, R. M., Martins, A., Sousa, A., Sousa, J. B., Fraga, S. L., & Pereira, F. L.
(2005, June), “A new ROV design: issues on low drag and mechanical
symmetry in Europe Oceans”, 2005 (Vol. 2, pp. 957-962). IEEE.
2. Chin, C. S., Lin, W. P., & Lin, J. Y. (2018), “Experimental validation of open-
frame ROV model for virtual reality simulation and control”, Journal of
Marine Science and Technology, 23(2), 267-287.
3. Dongkyun Kim, JuanC. Cano, Wei Wang, Floriano De Rango, and Kun Hua,
“Underwater Wireless Sensor Networks”, Volume 2015, Article ID
623042, 2 pages.
4. En Cheng, Shengli Chen, and Fei Yuan, “Design and Detection of Multilinear
Chirp Signals for Underwater Acoustic Sensor Networks”, Volume 2015,
Article ID 371579, 13 pages.
5. Chan-Ho Hwang, Ki-Man Kim, Seung-Yong Chun, and Sang-Kook Lee,
“Doppler Estimation Based on Frequency Average and Remodulation for
Underwater Acoustic Communication”, Volume 2015, Article ID 746919,
8 pages.
6. Chang-Uk Baek and Ji-Won Jung, “High Throughput Receiver Structure for
Underwater Communication”, Volume 2015, Article ID 481576, 6 pages.
7. Emad Felemban, Faisal Karim Shaikh, Umair Mujtaba Qureshi, Adil A.
Sheikh, and Saad Bin Qaisar, “Underwater Sensor Network Applications:
A Comprehensive Survey”, Volume2015,Article ID896832,14pages.
8. Wouter A. P. van Kleunen, Niels A. Moseley, Paul J. M. Havinga, and Nirvana
Meratnia, “Proteus II: Design and Evaluation of an Integrated Power-
Efficient Underwater Sensor Node”, Volume 2015, Article ID 791046, 10
pages.

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1. Explain the basic properties of underwater acoustic channels and signal
processing systems. (K2)
2. Discuss the acoustic properties and its respective elements with respect to
wave equation and ray acoustics. (K2)
3. Describe the relationship between different communication channels in
relation to the sea. (K2)
4. Characterize the environmental fluctuations in underwater
communication. (K2)
5. Demonstrate the solutions for the challenges in building underwater WSN.
(K3)
6. Design and model the different underwater communication scenarios.
(K3)

240
 Syllabus ECE
CO - PO, PSO MAPPING :
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 1 - - 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 2 2 1

CO2 3 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 - 3 2 3 3 3

CO3 3 - - 2 1 2 2 1 2 3 2 2 1 2

CO4 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 1 2 3 2 2 3 3

CO5 3 - 3 1 3 1 2 2 3 1 3 3 3 3

CO6 3 2 3 1 3 2 2 2 1 1 3 3 3 3

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - IV
20ECEL803 ELECTRONIC PACKAGING L T P C
SDG NO.3,4,11,15 AND TESTING 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
l To introduce and discuss various issues related to the system packaging.
l To introduce CAD used in designing wiring boards and testing.

UNIT I OVERVIEW OF ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS PACKAGING 9

Functions of an Electronic Package, Packaging Hierarchy, IC packaging: MEMS
packaging, consumer electronics packaging, medical electronics packaging,
Trends, Challenges, Driving Forces on Packaging Technology, Materials for
Microelectronic packaging, Packaging Material Properties, Ceramics,
Polymers, and Metals in Packaging, Material for high density interconnect
substrates.

UNIT II ELECTRICAL ISSUES IN PACKAGING 9

Electrical Issues of Systems Packaging, Signal Distribution, Power
Distribution, Electromagnetic Interference, Transmission Lines, Clock
Distribution, Noise Sources, Digital and RF Issues. Design Process Electrical
Design: Interconnect Capacitance, Resistance and Inductance fundamentals;
Packaging roadmaps - Hybrid circuits - Resistive, Capacitive and Inductive
parasitic.

UNIT III CHIP PACKAGES 9

IC Assembly - Purpose, Requirements, Technologies, Wire bonding, Tape
Automated Bonding, Flip Chip, Wafer Level Packaging, reliability, wafer level
burn – in and test. Single chip packaging: functions, types, materials processes,
properties, characteristics, trends. Multi chip packaging: types, design,
241
 Syllabus ECE
comparison, trends. System – in - package (SIP); Passives: discrete, integrated,
and embedded

UNIT IV PCB, SURFACE MOUNT TECHNOLOGY AND THERMAL

CONSIDERATIONS 9
Printed Circuit Board: Anatomy, CAD tools for PCB design, Standard
fabrication, Micro via Boards. Board Assembly: Surface Mount Technology,
Through Hole Technology, Process Control and Design challenges. Thermal
Management, Heat transfer fundamentals, Thermal conductivity and
resistance, Conduction, convection and radiation – Cooling requirements.

UNIT V TESTING 9
Reliability, Basic concepts, Environmental interactions. Thermal mismatch
and fatigue – failures – thermo mechanically induced –electrically induced –
chemically induced. Electrical Testing: System level electrical testing,
Interconnection tests, Active Circuit Testing, Design for Testability.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOK:
1. Tummala, Rao R., “Fundamentals of Microsystems Packaging”, McGraw
Hill, 2001.

REFERENCES:
1. Blackwell (Ed), “The Electronic Packaging Handbook”, CRC Press, 2000.
2. Tummala, Rao R, “Microelectronics Packaging Handbook”, McGraw Hill,
2008.
3. Bosshart, “Printed Circuit Boards Design and Technology”, Tata McGraw
Hill, 1988.
4. R.G. Kaduskar and V.B.Baru, “Electronic Product design”, Wiley India,
2011.
5. R.S.Khandpur, “Printed Circuit Board”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2005.
6. Michael L. Bushnell & Vishwani D. Agrawal, “Essentials of Electronic
Testing for Digital, Memory & Mixed signal VLSI Circuits”, Kluwer
Academic Publishers, 2000.
7. M. Abramovici, M. A. Breuer, and A.D. Friedman, “Digital System Testing
and Testable Design”, Computer Science Press, 1990.

WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112105267/
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108108031/

242
 Syllabus ECE
3. http://www.nptelvideos.in/2012/11/an-introduction-to-electronics-
system.html

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://www.classcentral.com/course/swayam-electronic-packaging-
and-manufacturing- 13021
2. https://advancedengineering.umd.edu/electronic-packaging
3. https://www.ipcindia.org.in/fundamentals-of-electronics-systems-
packaging-esp

OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course, the student should be able to:
1 Explain the various packaging types used along with the associated
thermal, speed, signal and integrity power issues.(K2)
2 Analyze the concepts of Electrical Issues in Packaging. (K3)
3 Design packages which can withstand higher temperature, vibrations
and shock.(K3)
4 Design PCBs which minimize the EMI and operate at higher
frequency.(K3)
5 Analyze the concepts of Testing and testing methods.(K3)
6 Device Test Plan and rules(K3)

CO - PO, PSO MAPPING :

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 1 2 3 3 - - - - - - - - 1 2

CO2 1 2 3 3 - - - - - - - - 1 2

CO3 1 2 3 3 - - - - - - - - 1 2

CO4 1 2 3 3 - - - - - - - - 1 2

CO5 1 2 3 3 - - - - - - - - 1 2

CO6 1 2 3 3 - - - - - - - - 1 2

243
 Syllabus ECE

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - IV
20ECEL804 L T P C
EMBEDDED PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT
SDG NO. 4 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l To provide the basic concepts of product design, product features and
its architecture
l To introduce the possible approaches for product development
l To understand the concepts of industrial design strategies
l To explore the stages of electronic product development
l To study about the embedded product design

UNIT I CONCEPTS OF PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT 9

Need for PD- Generic product Development Process Phases- Product
Development Process Flows- Product Development organization structures-
Strategic importance of Product Planning process – Product Specifications-
Target Specifications-Plan and establish product specifications - integration of
customer, designer, material supplier and process planner, Competitor and
customer – Understanding customer and behaviour analysis. Concept
Generation, Five Step Method-Basics of Concept selection- Creative thinking
–creativity and problem solving- creative thinking methods- generating
design concepts-systematic methods for designing –functional decomposition
– physical decomposition.

UNIT II INTRODUCTION TO APPROACHES IN PRODUCT

DEVELOPMENT 9
Product development management - establishing the architecture - creation -
Product Architecture changes - variety – component standardization ,
clustering -geometric layout development - Fundamental and incidental
interactions - related system level design issues - secondary systems -
architecture of the chunks - creating detailed interface specifications-Portfolio
Architecture competitive benchmarking- Approach for the benchmarking
process-Design for manufacturing - Industrial Design-Robust Design –
Prototype basics - Principles of prototyping - Planning for prototypes-
Economic & Cost Analysis -Testing Methodologies- Product Branding.

UNIT III INDUSTRIAL DESIGN STRATEGIES 9

Role of Integrating CAE, CAD, CAM tools for Simulating product performance
and manufacturing processes electronically- Basics on reverse engineering –
Reverse engineering strategies – Finding reusable software components –
244
 Syllabus ECE
Recycling real-time embedded software based approach and its logical basics-
Incorporating reverse engineering for consumer product development –case
study on DeskJet Printer.

UNIT IV ELECTRONIC PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT STAGES 9

Product Development Stages-Embedded product modeling- Linear, Iterative,
Prototyping, Spiral - Selection of Sensor, Voltage Supply, Power supply
protection, Grounding and noise elimination methods, Thermal protection
with heat management – PCB design steps – Software design and testing
method – documentation.

UNIT V EMBEDDED PRODUCTS DESIGN 9

Creating general Embedded System Architecture (with Case study example:
Mobile Phone / DeskJet Printer./ Robonoid as a product) –Architectural
Structures- Criteria in selection of Hardware Software Components,
processors, input/output interfaces & connectors, ADC System ,Memory,
choosing Bus Communication Standards, Criteria in selection of Embedded
OS/Device Drivers, Need for Developing with IDE, Translation & Debugging
Tools & Application Software, Performance Testing, Costing, Benchmarking,
Documentation.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Anita Goyal, Karl T Ulrich, Steven D Eppinger, "Product Design and
Development", McGraw –Hill International Edns.1999/ Tata
McGrawEducation, ISBN-10-007-14679-9.
2. R.G. Kaduskar and V.B. Baru, “ Electronic Product Design”, Wiley, 2014
3. George E.Dieter, Linda C.Schmidt, “Engineering Design”, McGraw-Hill
International Edition,Fourth Edition, 2009, ISBN 978-007-127189-9
4. Stephen Armstrong, “Engineering and Product Development
Management; The Holistic Approach”, CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY
PRESS (CUP),2014.

REFERENCES:
1. Rajkamal, “Embedded system-Architecture, Programming, Design”
TMH,2011.
2. KEVIN OTTO & KRISTIN WOOD, “Product Design and Development“,
Fourth Edition,2009, Product Design Techniques in Reverse
Engineering and New Product Development , Pearson Education
(LPE),2001./ISBN 9788177588217
3. Yousef Haik, T. M. M. Shahin, “Engineering Design Process”, 2nd

245
 ECE
Syllabus
Edition Reprint, Cengage Learning, 2010, ISBN 0495668141
4. Clive L.Dym, Patrick Little, “Engineering Design: A Project-based
Introduction”, Third Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2009, ISBN 978-0-
470- 22596-7.

ONLINE RESOURCES
1. https://barrgroup.com/embedded-systems/consulting-services/
product-development
2. http://logicproindia.com/index.php/products/
3. https://www.arm.com/resources/education/online-courses
4. https://openlabpro.com/design-platforms/

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1. Use the integration of customer requirements in product design.(K3)
2. Apply structural approach to concept generation, creativity, selection
and testing.(K3)
3. Outline various aspects of design such as industrial design, design of
Consumer specific product and product architecture.(K2)
4. Define various aspects of its Reverse Engineering manufacture,
economic analysis.(K1)
5. Design an embedded product.(K3)
6. Apply the various tool to design and simulate the performance of the
product(K3)

CO - PO, PSO MAPPING :

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 2 3 2 3 2 2 1 2 1 1 3 2 3

CO2 3 2 3 2 3 2 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 3

CO3 3 2 3 2 3 2 2 1 2 1 1 3 2 3

CO4 3 2 3 2 3 2 2 1 2 1 2 3 2 3

CO5 3 2 3 2 3 2 2 1 2 1 1 3 1 3

CO6 2 1 2 - 2 - - 1 - - - 1 2 1

246
 Syllabus ECE

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - IV
20ECEL805 L T P C
RF SYSTEM DESIGN AND MMIC
SDG NO. 4, 9, 11 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
l To understand the conceptual understanding of RF receiver
Parameters, architectures with their different issues.
l To understand the Practical RF measurement
l To know the basic techniques needed for analysis of RF systems and
MIC Components
l To know the basic techniques needed for analysis of RF systems
l To understand the fundamentals of RF design and Microwave
Integrated Circuits

UNIT I RF SYSTEM DESIGN 9

Frequency Planning - Blockers, Spurs and Descending, Transmitter Leakage,
LO Leakage and Interference, Image, Half IF, Link Budget Analysis – Linearity,
Noise, Signal-to-Noise Ratio, Receiver Gain, Propagation Effects - Path Loss,
Multipath and Fading, Equalization, Diversity, Coding, Interface Planning

UNIT II REVIEW OF RECEIVER ARCHITECTURES 9

Heterodyne Receivers, Image Reject Receivers - Hartley Architecture, Weaver
Architecture, Zero IF Receivers, Low IF Receivers, Issues in Direct Conversion
Receivers – Noise, LO Leakage and Radiation, Phase and Amplitude Imbalance,
DC Offset, Intermodulations, Architecture Comparison, and Trade-off.

UNIT III SILICON-BASED RECEIVER DESIGN 9

Receiver Architecture and Design - System Description and Calculations,
Basics of OFDM, System Architectures, System Calculations, Circuit Design -
SiGe BiCMOS Process Technology, LNA, Mixer, Frequency Divider, Receiver
Design Steps- Design and Integration of Building Blocks, DC Conditions,
Scattering Parameters, Small-Signal Performance, Transient Performance,
Noise Performance, Linearity Performance, Parasitic Effects, Process
Variation, 50-Ω and Non50-Ω Receivers, Layout Considerations

UNIT IV RECEIVER FRONT-END MEASUREMENTS 9

DC Test, Functionality Test, SParameter Test, Conversion Gain Test, Linearity
Test, Noise Figure Test, I/Q Imbalance, DC Offset, Measurement Results, and
Discussions - Close Examination of Noise Figure and I/Q Imbalance,
Comments on I/Q Imbalance

247
 Syllabus ECE
UNIT V MIC COMPONENTS 9
Introduction to MICs, Fabrication Technology, Advantages and applications,
MIC components- Microstrip components, Coplanar circuits: Transistors,
switches, active filters. Coplanar microwave amplifiers.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Joy Laskar, Babak Matinpour, Sudipto Chakraborty, “Modern Receiver
Front- Ends Systems, Circuits, and Integration”, Wiley- Interscience,
2004.
2. T. Lee,“Design of CMOS RF Integrated Circuits”, Cambridge, 2004.

REFERENCES:
1. Igor Minin, "Microwave and millimeter wave technologies modern UWB
antennas and equipment", In-Tech publication, 2010.

WEB REFERENCES:
1 h t t p s : / / o c w. m i t . e d u / c o u r s e s / e l e c t r i c a l - e n g i n e e r i n g - a n d -
computerscience/6-772-compound-semiconductor-devices-spring-
2003/lecture notes/Lecture10v2.pdf

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1 https://swayam.gov.in/nd1_noc20_ee25/

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to:
1 Discuss the basic concepts of RF and MIC. (K1)
2 Understand the various components of RF systems. (K1)
3 Discuss the operation of RF circuits (K1)
4 Analyze the performance of RF Circuits (K2)
5 Understand the operation of Microwave components. (K1)
6 Discuss various MIC components (K1)

248
 Syllabus ECE
CO - PO, PSO MAPPING :
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 2 - 2 3 3 3 3
. CO2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 1 - 1 2 2 3 2

CO3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 - 2 2 2 3 2

CO4 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 - 2 2 2 3 2

CO5 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 3

CO6 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 3

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - IV
20CSEL806 L T P C
PHOTONIC NETWORKS
SDG NO. 9 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l To understand the importance of the back bone infrastructure for our
present and future communication needs
l To familiarize the student with the architectures and the protocol stack in
use
l To understand the differences in the design of data plane and the control
plane and the routing, switching and the resource allocation methods
l To understand the network management and protection methods in
vogue
l To expose the student to the advances in networking and switching
domains and the future trends

UNIT I OPTICAL SYSTEM COMPONENTS 9

Light Propagation in optical fibers – Loss & bandwidth, System limitations,
Nonlinear effects; Solitons Optical Network Components–Couplers, Isolators
& Circulators, Multiplexers & Filters, Optical Amplifiers, Switches, Wavelength
Converters.

UNIT II OPTICAL NETWORK ARCHITECTURES 9

Introduction to Optical Networks; SONET/SDH, Metropolitan - Area
Networks, Layered Architecture; Broadcast and Select Networks – Topologies
for Broadcast Networks, Media - Access Control Protocols, Wavelength
Routing Architecture.

249
 Syllabus ECE
UNIT III WAVELENGTH ROUTING NETWORKS 9
The optical layer, Optical Network Nodes, Routing and wavelength
assignment, Traffic Grooming in Optical Networks, Architectural variations-
Linear Light wave networks, Logically Routed Networks.

UNIT IV PACKET SWITCHING AND ACCESS NETWORKS 9

Photonic Packet Switching – OTDM, Multiplexing and Demultiplexing,
Synchronization, Broadcast OTDM networks, Switch-based networks,
Contention Resolution Access Networks – Network Architecture overview,
Optical Access Network Architectures and OTDM networks.

UNIT V NETWORK DESIGN AND MANAGEMENT 9

Transmission System Engineering–System model, Power penalty-transmitter,
receiver, Optical amplifiers, crosstalk, dispersion, Wavelength stabilization,
Overall design considerations, Control and Management–Network
management functions, Configuration management, Performance
management, Fault management, Optical safety, Service interface.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

TEXT BOOKS:
1. Rajiv Ramaswami and Kumar N. Sivarajan, “Optical Networks: A Practical
and Perspective”, Harcourt Asia Pte Ltd., Second Edition, 2004.
2. C.Siva Ram Moorthy and Mohan Gurusamy, “WDM Optical Networks:st
Concept, Design and Algorithms”, Prentice Hall of India, First Edition,
2002

REFERENCES:
1. P.E. Green, Jr., “Fiber Optic Networks”, Prentice Hall,NJ, 1993.
2. Biswanath Mukherjee, “Optical WDM Networks”, Springer Series, 2006.

WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://www.fujitsu.com/global/about/resources/publications/
fstj/archives/vol35-1.html
2. https://www.adva.com/en/innovation/photonic-networking

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://moodle.telt.unsw.edu.au/login/index.php

250
 Syllabus ECE
OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to
1 Use the back bone infrastructure for our present and future
communication needs. (K2)
2 Analyze network management and protection methods in vogue. (K2)
3 Analyze the architectures and the protocol stack. (K2)
4 Analyze the design of data plane and control plane. (K2)
5 Understand the protection methods in vogue . (K2)
6 Compare the differences in the design of data plane, control plane,
routing, switching, resource allocation methods, (K2)

CO- PO, PSO MAPPING:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 2 - 2 3 3 3 3

CO2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 1 - 1 2 2 3 2

CO3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 - 2 2 2 3 2

CO4 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 - 2 2 2 3 2

CO5 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 3

CO6 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 3

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - IV
20ECEL807 L T P C
SDG NO. 9
TELEHEALTH TECHNOLOGY
3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
l Learn the key principles for telemedicine and health
l Understand telemedical technology.
l Know telemedical standards, mobile telemedicine and its applications.

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF TELEMEDICINE 9

History of telemedicine, definition of telemedicine, tele-health, tele-care,
scope, Telemedicine Systems, benefits & limitations of telemedicine. Ethical
and legal aspects of Telemedicine - Confidentiality, Social and legal issues,
Safety and regulatory issues, Advances in Telemedicine.

251
 Syllabus ECE
UNIT II TYPE OF INFORMATION & COMMUNICATION
INFRASTRUCTURE FOR TELEMEDICINE 9
Audio, video, still images, text and data, fax-type of communications and
network: PSTN, POTS, ANT, ISDN, internet, air/ wireless communications,
GSM satellite, microwave, Mobile health and ubiquitous healthcare.

UNIT III TELEMEDICAL STANDARDS 9

Data Security and Standards: Encryption, Cryptography, Mechanisms of
encryption, phases of Encryption. Protocols: TCP/IP, ISO-OSI, Standards to
follow DICOM, HL7, H. 320 series Video Conferencing, Security and
confidentiality of medical records, Cyber laws related to telemedicine.

UNIT IV PICTURE ARCHIVING AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM 9

Introduction to radiology information system and ACS, DICOM, PACS strategic
plan and needs assessment, technical Issues, PACS architecture.

UNIT V APPLICATION OF TELEMEDICINE 9

Telemedicine access to health care services – health education and self care. •
Introduction to robotics surgery, telesurgery. Telecardiology, Teleoncology,
Telemedicine in neurosciences, Electronic Documentation, e-health services
security and interoperability. .Business aspects - Project planning and costing,
Usage of telemedicine.
TOTAL:L+T=45PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Norris A C, “Essentials of Telemedicine and Telecare”, John Wiley, New
York, 2002.
2. H K Huang, “PACS and Imaging Informatics: Basic Principles and
Applications” Wiley, New Jersey, 2010

REFERENCES:
1. Olga Ferrer Roca, Marcelo Sosa Iudicissa, “Handbook of Telemedicine”, IOS
Press, Netherland, 2002.
2. Khandpur R S, “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw
Hill, New Delhi, 2003.
3. Keith J Dreyer, Amit Mehta, James H Thrall, “Pacs: A Guide to the Digital
Revolution”, Springer, New York, 2002.
4. Khandpur R S, “TELEMEDICINE – Technology and Applications”, PHI
Learning Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2017.

WEB REFERENCES :
1. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=8C0qB4w_fk8

252
 Syllabus ECE
2. https://www.physio-pedia.com/Fundamentals_of_Telehealth_
Technology#:~:text= Telehealth%20is%20the%20delivery%
20of,one%20particular%20type%20of%20technology.

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to:
1. To learn objectives of Telehealth, Tele care and Organs of telemedicine.
(K2)
2. Describe the Principles of Multimedia - Text, Audio, Video, data, Data
communications and networks, PSTN, POTS, ANT, ISDN, Internet, Air/
wireless communications.(K2)
3. Discuss the ethical and legal issues involved in telemedicine (K2)
4. Explain the Standards and Protocols to be followed in Telemedicine :
TCP/IP, ISO-OSI, DICOM, HL7, H. 320 series (Video phone based ISBN).
(K2)
5. Illustrate the function of Picture archiving and communications system
(K2)
6. Discuss the various applications in Telemedicine. (K2)

CO – PO, PSO MAPPING:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 3 2 - - 3 - - 3 - - 2 3 2

CO2 - 2 - - 2 3 - 3 2 - - - 3 1

CO3 - - - 3 - - 3 - - 3 3 2 1 3

CO4 - 2 - - 2 3 3 - 2 - - - 2 1

CO5 - 3 3 - - 3 3 3 - 3 - - 2 -

CO6 3 - - - 2 2 - - - 2 3 - 2 1

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - IV
20ECEL808 L T P C
MEDICAL INFORMATICS
SDG NO. 9 3 0 0 3
OBJECTIVES:
l To teach ICT applications in medicine with an introduction to health
informatics.
l To understand the theories and practices adopted in Hospital Information
Systems in the light of medical standards, medical data formats and recent
trends in Hospital Information Systems.
253
 Syllabus ECE
UNIT I MEDICAL INFORMATICS 9
Introduction - Medical Informatics – Bioinformatics – Health Informatics -
Structure of Medical Informatics – Functional capabilities of Hospital
Information System - On-line services and off – line services - History taken by
computer, Dialogue with the computer.

UNIT II MEDICAL STANDARDS 9

Evolution of Medical Standards – IEEE 11073 - HL7 – DICOM – IRMA - LOINC –
HIPPA – Electronics Patient Records – Healthcare Standard Organizations –
JCAHO (Join Commission on Accreditation of Healthcare Organization) - JCIA
(Joint Commission International Accreditation) - Evidence Based Medicine -
Bioethics.

UNIT III MEDICAL DATA ACQUISITION AND STORAGE 9

Plug-in Data Acquisition and Control Boards – Data Acquisition using Serial
Interface - Medical Data formats – Signal, Image and Video Formats – Medical
Databases - Automation in clinical laboratories - Intelligent Laboratory
Information System - PACS , Data mining.

UNIT IV HEALTH INFORMATICS 9

Bioinformatics Databases, Bio-information technologies, Semantic web and
Bioinformatics, Genome projects, Clinical informatics, Nursing informatics,
Public health informatics -Education and Training.

UNIT V RECENT TRENDS IN MEDICAL INFORMATICS 9

Medical Expert Systems, Virtual reality applications in medicine, Virtual
Environment - Surgical simulation - Radiation therapy and planning –
Telemedicine – virtual Hospitals - Smart Medical Homes – Personalized e-
health services – Biometrics - GRID and Cloud Computing in Medicine.
TOTAL: 45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. R.D.Lele, “Computers in Medicine: Progress in Medical Informatics’’,
Tata McGraw Hill Publishing computers Ltd, New Delhi, 2005.
2. Mohan Bansal, “Medical informatics”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
computers Ltd, New Delhi, 2003.

REFERENCES:
1. N.Mathivanan, “PC-Based Instrumentation’’, Prentice Hall of India Pvt
Ltd – New Delhi, 2007.
2. Yi – Ping Phoebe Chen, “Bioinformatics Technologies’’, Springer
International Edition, New Delhi, 2007.
254
3. Orpita Bosu, Bioinformatics – Databases, Tools and Algorithms, Oxford
University Press, 2007.
4. Lukas K Baehler, Bioinformatics – Basics, Applications in Biological
Sciences and Medicine, Taylor & Francis, London, 2005.
5. John P Woodward, Biometrics – The Ultimate Reference, Dreamtech
Publishers, New Delhi, 2003.

WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=-otUihKQy5Q
2. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=pzS--PaGC9o
3. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=MB_yyDerwGs
4. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=mmeGQOmzb3M
5. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=vlGKot_zIDg

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://www.mtu.edu/health-informatics/what-is/
2. https://onlinedegrees.sandiego.edu/what-is-medical-informatics/
3. https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK216088/
4. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/102/106/102106065/
5. https://www.google.com/aclk?sa=l&ai=DChcSEwjIxdzb7M7w
AhVYBWAKHZWwCokYABAAGgJ0bQ&ae=2&sig=AOD64_13IJxJvajTum
Dberm4hAUoetuaOg&q&adurl&ved=2ahUKEwjphtXb7M7wAhXhyDgG
HTn5CqQQ0Qx6BAgEEAE

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to:
1 Summarize health informatics and different ICT applications in
medicine. (K2)
2 Demonstrate Hospital Information Systems. (K3)
3 Analyze, appreciate and adopt medical standards. (K2)
4 Illustrate medical data acquisition system and its storage. (K3)
5 Apply virtual reality tools in medical informatics. (K3)
6 Examine the notion of various information systems and their
requirements.(K3)

255
CO – PO, PSO MAPPING:
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 3 - - 2 - - - - - - 3 - -

CO2 - - 3 3 3 2 - - 1 - 3 3 - 2

CO3 - - - - 3 3 - 3 - 3 - 3 - 1

CO4 3 1 2 - 3 1 - - - - - 3 - -

CO5 - - - 3 3 3 3 3 - - - 3 - 1

CO6 - - 3 3 3 - - - - - 3 3 - 1

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - IV
20ECEL809 L T P C
ROBOTICS AND AUTOMATION
SDG NO. 9 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l To understand the basic concepts associated with the design, functioning,
applications and social aspects of robots
l To study about the electrical drive systems and sensors used in robotics
for various applications
l To learn about analyzing robot kinematics, dynamics through different
methodologies and study various design aspects of robot arm
manipulator and end-effector
l To learn about various motion planning techniques and the associated
control architecture
l To understand the implications of AI and other trending concepts of
robotics

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ROBOTICS 9

Introduction -- brief history, definition, anatomy, types, classification,
specification and need based applications; role and need of robots for the
immediate problems of the society, future of mankind and automation-ethical
issues; industrial scenario local and global, case studies on mobile robot
research platform and industrial serial arm manipulator

UNIT II BUILDING BLOCKS OF A ROBOT 9

Types of electric motors - DC, Servo, Stepper; specification, drives for motors -
speed & direction control and circuitry, Selection criterion for actuators, direct

256
drives, non-traditional actuators; Sensors for localization, navigation, obstacle
avoidance and path planning in known and unknown environments – optical,
inertial, thermal, chemical, biosensor, other common sensors; Case study on
choice of sensors and actuators for maze solving robot and self driving cars.

UNIT III KINEMATICS, DYNAMICS AND DESIGN OF ROBOTS &

END EFFECTORS 9
Robot kinematics - Geometric approach for 2R, 3R manipulators,
homogeneous transformation using D-H representation, kinematics of WMR,
Lagrangian formulation for 2R robot dynamics; Mechanical design aspects of a
2R manipulator, WMR; End-effector - common types and design case study.

UNIT IV NAVIGATION, PATH PLANNING AND CONTROL

ARCHITECTURE 9
Mapping & Navigation – SLAM, Path planning for serial manipulators; types of
control architectures - Cartesian control, Force control and hybrid
position/force control, Behaviour based control, application of Neural
network, fuzzy logic, optimization algorithms for navigation problems,
programming methodologies of a robot

UNIT V AI AND OTHER RESEARCH TRENDS IN ROBOTICS 9

Application of Machine learning - AI, Expert systems; Tele-robotics and Virtual
Reality, Micro & Nanorobots, Unmanned vehicles, Cognitive robotics,
Evolutionary robotics, Humanoids
TOTAL:45 PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Saeed. B. Niku, Introduction to Robotics, Analysis, system, Applications,
Pearson educations, 2002
2. Roland Siegwart, Illah Reza Nourbakhsh, Introduction to Autonomous
Mobile Robots, MIT Press, 2011

REFERENCES:
1. Richard David Klafter, Thomas A. Chmielewski, Michael Negin, Robotic
engineering: an integrated approach, Prentice Hall, 1989
2. Craig, J. J., Introduction to Robotics: Mechanics and Control, Second
Edition, Addison-Wesley, 1989.
3. K.S. Fu, R.C. Gonzalez and C.S.G. Lee, Robotics: Control, Sensing, Vision and
Intelligence, McGraw-Hill, 1987.
4. Wesley E Snyder R, Industrial Robots, Computer Interfacing and Control,
Prentice Hall International Edition, 1988.
5. Robin Murphy, Introduction to AI Robotics, MIT Press, 2000
257
6. Ronald C. Arkin, Behavior-based Robotics, MIT Press, 1998
7. N. P. Padhy, Artificial Intelligence and Intelligent Systems, Oxford
University Press, 2005
8. Stefano Nolfi, Dario Floreano, Evolutionary Robotics – The Biology,
Intelligence and Technology of Self–Organizing Machines (Intelligent
Robotics and Autonomous Agents series), MIT Press, 2004.

VIDEO LINKS
1 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/107/106/107106090/
2 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=xrwz9IxpMJg
3 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107289/
4 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=NwjbZyLTPjE

OUTCOMES
Upon completion of the course, student should be able to
1. Explain the concepts of industrial robots in terms of classification,
specifications and coordinate systems, along with the need and
application of robots & automation (K2)
2. Examine different sensors and actuators for applications like maze
solving and self driving cars. (K2)
3. Design a 2R robot & an end-effector and solve the kinematics and
dynamics of motion for robots. (K3)
4. Explain navigation and path planning techniques along with the control
architectures adopted for robot motion planning. (K2)
5. Describe the impact and progress in AI and other research trends in the
field of robotics. (K2)
6. Select the robot manipulators, end effectors and its programming
languages for the specified applications. (K2)

CO – PO, PSO MAPPING:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 - - - 2 2 1

CO2 3 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 - - - 2 2 1

CO3 3 3 2 2 1 2 1 1 - - - 2 2 2

CO4 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 - - - 2 2 2

CO5 3 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 - - - 2 2 2

CO6 3 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 - - - 2 2 2

258
 PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - IV
20ECEL810 L T P C
MEDICAL IMAGING SYSTEMS
SDG NO. 9 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l To study the production of x-rays and its application to different
medical Imaging techniques.
l To study the different types of Radio diagnostic techniques.
l To study the special imaging techniques used for visualizing the cross
sections of the body
l To study the imaging of soft tissues using ultrasound technique

UNIT I PRINCIPLES OF RADIOGRAPHIC EQUIPMENT 9

X-Ray tubes, cooling systems, removal of scatters, Fluoroscopy- construction
of image Intensifier tubes, angiographic setup, mammography, digital
radiology, DSA.

UNIT II COMPUTED TOMOGRAPHY 9

Need for sectional images, Principles of sectional scanning, CT detectors,
Methods of reconstruction, Iterative, Back projection, convolution and Back-
Projection. Artifacts, Principle of 3D imaging

UNIT III RADIO ISOTOPIC IMAGING 9

Alpha, Beta and Gamma radiation, Radiation detectors, Radio isotopic imaging
equipments, Radio nuclides for imaging, Gamma ray camera, scanners,
Positron Emission tomography, SPECT,PET/CT.

UNIT IV ULTRASONIC SYSTEMS 9

Wave propagation and interaction in Biological tissues, Acoustic radiation
fields, continuous and pulsed excitation, Transducers and imaging systems,
Scanning methods, Imaging Modes, Principles and theory of image generation.

UNIT V MAGNETIC RESONANCE IMAGING 9

NMR, Principles of MRI, Relaxation processes and their measurements, Pulse
sequencing and MR image acquisition, MRI Instrumentation, Functional MRI.
TOTAL:L=45PERIODS
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Medical Imaging Signals and Systems, Second edition Jerry L. Prince
Jonathan Links, Pearson Education Publications, ISBN-13:
9780133583151, 2014.
259
2. Victor I.Mikla and Victor V. Mikla, "Medical Imaging Technology",
Elsevier Publications.

REFERENCES:
1. D.N.Chesney and M.O.Chesney Radio graphic imaging, CBS Publications,
New Delhi, 1987.
2. Steve Webb, The Physics of Medical Imaging, Taylor & Francis, New
York.1988.
3. Peggy, W., Roger D.Ferimarch, MRI for Technologists, Mc Graw Hill, New
York, 1995.
4. Donald W.McRobbice, Elizabeth A.Moore, Martin J.Grave and Martin
R.Prince MRI from picture to proton ,Cambridge University press, New
York 2006.
5. Jerry L.Prince and Jnathan M.Links,” Medical Imaging Signals and
Systems”- Pearson Education Inc. 2006

WEB REFERENCES:
1. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=PcirQo25FWU
2. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9gNCCnEEv5w

ONLINE RESOURCES:
1. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc21_bt50/preview
2. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc20_ee40/preview

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the course, the student should be able to:
1 Outline the principles of Medical Imaging. (K2)
2 Explain about the production of x-rays and its application to different
medical Imaging techniques.(K2)
3 Interpret the special imaging techniques for visualizing the cross
sections of the body using Computed Tomography(K2)
4 Analyse the Radio isotopic images and practice the Radio isotopic
imaging systems(K2)
5 Apply the principles in the imaging of soft tissues using ultrasound
technique(K2)
6 Demonstrate professionalism in the principles of Magnetic Resonance
Imaging(K2)

260
CO – PO, PSO MAPPING:
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 1 2 3 3 3 1 3 2 2 1 3 2 1

CO2 3 1 2 3 3 3 1 3 2 2 1 3 2 1

CO3 3 3 2 3 3 3 1 3 2 2 1 3 2 1

CO4 3 3 2 3 3 3 1 3 2 2 1 3 2 1

CO5 3 1 2 3 3 3 1 3 2 2 1 3 2 1

CO6 3 3 2 3 3 3 1 3 2 2 1 3 2 1

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES - IV
20MGEL801 L T P C
SDG NO. 3,4,5,8,10, PROFESSIONAL ETHICS AND VALUES
13,14,15,16 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:
l An understanding of their duties and responsibilities as professionals
through gaining knowledge of the philosophies of ethics, professional
practice, and world culture.
l Basic knowledge to make informed ethical decisions when confronted
with problems in the working environment.
l Improved awareness of potential ethical issues within an engineering
context.
l Team skills through working in teams on assignments and in-class
assignments.
l Subjective analytical skills through investigation and evaluation of
ethical problems in engineering settings using accepted tests for
moral problem solving.
l An understanding of how societal morals vary with culture and its
influence on ethical thought and action.
l Improved communications skills with regard to ethical and
professional issues in engineering.
l Know some of the classic cases as well as contemporary issues in
engineering ethics.

261
UNIT I HUMAN VALUES
Morals, Values, and Ethics – Integrity –Trustworthiness – Work Ethics –
Service-Learning – Civic Virtue – Respect for others – Living Peacefully –
Caring – Sharing – Honesty –Courage – Value Time – Co-operation –
Commitment – Empathy – Self-confidence – Spirituality- Character.

UNIT II PRINCIPLES FOR HARMONY

Truthfulness – Customs and Traditions -Value Education – Human Dignity –
Human Rights – Fundamental Duties – Aspirations and Harmony (I, We &
Nature) – Gender Bias – Emotional Intelligence – Salovey – Mayer Model –
Emotional Competencies – Conscientiousness.

UNIT III ENGINEERING ETHICS AND SOCIAL EXPERIMENTATION

History of Ethics – Need of Engineering Ethics – Senses of Engineering Ethics-
Profession and Professionalism ––Self Interest – Moral Autonomy –
Utilitarianism – Virtue Theory – Uses of Ethical Theories – Deontology- Types
of Inquiry –Kohlberg's Theory – Gilligan's Argument – Heinz's Dilemma –
Comparison with Standard Experiments –– Learning from the Past –
Engineers as Managers – Consultants and Leaders – Balanced Outlook on Law
– Role of Codes – Codes and Experimental Nature of Engineering.

UNIT IV ENGINEERS' RESPONSIBILITIES TOWARDS SAFETY AND RISK

The concept of Safety – Safety and Risk – Types of Risks – Voluntary
v/sInvoluntary Risk – Consequences – Risk Assessment –Accountability –
Liability – Reversible Effects – Threshold Levels of Risk – Delayed
v/sImmediate Risk – Safety and the Engineer – Designing for Safety – Risk-
Benefit Analysis-Accidents.

UNIT V ENGINEERS' DUTIES AND RIGHTS

Concept of Duty – Professional Duties – Collegiality – Techniques for Achieving
Collegiality – Senses of Loyalty – Consensus and Controversy – Professional
and Individual Rights – Confidential and Proprietary Information – Conflict of
Interest-Ethical egoism – Collective Bargaining – Confidentiality – Gifts and
Bribes – Problem solving-Occupational Crimes- Industrial Espionage- Price
Fixing-Whistle Blowing.

UNIT VI GLOBAL ISSUES

Globalization and MNCs –Cross Culture Issues – Business Ethics – Media Ethics
– Environmental Ethics – Endangering Lives – Bio Ethics – Computer Ethics –
War Ethics – Research Ethics -Intellectual Property Rights.

262
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Engineering Ethics & Human Values by M.Govindarajan, S.Natarajan and
V.S.SenthilKumar-PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd – 2009

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Ethical Choices in Business Response Books, Sekhar, R.C: 1997, New
Delhi,Sage Publications.
2. The Ethical Organisation, Kitson, Alan and Campebell, Robert: 1996.
Great Britain Macmillan Press Ltd.
3. Engineering Ethics, Pinkus, Rosa Lyun B., Larry J Shulman, Norman
Phummon, Harvey Wolfe:1997, New York, Cambridge Uty., Press
4. Professional Ethics by R. Subramaniam – Oxford Publications, New
Delhi.
5. Ethics in Engineering by Mike W. Martin and Roland Schinzinger – Tata
McGraw-Hill – 2003.
6. Professional Ethics and Morals by Prof.A.R.Aryasri, Dharanikota
Suyodhana – Maruthi Publications.
7. Engineering Ethics by Harris, Pritchard, and Rabins, Cengage Learning,
New Delhi.
8. Human Values & Professional Ethics by S. B. Gogate, Vikas Publishing
House Pvt. Ltd., Noida.
9. Professional Ethics and Human Values by A. Alavudeen, R.Kalil Rahman
and M. Jayakumaran – University Science Press.
10. Professional Ethics and Human Values by Prof.D.R.Kiran-Tata McGraw-
Hill – 2013
11. Human Values And Professional Ethics by Jayshree Suresh and B. S.
Raghavan, S.Chand Publications

WEB RESOURCES
1 Ethos Education provides a concise guide on developing a code of ethics
for primary and secondary schools.
2 The Ethics Resource Center has a toolkit available for use. When used
for commercial purposes, a nominal license fee is required.
3 Creating A Code Of Ethics for Your Organization, with many suggested
books, by Chris MacDonald
4 The Deloitte Center for Corporate Governance offers a variety of
resources for those who are active in governance, including a variety of
resources and a set of suggested guidelines for writing a code of ethics
or a code of conduct.

263
MOOC REFERENCES:
1 https://www.udemy.com/course/worlplace-ethics-and-attitude/
2 https://www.udemy.com/course/business-ethics-how-to-create-an-
ethical-organization/
3 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/110/105/110105097/Ethics in
Engineering Practice
4 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/109/104/109104068/Human Values
5 https://www.coursera.org/learn/ethics-technology-engineering
6 https://www.classcentral.com/course/ethics-technology-engineering-
10485

OUTCOMES:
Upon completion of the corse, the students will be able to
1 Classify between ethical and non-ethical situations. (K2)
2 Discuss and practice moral judgment in conditions of dilemma. (K2)
3 Explain and relate the code of ethics to social experimentation and real
world scenarios. (K2)
4 Describe risk and safety measures in various engineering fields. (K2)
5 Explain the impact of engineering solutions in a global/societal /
professional context. (K2)

CO – PO, PSO MAPPING:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 2 2 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 1 3

CO2 2 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3

CO3 3 2 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 1 3

CO4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

CO5 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 1 3

264
Imagine the Future and
Make it happen!

Together let’s build a better world where there is NO POVERTY and ZERO HUNGER.

We have GOOD HEALTH AND WELL BEING QUALITY EDUCATION and full GENDER EQUALITY everywhere.
There is CLEAN WATER AND SANITATION for everyone. AFFORDABLE AND CLEAN ENERGY
which will help to create DECENT WORK AND ECONOMIC GROWTH. Our prosperity shall be fuelled

by investments in INDUSTRY, INNOVATION AND INFRASTRUCTURE that will help us to

REDUCE INEQUALITIES by all means. We will live in SUSTAINABLE CITIES AND COMMUNITIES.
RESPONSIBLE CONSUMPTION AND PRODUCTION will help in healing our planet.

CLIMATE ACTION will reduce global warming and we will have abundant,

flourishing LIFE BELOW WATER , rich and diverse LIFE ON LAND.

We will enjoy PEACE AND JUSTICE through STRONG INSTITUTIONS

and will build long term PARTNERSHIPS FOR THE GOALS.

For the goals to be reached,

everyone needs to do their part:
Together we can...
governments, the private sector,
civil society and People like you.
S
Chairman & CEO - Sairam Institutions
We build a Better nation
through Quality education.

College Campus
Sri Sai Leo Nagar, West Tambaram,

SAI RAM
Chennai - 600 044. Ph : 044-2251 2111

Administrative Office
“Sai Bhavan”, 31B, Madley Road, T.Nagar,
INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY Chennai - 600 017. Ph : 044-4226 7777
An Autonomous Institution
Afliated to Anna University & Approved by AICTE, New Delhi e-mail : sairam@sairamgroup.in
Accredited by NBA and NAAC “A+”
ISO 9001:2015 Certified and MHRD NIRF ranked institutions www.sairamgroup.in